^liiiiilllilil'lli'Tii Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031242450 §ntk aul tM. Ail^OLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES I. A FIEST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK IND PRACTICAL GRAMMAR. By Thomas K. Arnold, A. M. Revised and 5il6fi5ll» Corrected, by J. A. fencer, A. M. One vol. 12mo., 75 els. II. LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION: A. Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. By Thomas K. AnNOLD^ A. M I Aevised and Corrected by J. A. Sponcer, A. M. 12mo., $1. III. FIRST GREEK "BOOK; *^tb Easy ExcrclGea and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A. M. ileTUed and 0 Schools ; containing the substance of the Practical Introduction to Greek COb Btruing, and a 1 reatise on the Greek Particles, by the Rev. Thomas K. Arnold, A. M., and also a Copious Selection from Greek Authors, with English Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and a Lexicon, by J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo., $1 25 VI. CORNELIUS NEPOS; With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. Bj Thomas K. Arnold, A. M. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof Johnson, Professor of the Latin Language in the Unlvereity of the City of New- York. 12mo. A new, enlarged edition, with Lexicon, Index, &c., $1. "Arnold's Greek and Latin Series.— The publication of this valuable collection o( classical school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode ol teaching and acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the drudgery o< going over Latin and Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what ley were learning, and every day becoming more and more disgusted with the thy and un- meaning task ; but now, by Mr. Arnold's admirable method— substantially the same with that oi lUendorff— the moment they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn sentences, 10 acquire ideas, to see how the Roma""! ancf Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode o( expression dillered from ours, and by degrees they Uy up a stock of linowledge which is utt«riT ai!iuni"hing to those who have dragged on mo.ith alter month in the old-lashioned, dry, aiM tedious way of learmng languages. . l -, , , " Mr. Arnold, in fact, has liad the good sense to adopt the system of nature. A child leBni his own language by hnUnling what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it i.s fasteneJ m the memoiy ; in the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work a-. Exercises in La'ta and Greek, invoVmg the elementary principles ol the language— words are supplied— the mode 01 rutting them together is told the pupil— he is shown how the ancients expressed their id as, aiicl ihe-., by leiiealiug these ihinsrs again and ag.iin- !7er«m ilerumt/ue—lhe docile pupli has them indelibly impressed upcn his memory and rooted in his understanding. "The American Eilitor is a thorough classical scholar, ami has been a practical eat her or ,Mi-3 in this city. He has devoted the utmost care to a complete revision of Mr, Arnold s wo .Ks, nas corrected several error» of inadvertence or otherwise, nas rearrangeij and improved -vai .9113 matters in tiie early volu-mes of the series, and has alte Jed most diligently to the accurate f ruiT. mg and mechanical execution of the^whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy ado-.Jllon olthcse works m our schools and colleges." , . , . , _ „ ,.j k«f»« • • Arnold's Sciiesof Classical Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled, bemg latro'duced into nearly all the Colleges and leadmg Educational Institutinna in the Uiuteil wate» c; 30 CICERO DE OFFICIIS. WITH ENGLISH NOTES. Chiefly selected and traii&lat/'id from the editions of Zumpt and BonneH BY THOMAS A. THACHER, Assistant Professor of Latin in Yale College. One volume 12mo. 90 cents. This edition ofDe OfT'iCiUi has the advantage over any other with which we are acquainted, of more copious notes, b-jucr arrangement, and a more beautiful typography. The text ci Zumpt appeirs to have be';n c'osely followed, except in a very lew instances, where it is varierl on the authoiiiy cf Beiec, 0/elli and BonneU. Teachers and students will do wtll to examine this edition. "Mr. Thacher very mndastly disclaims for himself more than the cirlit cf a compiler and translator in the editing of this work. Bein^ ouriielves unblessed with ihe works of Zumpt, Bonnell, and other German writers to whom IVIr. T. credits mos' of his notes and comments, we cannot affirm that more credit is due him than he claims for his iivbors. but we may accord him the merit of an exliemely judicious and careful compiler, if no more;1i)r we have seen no re- ■-mark without an important bearing, nor any point requiring elucidation which was passed un- noticed. " This work of Cicero cannot but interest eveiy one at all disposed to inquire into the views of the ancients on morals. "This valuable philosophical treatise, emanating from the pen of the illustrious Koman, de- rives a peculiar interest from the fact of its beiug written with the object to instruct his son, of whom tne author had heard unfavorable accounts, and whom the weight of his public duties had prevHnted him from visiting in person. Ii presents a great many wise maxims, apt and rich illustrations, and the results of the experience and reflections of an acute and powerful jmind. It is well adapted to the use of the student by copious and elaborate notes, explanatory of the text, aflxirding ample facilities to its entire comprehension. These have been gleaned *yith great judgment from the most learned and reliable authorities,— such as Zumpt, Bonnell, and others. Mr. Thacher has evinced a praiseworthy care and diligence in preparing the vo- lume for tho purposes for which it was designed." SELECT ORATIONS OF M. TULLIUS CICERO WITH NOTES, FOE. THE USE OP SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. BY E, A. JOHNSON, Professor of Latin in the University of New- York. One volume, 12mo. $1. " This edition of Ciotfd^ Select Orations possesses some special advantages for the student WHICH are bolli new and impottant. It is the only edition which contains the imoroved tejtl 01 The great care, from the best German authors, as well as the English edition of Arnold. Although abuiidant, and ajmost profuse they yet appear generally to relate to some imponant point m the text or subject, which the immature minil of pupils could not readily delect will out aid. " >> .nu"°- ''"".^ ''"^ '^ ™°''^ perfect edition for the use of schools could well be prepared " ' This IS a beautiful and most excellent eiliiion of the great Roman orator ; ancf, so far as H^f, "hr; r f "T published in this country. . Ii c.niains the four orations against Cata- line, .he oiation lor the Monilian Law, the oraiion for Marcellus, for Ligarius, fur Kin" U^io- ^';;K'l t'lr'?' Pr^'r i'^i"^,' ?."'' ""■ ^"'°,- J" WOP^™? the text of these Sraiions the edilor has • .ailed himself of the best German and English ediiions; and the notes have been gathered f,om every available source These are so abundant-filling more than 300 pages-as to leavo almost nothing to be desired by the student. They are philological, explanatory and historical Each Orauon h furmshed with a valuable Introduction, combining what is necessaiT for the Btudem to know preparatory to the commencement of the study of iTie Oration, and an analvs » of the plan and argument of each Oraiion. Furnished will, this edition of' Cicero's SeleJ? Orations, the student is prepared to enter with pleasure and profit on the study of this elegan and renowneil rtasBic author."— i;osi»,» jl«a*. -o^u"; ui una eiegani GREEK OLLENDOREE; BEING A PROGRESSIVE EXHIBITION OF THE PRINCIPLES OP THE GREEK GRAMMAR: iisignBi fnr ^loJginiiBrs in iBxnk, AND AS A BOOK OF EXERCISES FOR ACADEMIES AND COLLEGES. ASAHEL CrpNDRICK, PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF ROCHESTER. NEW-YORK : D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY. 1851. & Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by D. APPLETON & COMPANY, m ttie Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New- York. P E E F A C E The present work is -wtat its title indicates, strictly an OUemdorff, and aims to apply tlie metliods which have proved so successful in the acquisition of the Modern languages to the study of the Ancient Greek, with such differences of course as the different genius of the Greek, and the different purposes for which it is studied, would suggest. It differs from the modern OUendorffs in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in confining them within a smaller compass, and in a more methodical exposition of the principles of the language. It differs, on the other hand, from other excellent elementary works in Greek, which have recently appeared, in a more rigid adherence to the Ollendorff method, and the greater simplicity of its plan ; in simplifying as much as possible the character of the Exercises, and keeping out of sight every thing which would divert the student's attention from the naked construction. The object of the Author in this work was two- fold ; first, to fornish a book which should serve as an PREFACE. introduction to the study of Greek, and precede tlie use of any Grrammar. It will therefore be found, although not claiming to embrace all the principles of the Gram- mar, yet complete in itself, and will lead the pupil, by insensible gradations, from the simpler constructions to those which are more complicated and difficult. The exceptions, and the more strictly idiomatic forms, it studiously leaves one side, and only aims to exhibit the regular and ordinary usages of the language, as the proper starting point for the student's further researches. In presenting these, the Author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with the utmost simplicity of statement. He hopes, therefore, that his work will find its way among a younger class of pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, and will win to the acquisition of that noble tongue many in our Acad- emies and Primary Schools who have been repelled by the less simple character of our ordinary text-books. On this point he would speak earnestly. This book, while he trusts it will bear the criticism of the scholar, and be found adapted to older pupils, has been yet con- structed with a constant reference to the wants of the young ; and he knows no reason why boys and girls of twelve, ten, or even eight years of age, may not advan- tageously be ' put to the study of this book, and, under skilful instruction, rapidly master its contents. And when mastered, its o^itline of grammatical principles is so full and comprehensive that the filling up will be a PREFACE. pleasure rather tlian a task. With, the younger class of pupils, he would suggest that the rules for accent, and some of the other minor points, should be post- poned to a second or third perusal. With older pupils, the accents, and, with all, quantity should from the first receive diligent attention. Another object of this work is to furnish students with a book of Exercises to accompany the Grammar in any stage of their Greek studies. It was in the oral Exercises, which the Author has been in the habit of holding with his classes in College, that the conception of this work originated ; and no time, he believes, could be more profitably employed by the Greek stu- dent, than that spent in going thoroughly, with or without writing, over the entire body of Exercises con- tained in this work, and such others of like character as the teacher may originate at the time. The absence of any peculiar grammatical nomenclature will enable the work to be used in connection with any Grammar ; and the number of words introduced is purposely very small, in order that the pupil's attention may not be diverted from the principles of construction by an effort to remember unfamiliar words. It is, in fact, a marked feature of this book that it aims to present the leading principles of the Greek language through the medium of a very small number of words, and those words, in almost all cases, the names of very familiar, and through all the earlier part of the book, physical objects. Hence, PREFACE. it has not been deemed necessary to furnisli any vocab- ulary of tbe words employed, as they are of so frequent recurrence tliat the attentive pupil cannot forget them. "With these explanations, the Author cheerfully, and yet diflBidently, submits his -work to the public. That it will be as favorably judged as it ought to be he has no doubt ; but that it will be as much used as it ought to be he is not so confident. He has labored with conscientious diligence to make it at once a reliable and attractive guide to those who are either commenc- ing, or seeking to perfect an acquaintance with the no- blest of human languages. He is, to some extent, aware of its imperfections, and, should it meet a favor- able reception, he will spare no pains to render it still more worthy of public approval. For the tasteful and attractive typographical dress, in which it appears, he is indebted to the liberality of his publishers, the Messrs. Appletons, whose excellent series of school-books is commanding universal favor. GREEK OLLENDOEFF. INTEODUCTION. § 1. The Alphabet. 1. The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four let- ters, as follows : — Foi-m. Name. Sound. J a "/^Xq)a Alpha a (aA) * B § Brjta Beta b r y rdixfia. Gamma g {h^rd) A d Jelta. Delta d E s 'E ipjlov Epsilon 6 {short) z t ZlJTa Zeta z, dz, Hr, "Hza. Eta e (a) {long) 9 & Qijza Theta th (in thin) I r 'Jara Iota i(e) K X Kdnnct Kappa k y A I Adu^Sa, Lambda 1 '^ M [I Mi Mu m N V m Nu n S ? Al Xi X ' fiugov Omicron 6 {short) n n m Pi P P Q 'PS, Rho I 2! a{g final) Ziyfia Sigma s {sharp) T 7 Tav Tau t T V "T ^nsv Upsilon u (p (in Phi ph xx Xi Chi ch Vxp m Psi ps Si CO ^ii ixiya, Omgga {long) 10 GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 2. The letters are divided into Vowels (seA'en) and Consonants (seventeen). Voioels, a, s, tj, i, o, v, m. 3. The consonants are divided into simple conso- nants and double consonants. The simj}le consonants consist of nine mutes, n, j3, (p, x, 7, x> ^> ^> ^> four liquids, I, ft, ■v, Q, and the sibilant (or hissing), a- 4. The mutes are subdivided as follows : n, ^, cf; pronounced with the lips ; lip-letters, labials. v.,y.i, " "palate; palate-letters, paZatofe. 7^ 5^ Q^ " " tongue ; tongue-letters, Unguals. Again, n, x, 7, are smooth (unaspirated). q), Xy ^ " rough (fully aspirated). ^, y, 8 " medial (partially aspirated). 5. Double consonants. If, from na, ^a, qia. ? " xc. r£(?!), slg, Prepositions, el, wg, ov{ovx). Particles, are so closely imited with the following words that they lose their accent, and are called Proclitics, or Atonies. 8. Enclitics. Several small Avords are so closely connected with the preceding word, that they throw their accent back upon it, and are called Enclitics ; thus, TOVTo ys for lovro ys, upr^Q Tig, " dvijQ tig, Xoyog rs " Xoyog iL 9. The Greek accent-marks influence our pronuncia- tion only so far as they indicate the quantity of the syl- lable. English usage accents the penult syllable when it is long, as, i-^ovai — e-koo-si ; when it is short, the ante- penult, as t-).a-^ov = el-a-bon, i-'/s-is = ek-e-te. GKEEK OLLENDORFF. FIRST LESSON. 1. Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns and Participles in Greek have three Genders, the Masculine, E^eminine, and Neuter ; three Numbers, the Singular, Dual (denot- ing two), and Plural ; and five Cases, the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Vocative. 2. The Article. 6 rj ro, the. SING. M. F. N. Nom. 6 'L 70 the, Gen. rov T^g TOU of the, Dat. 7Q) n 11$ to, for, with the, Aco. i6v rriv TO the, Voc. wanting. DUAL. Nom. & Ace. TOO rd rw the two, both the, Gen. & Dat. TOtv tuTv ToTv PLUR. of and to, for, with the two. Nom. oi T& the, Gen. tav zmv TWV of the. Dat. roig tnig toig to, for, with the, Aoc. rovg tag rd- the, Voc. wanting. 16 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Rem.— In the Dual the forms of the Nora. Aoc. and Voc. and of the Gen. and Dat. are always alike. Accent. — o, tj, oi, ul Proclitics (see Introd. § 4. 7). The Gen. and Dat. in all the numbers. Perispomifiin. The other forms, Oxytone. The First Declension. 3. There are three principal modes of declining nouns ill Greek, called the First, Second, and Third De- clensions. The First Declension has in the Nom. four endings, a and iq Fem., us and rig Masc. 4. oiy.ta, a house. SING. N. ol/.ta a house, G. oixiHg of a house. D. oixiri to, for, with a house. A. ol-Aidv a house, V. ohia O house. DUAL. N.A.&V. olaiu both houses. G.&D. ohiaiv of and to, for, with both houses. PLUR. N. oiy.iai houses, G. olxiav of houses, D. oixiaig to, for, with houses, A. oly.iilg houses. V. oiy.iai houses. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 17 So all nouns of the First Decl. in « pure (i. e. « pre- ceded by a vowel) and qu ; as, aula, a shadow, saita, a, hearth. ■dvQcZ, a door. 5. Rule. The Art. agrees with its Subst. in Gender, Number, and Case ; as, »; oiKia, ai oixiai, Trjg axiug, tav smiaiv, the house. the houses. of the shadow. of the hearths. to (with) the doors. Accent. — The Gen. Plur. in this Decl. is perispomenon ; as, olr.tii)r. Oxytones make the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers perispoinena ; as, axtag, axia, tsxiaiv, axi&v, (jxiaig. 6. Exercises. I. Render into English. Ola la. — "^H oixia. — Olxlag. — Tfjg oixiaq. — Oixiui. — At oixlac. — Olxiav. — Tav otxccov. — Sx(a. — 'H OHLU. — Tf]g Gieidq. — Tfi oxia. — ^xiai. — At oxca'i. — ^XLOJv. — Tav Gxloov. — ^xcalg. — ■ "^EOTia. — 'H horia. — "EorlaQ. — Tfj eGria. — Tr/v kOTiav. — '^EgtIcu. — Tav eOriav. — Qvqa. — "^H -d^v- qa. — Tfiq S-vgaQ. — Ovgav. — Al -d-vgac. — Ovqacq. — Tag S-vqag. II. Render into Greek. A house. — The house.- — Of the house. — Of the houses. — The housef. — With the houses. — A door. — Of 18 GIIEEK OLLEXIJ )K.FF. a door. — With the door.— With the doors.— Of the doors. — The doors. — Doors. — A hearth. — Of a hearth. — Of the hearth.— Of hearths.— Of the hearths.— To the hearths. — A shadow. — The shadow. — Shadows. — The shadows. — Of the shadows. — Of a shadow. — With the shadow. — With shadows. SECOND LESSON. 7. We dechne (jxid, a shadow, to show fully its ac- centuation. SING, DUAL. PLUR. N. axui N. ay.iai, G. (Tx(«i,' N. A. V. ay.id G. ay.ia)v D. ay. I a G. D. ay.iutf D. axial,; A. ay.idv A. (sy.iug V. ay.(d V. axiui So azod, dg, a porch, 'portico, ij azoa, the porch. 8. Rule. — One Noun governs another which de- jiends upon it in the Gen. ; as, A door of a house, A door of the house, To the porch of the house. The shadows of the doors, Of the shadow of a porch. dvQCi o:y.iag or ohiag &VQC(. ■OvQU T?ji; oi/.iag. rJ/g (>iy.iag CIvok. Ti] arod rljg oi/.iug. ai (Jxiai. rav dvqSiv. Tijg ay.idg azodg. Rem. — The Gen. thus placed may be called the Partitive Gen.; for the, Adj. or attributive Gen. see Lesson XIX. 9. EXEUCISES. I. Render into English. 2yiia. — 7/ G^ia. — "^H (jTod.—'H Otocc rr/g oi;nrlag. — T/jg ol>iiag cd ^oroak — 2xta d-i/()u^ — (;i;eek Ollendorff. 19 21}{ia rrjg livQccg. — Tcov dvQcov Gxia'i. — Ai Oxua Tcov -d-vQcov. — TaT^ axiaiQ tcov oixicov. — QniQft. — ■ "H -O^VQu. — AiS^VQOCc Tiii oixiaq. — Tiov x^vqav rf\q olfeiag. — "^H eOvia. — 'H iOria Tijg olxiag. — Talq eoTiatg tcov olxmr. — 'Eoricxi, olxcav. — Al horiuL TCOV olxLcbv. II. Render into Greek. A door. — The door. — A door of a house. — The doors of a house. — Doors of houses. — The doors of the houses. — The shadows. — Of the shadows. — The shadow of the house. — Of the shadow of the house. — To the shadow of the door. — With the shadows of the doors. — A hearth. — Of the hearth. — To or for the hearths. — Of the hearth of the house. — The hearths of the houses. — The door of the porch. — The shadows of the porch. — The porches of the house. — A porch of a house. — Porches of houses. THIRD LESSON. 10. 'sy_(o, I have, (Ind. Pres.) SING. 1 Pers. 2 Pers. 3 Pers. iysig / have, thou hast, you have, he, she, il has. DUAL. 2 Pars. 3 Pers. iyerov e^szov you two have, they two have. PLDE. 1 Pers. 2 Pers. 3 Pers. '^yofisv we have, tysra ye or you ha:ve, i^ovaiiv) they have. 20 GREEK OLLENDORFF. ^C|= We shall give the 2 Pers. Sing, by rjou (instead of thou) in conibrraity with English usage. The con- • ' neclion will generally show whether 'you' indicates the Sing, or the Plur. If not, the pupil can select wliich number he pleases. Rem. 1.— The v written thus (v), as in i;^ow/()') (called movable v) is used before a vowel and at the end of sentences; but is omitted belbre a consonant; as, kynvniv ov/Jav. ouiav syovaiv. 'iynvai Ovyag, PiEM. 2.— Accent. The accent of verbs is usually as far from the final syllable as possible. Hence, t^cu, i'/tiov, exovair (Introd. § 4). 11. Rule. Active verbs generally take their object in the Ace. / have a house, Have you a house ? Have we houses ? You have houses, The house has a door, Has it a door 7 Houses have porches. iya> oiy.tccv or or/.iav e^a. olxittv i'ysi,; ; i/_tig otxiar ; i'ynfinv oi/.iu',' ; of/.iug tyoixiv ; oiy.lai e/^STt. ?/ nixiu QvQuv i'/ji. Ovijav ty^ii ; oixiai atoag iy^ovaiv. oil, ovx, olx, not, no [Proclitic, Introd. § 4. 7). ov before a consonant, and at the end of a sentence. ovx before a smooth vowel (Introd. § 3. 1). 01/ before a rough vowel ; thus, ov rr/V ^vgav, ovx a/oi, ovx o. Rem. — At the end of a sentence, and with the meaning no, ov is not proclitic, but has the accent; oS, oiux. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 21 i] aqiaiQu, Ui\ I have not, Have they not the ball ? They have not the ball, Has not the house a door ? The house has not a door, the ball. ovic e](ovai Trjv acfiMQCiv ; ov rijv a(fui(>ar 'iy^nvniv ; ov-A i^ovai Tijv ocpaiQuv. ov Tqv aqjaiyar syovaiv. Tr;v acpaigav ovx e)[ovaiv. ovx i;(i( &VQar rj oixia; ?] olyJa oiy. I^ei &VQav. Rem. — The pupil will mark the variation in the arrange- ment of the words, often according to their relative de- gree of emphasis ; thus. The house has a porch, Has the house a 'porch 7 The house has not a porch, (= it is not the house that has a porch.) The house has not a porch, (= it is not a porch that the house has.) The house has not a porch, fi otxia n'f^Bi azouv. atoav e^ii fj olm'a ; ovy_ Tj oixia aioav e'/^ei. ov aroav e^si ij oima. ovx s)(^Ei azouv 7] otxia. 12. Exercises. I. Render into English. Oix'ia I'^si -d-VQav. — Olxlat -di/Qaq txovGiv. — "E^avGi. ■d'VQag ai olxlat ; — Ov S-vquq i'^ovai-v. — 'ff oixla ovx t;/si S-VQag. — Ovx t^it Gvoccv f] olxia ; — ^H olxia ov aroav t/ji. — Ov Oroav t'^tc ■fj olxia.— Ovx t'xovGLV al olxiat Gxiag ; — Ov Oxidg k^ovGcv. — Ov axiag txovGiv al olxlac. — U Oroa rrjg olxlag.Oxcay ty^ti. — Qvqa olxlag. — Al 22 GREEK OLLENDOEFF. x^i/Qai T/jg oixiag. — Ai eOrlac tojv olxtav. — Sepal- Qccv i'/tcQ ; — Ov^ t';(co OipaiQuv. — Ovx txtrt ucpai- Qag ; — ^cpaiqaq i'^Ofitv. — Ou^i t;(Of.itv roc: ocpai- Qug. II. Render into Greek. Have you a ball? — I have a ball. — I have not a ball. — Have they not balls ? — They have ball's. — Have we balls? — We have balls. — A shadow. — A shadow of a Dall. — Has the ball a shadow? — The ball has a shadow. — The balls have shadows. — The door of the house has a shadow. — Has not the house a door ? — It has a door. — The house has doors. — Has it not a portico? — The house has not a portico. — Have not the houses hearths ? — They have hearths. — The hearth of the house. FOURTH LESSON, 13. G. i!g ; who 7 7i; what? iyco, I. 'Iff''?, we. 6 naii, the boy. aqjiiju. a hnmmer, arpvQuJ. of a hammer t] a(fV(ia. the hammer. GREEK OLLENDOllFF. 23 Rem. — Quantity and Accent in Decl. 1. 1. The ending a>; in this Decl. is always long ; as. a(f,i()ui. 2. The Ace. ending in kv, is like the Nom.; as, iiifiviiu, (rcfv- Quv, axtu., axial'. 3. The Dual ending in a is always long; as, acftviiiii, olxiu. 4. Tlie Nom. PI. in «t is short; as, afpyqal, axiaX. 5. Hence atfvqn, acpvQYai, acpvgai,, PropeTispomena. a£, hut me. aoi, as, thou, you. to, for thee, you. thee, you. I and you, Not I, but you, Not you (thee), but me, The house and the door. Not in the house, but in the porcli. Not the ball, but the hammer. f/co y.ai Gv. ovK fj'O). akKa av. ov oi, ulX ifxe. Tj ohia Koi T] -Ovqa. oi'jt h IT} oi-MK, alX £v ly GTOa. Accents.— het the pupil read carefully over Introd. 4. 7, 8, in reference to the accents. ij oiy.ia fiov, oixia jj-ov, Tj oly.ia Tjfiav, Tifjmv fj or/.ia, ohia tjixmv, 6 nait; fiov, naig fiov, T] OHld ftov, 7rjg a-Aiag fiov, axidg fiov, at ay.iat ijfiwv, Tj)iav al a-Aiai, 7ar axtmv Tjfxav, iv zri ay.ttt (xov. my house (the house of me), a house of mine (a house of me). our house (the house of us). a house of ours (a house of us). my boy. a boy of mine. my shadow. of my shadow (of the shadow of me), of a shadow of mine. our shadows. of our shadows, in my shadow. Il^ The pupil will remember that y-ov in these and simi lar examples is never emphatic. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 27 20. 7iva i/szs J as ^xn/xtv, tiva, ; ^axrijiiicc, as, 1j ^OLHTq^jta, oix £ftf', aXXa. as ej(^ovaiv, tiva ovx s^ovaiv ; ov/[ rjfiag sj^ovaw, ^u'Axr^Qiav fiov s^ovaiv. whom 7 a staff, the staff. ■whom have you 1 we have you (thee), they have not me, but you. whom have they not 1 they have not us. they have my staff (a staff of mine). 21. Exercises. I. Render into English. "ff 6 iQil^i iv trj oixin. 25. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tig TQSXic; — 'Eyco tqsxco. — Ov}( iyd, dXXcc 6V TQE^iCQ.- Sv, dlX OV?i iyCO TQE^OJ. Ov TQE- XtTt V/LltlS; Nal, TQSXOfJ.tV. ^YjUf:7g TQbXtTS, dXX ovx n^tTc,. — OvH iyco tq'cXCo, dlX 6 nali. — ^Yfj.tii ir raJg Ororcig TQbxtTt. — Ovx iv tii oixia TQ'cXtL 6 TTcdg, dXX sv rfj avoa. — 'Ev ratg Oroals Tcdv oixiap TQl-xo/.iiv. — :Zi> xal syc6.--R oittia GOV. — ^0 TitciQ 60V t'xii TTjv (SuiiT TiQiav. — Tivct GREUC OLLENDORFF. 31 i^EC o TtaiQ ; — ^i *yir*^- — ^^ ^'^ ^X^^i ^^"^ */"^" — ■ Oux ^/7"^b t'xti, dXX vf-idq. — Ov 6s ix^^> dXkd rrjv oxiav oou. — 'E/w t^s/co xaX 6v TQS^tig. — ^Hjutig TQSxof^kv nal TQs^tTi: vfj,klg. II. Render into Greek. My ball. — Not my ball, but my staff. — Who has your ball ? — The boy has my ball. — The boy has not our ball. — The boy has our hammers. — Not I, but the boy. — You, not we. — Has not the boy my staif ? — The boy has your staff. — No, he has not my staff. — The boy has hammers and staves. — What has the house 1 — It has doors and hearths. — It has doors, and not porches. — Who is running? — / am running. — Are not you running? — We are not running. — The boy is running in the porch. — They are running in the shadow of the porch. 26. SEVENTH LESSON. dni, I am (Irregular). Ind. Pres. SING. 1 2 3 eijil, el ^ £ari{v) DUAL. I am, you are, he, she, it, is. 2 3 sa7ov iarov PLHE. you two are, they two are. 1 2 3 SdfltV euis dai[v) we are, you are, they are. 32 GllEEK ULLK.N'DOIIFF. 27. nou ; ivrav&a, avTov, sy.il. yainS, us, ij ycanu, nov d ; ivTavdd (iiii, nov iariv 6 nalg ; saxiv iv rrj ywvia, if ty ymvia saTiv, sariv 6 naig sv ry oixia ; sativ, ova sativ, nov uaiv ai oiy.iat ; iy.H daw, or tlaiv ixsT, ovy. slaiv I'Ati, tMi si av ; OVH Sl/M, There is, there are, There is not, There are not, There is a door in the house, There are doors in the house. where ? here. there. a corner, the corner. where are you? I am here, where is the b&y ? he is in the corner. is the boy in tlie house '? he is. he is not. where are the houses? they are there. they are not there. are you there? I am not. SaTl{v), £((Jt'()'). ova S(J7(()'). oiJx £iai{r). eari dvga iv t5} oixln. dai ■dvijai iv rf; olxirc. Accents. — ilfii is enclitic throughout the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing. d. Except, 1. At the beginning of a sentence, as, I'aiLv olxia, sluiv omlai. 2. l'o'Ti(v) becomes Paroxytone in such cases, find also after ovx, u).)^ , n, cue, ^vi, y.al, as, ovy. tanv, aXA saiiv, li 'iajiv, wg 'iaiiv, y.al taiLV. 3. All dissyllabic enclitics become orthotone, i. e. retain the.ir accent, after a Paroxylone ; as, &vija iaziv, oiy.iai bialf. GUEEK OLLENDORFF. 33 tig rgs)^si; ovx iyai TQt'yco, ovu iyo) Tgt^m, aXXa av, ov av i(xs s/^sis, aXX iya> as, ovj_ 6 naig rqi^si, aUl syoi, Who runs? y do not run. / do not run, but yoii, (^it is not /that run, but you), you have not me, but / you, (^it is not j/oM that have me, &c.) The boy does not run, but /, {lilerally = not the boy runs, but I). 28. Exercises. I. Render into English. TIov tl ; — F/v rfi yavia tlf^i. — Eoriv 6 jraig sv TTJ yavia rrJQ oisfiag ; — Ovfe tOrcv ifcti, uXX toviv Iv rfl OTOa Trjg olaiag. — E^tt Oroav rj oixia; — Al olxiac fiftav dTOag sji^ovGiv. — -Egtc xhvqa sv rfj oifiicc juov. — Elal i^uQai xrA eOriuL sv tuTq oiptlacg fif.im'. — TFov tlotv ul Gq}aiQac ; — Ai GcpaTqai. ov;t avvov aiotv, dXX iv rfj yavia. — Ovx sots vjxslg sv Tfj OXLO, Trig olxiag ; — Ov^ r^xslg so/ntv sv rfj Gxia. Trig olxiag, dXX 6 Tratg so tip stisL — E^sc Gcpalqav 6 %aig ; — Ov Gcpulqav i'/CtC', dXXd j3ax- TrjQiav. — ^cpccigag xai ^axTriqiag t/^si. — Oii^ 6 naig ^axrriqiav t';/ae,, dkXaOv. — Of^ Vfzttg tqs^s- T£, dXX Tjf^Ecg. — 'Eyco., dXX ov ov TQSy^scg. II. Render into Greek. Where am I? — I am here. — I am in a corner. — ^vVhere are you ? — I am not in a corner. — Is not the boy iii a corner 1 — He is. — He is not. — Who is here ? — ^The 2* 34 GREEK OLLENDORFF. boy is here. — He is not here, but there.— He is there, not here.— Who is here ?— / am here.— We are here.— Not we, but 1J07I are here. — Who is running in the shadow of the house? — The boy is running there.— The bo]/ is not [oix 6 naig &c.) running there, but /.—There is a hearth .n the corner of the house. — A corner of a house. — Not nere, but there. — There, not here. EIGHTH LESSON. 29. The First Decl. Nouns in tj. tj vonri, the pasture. SINS. N. VOflfl a pasture. G. VOI^Jji,' of a pasture. D. fOfifj to, for, with a pasture. A. VOflljV a pasture. V. VOflfl O pasture. DUAL. N.A.V. vofid two pastures. G. D. vofiaii' of, and to, for, with two pastures. PLUK. N. vofxai pastures. G. vojimv of pastures. D. rofiaig to, for, with pastures. A. vouai pastures. V. vofiai O pastures. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 85 So all nouns of this Dec' . in 1], as xmiiij, rjg, a village. Tj Xc6[l7j, the village. XQ'FV, »??, a spring, a fountain V mvri. the fountain. §ovg,_ a cow (or ox). 6 §ovg, the ox, V §ovg. the cow. ai ^of.g. the cows. naig. the boy. 1} naig. the girl. Kihai, he, she, it lies. xsivtai, they lie. lEj' Note. — at and oi in inflection at tlae end of words are generally shorty in reference to accent. Hence acpvqai, xHiao, not, atai asi, both now and always. both now, and always, alike then, and now, and al- ways. lEj" Observe, ts is enclitic, av te, both you, ?j rs olxla, both the house, iyoi ts xal, both I and. Quantity and Accent. — 1. Nouns of Decl. 1 with Gen. in tjg have a, not n in the Nom. as, xkulva, axav&u. Nouns with uq in the Gen. generally have u. 2. Questions. — ^Xalvu is accented on the Penult.^ — Why Perispomenon? (Introd. § 4. 5.) xXalvijg, " Paroaylone? {Introd. ^ i. 5.) 34. Exercises. I. Render into English. XXalva. — ^ff /Xalva /nov. — Uov xtlvrac ul ^Xalvuc rjfi.av ; — Al ^Xalvat iv vfj Grou ^aivrac. — ^H f.v rrj 6roa ativrac, rj iv rfj Gma TTJg -d-VQaq. — IIov tiocv at aaavS'ut ; — Ai axavdal tlocv iv rfj ycovtcc TTjg vo/xfjQ. — "Ep^ovatv dxavi^'aQ alvofialj — Ovy{ dxuv&as, ovds TtsrQag ixovGiv at vofxai. — Al qi^at T(Sv daavS'av. — At dxav&ac, rj at qi^at. — ^JT at vo/Lidc, 7] cd %STQai uxav&ag ep^ovGiv. — Ac vofj.ut dxuv&ac, ra xal tcstquq t^ouGcv. — Uov xiiTat rj /3ovg ; — -H iv rfj nvXrj xtlrac, ?] iv Tfj vojufj. — Ai qi^at rcov dxavdSrv iv ralg TtSTQaiQ 40 GREEK OLLENDORFF. tlGiv. — "Eotc TTSTQa iv T>j TivXi]. — Eiolv tdQai iv rali TivXacQ. — Ai olxlat ty^ovOi, Oroa; rt xal i'd^ug. — Kal Groai, aal tdQcct. — Kal ^'iQui, xai II. Render into Greek. My cloak. — Where is my cloak? — It lies in the porch. — Who has the cloaks? — The girl has both the cloaks and the balls. — The boy is either running or ly- ing. — He is not running nor lying. — Both ive run, and you. — Who does not run ? — The boy does not run, nor I. — There are both seats and rocks in the pasture. — The rocks have seats. — The rocks have not {ov^ at Tzhgai) seats, but the porches. — Do not the rocks lie in the vil- lage ? — They lie either in the village or in the pasture. — In the village, not in the pasture. — Not in the house nor in the gate. — What have the thorns? — The thorns have roots. — The houses of the village have both gates and doors. TENTH LESSON. 35. 6 7ia7rjQ, the father, ii i^i^irjQ, the mother. naxTjQ ftov, rj l^>]Tt]Q fj/ACOV, I) nartjQ xai rj furjzriQ fiov, (I TTiiT/jQ /xov, y.ai, ri fti^Tr/Q, 7] ^ay.TijQi'a finv xai rj cqiaiqa, n 7f ?7Kti,- rofxsi, xai rj nalg, (I rf 7i(dg y.ai rj naig TQt'^ovaiv, lya y.ul 6 naig tQe^ofier, my father, our mother. > my father and mother. ray staff, and my ball, both the boy runs, and the girl, both the boy and the girl run. I and the boy run. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 41 Rem. 1. — When a verb is joined to subjects of different persons, the first person takes precedence of the second, and the second of the third; as, iya nai av TQf^o^sv, syoo xai o 7zaT<; safisv, av IS -Aui 6 TiatriQ aov rgt^Ers, ■xaL syta tq^^oj, y.ai av, iyco 7S rpt^o), xai av, KKi iyon xni av ZQ^/^o/jisr, tya Tf xai av rq^^ofisv. I and you run. I and the boy are. botli you and your father run. both we and you liave. both I run and you. both I and you run. 36. im (irt, iq)),on. A preposition. inl Tov, T^, Tov, (Governs the Gen. Dat. and Ace.) im TOV, on the. Rem. 2. — The Prep, govern, some one, some two, and some three cases. We indicate the cases which they govern, by the Art. as, inl tov, the Gen. inl tm, the Dat. cjil x6v, tlie Ace. sni 17]? oiKiug, tn oixiag, Eg; sOgag, nov Kulzai r^ atj^cuqa; iq) sariag xttzai, Kshai im tijg sariag. on the house. on a house. on a seat. wliere lies the ball? it lies on a hearth. it lies on the hearth. Observe, inl, before a consonant. . sTt " a smooth vowel. f'cp " a rough vowel. On the house. In the house, em Ti]g nr/.iag. iv T^ OlKlCi. 42 greek ollendoeff. 37. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tii iarcv sv rfj mcofJ-r) ; — 'O TCUTrjQ /Liov ioriv exit. — 'H /u/jiriQ ^ov ovx sxtl sOtlv, dXX ivrav&a. 'EvTuii&a SOtlv r) /LirjTT^Q /nov, dXX ovx ii(Qr]vr). — Elal Ti'cTQac sv rfi v6/urj ; — Elalv sxsl teal TCivgac, xal uxavd-aL. — ^0 TvaTt'jQ /uov xctl r] f-irivrjQ iialv iv rfj TiuX-vj. — Tis tqsxsl; — Ka\ o ncug, tq^xsl, xal 6 ^oi/Q.- — 'Eyco TS xal Ov tqs^o^isv. — Ou^ v/ntis TQSXtXt.^ dlX fj/Llili. O TVUvfjQ /ilOV OV OCpVQaC, kXii, ovSs ocpaiqai. — '^H TcaZ? ov TQSy^st sv ry Gvoa, ovds iv rfj Gxia r/jg olxiag, aXk s%l tcov II. Render into Greek. My father. — My mother. — Where is my father? — Your father is in the village. — Onr mother is not in the village, but in the house. — She is either in the porch, or on the seat. — The ball lies either on the gate, or in the spring. — My staff does not lie on the cloak, nor on the rocks. — The roots of the thorns are in the rocks. — The cows lie in the gate. — Who runs? — I and ^^ou run. — I and the boy run. — Both we and the cows run. — Either you run, or the cows. — 'You do not run (oii;^ viiui; TQeysn), but we. — / do not run (it is not fthat run, ovx tyoi (fee), but the boy and the girl. GIlEEIi OLLENDORFF. 43 ELEVENTH LESSON. Contracts of Decl. 1. 38. Some liouns in «'« and da are contracted in all the cases ; /a into rj, and da into d ; as, Gvaid, avx/j, a Jig-tree, rj avxij, the Jig-tree. SING. DUAL. PLHE. N. G. D. A. V. 6vyi[ta)i ij av>i{tdg), TJs avy.]} avxriv N. A. V. av/.d G. D. GVY.alv N. Gvxal G. avxmv D. Svaaig A. avy,dg V. avxal 1 Accent. — Observe that ax\ Acute Penult coalescing with an ultimate always produces a circumflex (Introd. § 3, Rem. 1) ; as, avxia, nvxfi; avKdai,, ovxal. 39. >td&7]fiai; xdOTjzai, nd&ijvrai, I sit, am sitting-. he, she, it sits, is silting: they sit, are sitting. ■q y.oQi], rjg, 7irsg ; •zi, ovSnv, TikrA, the maiden, whol (Plur.) something, any thing (enclit.) nothing. except, but, followed by a Gen. 44 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 40. 11 ^xsig ; i/CO 71, 6 naig 11 kysi, ovdsi) fji^niASf, ovy. 'sj[o/A£y ovSav, ohStv f^w nlriv acpvQag, ovSsv nVijr ^axirjrjiag, Tig nVqv gov ; what have you ? I have something. have you any thing? tlie boy has something. we have nothing. we have not any thing. I have nothing but a ham- mer. nothing except a staff. who but you? wlio except you? Rem. 1.- — Ti's; who? zhig; leho? ii ; what? are never enclit- ic: Ti something, any thing, is always encHtic and stands after some other word. 2. Observe the double negative oix i'/Ei oldiv, lit. he has not nothing. This repetition of the negative is com- mon in Greek. 3. Distinguish but for uV.d from but = except, for nh'iV. 41. ■)] liicu, izg, ri -/.tcfalfi, 7;g, iv iri yetQi, thefly. the head, in the hand. 11 tyeig in] iq? y.stfalTjg ; tyco ftvTav im zr/g y.srpaljjg, ri H/iig iv TJj ;(H(Jt ; t'yo] 11 £v TTj ysiQi, t[ tysi 6 TTuTg iv itq yeiQi ; acphqav tv iri y_iiQi i'ysi. what have you on your (Gr. the) head? I have a fly on my (the) head, what have you in your hand? I have something in my (the) hand, what lias the boy in his (Gr. the) hand? he has a hammer in his (the) hand. GREEK OLLENDOKrF. 45 1\\:m. 'J. — The Art. is substituted in Greek for the Pronoun, ill cases where the relation isanecessary one, or clearly iinpliod in the connection. Thus, in English; "lie siretched out liis hand," "lie raised his eyes;" " I send my son;'' in Gr.; "he stretched out the hand," "he raised the byes ■" " I send the son." ejjEfS E, rg x^'!i'> I have in the hand = I have in my hand, you have in the harid=you have in your hand, the boy has in the hand = in his hand, the girl has in the hand =the girl has in her hand. There is a fly on my head, There is a staff in my hand. ^ £cTZ( |UOJ [ivia STTi trig ascpalij?, I or, ESTi fiviot, inl rijg KStpaXijs I fiov. i'iazi ^ttXTIJQM iv TTj x^iQi fiov. sail fioi ^axrtjQia in rri x^iQi. (lit. there is to me a staff" in I the hand). note ; vvv, usi, nors rgiiu o ^ci^S ! when 7 now, always. when does the boy run 1 he is running now, he rune al- ways. 4g greek ollendorff. 42. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'H aufifj ; — M qi'^ai rrii OvyJn- — IIov tloiv at C>vxal ; — Ai Gvxat tiocv iv rfj vof-ir}. — "E^ovOl ov- xdg al voj-iai ; — Ov Gvzui t^ovacv at. vofucci, dXX dxdv&ag. — Ti txti r) vof-U] ; — Ou8iv t/kL TiXrjv Gvxav xal ntrQav. — Tivtq STil tojv ntTQCov xa- driVTUL ; — '0 narrjQ y.al rj /uTjvriQ jiiov ixtl xudrjv- TUL. — Uoii }{d&r]Tai i) xoQr] • — ^Ev tt] Grod na- ■d-rjTCU a:vl rfj; tS^ag. — Ti £V rfj XkiQt t/ji ; — Ou- 8h' i'zic 7iXr]v r^}g ;/Af//W/? (her cloak = ?/?". the cloak). — JJoii xd&rivccL r) /.ivTa ; — "Etu rtjs xtcpa- Xt)g /,10V. — '0 Ttatg ovx I'^tt ouSc-v etiI rrig xtcpaXfjg TzXrjv /Livlag. — TJors TQS^ti, o nulg ; — Kal vvv, xa\ dti. — "E^co Ti iv rfi ^ttQi. II. Render into Greek. What has the boy? — He has something. — What has he in his hand ? — He has a ball in his hand. — What has my father in his hand? — He has a staff in his hand. — The girl has a fly either in her hand or on her head. — • Not on her (the) head, but in her hand. — Where are the maidens sitting ? — They are sitting on a seat. — They are sitting in the porch, not on the rocks. — When does the girl sit on the rocks ? — Now. — I have a fly on my head. • — The ball is now- lying {■vvv nurai) in the spring. — The boy always runs in the house. — Tire pasture has both fig-trees and thorns. — Who are in the pasture ? — I have nothing in my hand except a staff". GREEK OLLENDORFF. 47 TWELFTH LESSON. 43. Masc. Nouns of Decl. 1. Nouns in ag. vEavtvig, a young man, a youth. vmviag, the young man. SING. DUAL PLnn. N. vsan.ug N. vsaviai G. fsanov N. A. V. vsaviS, G. ff.aricoti D. vsat'ia G. D. naviaiv D. naviaig A. rsarlav A. vEuvlug V. icart'iZ V. vsoLviai Rem. Nouns of the 1 Decl. in ov; and r)q are Mase. and make the Gen. in ov. Endings in «? are always lo7ig. rj ylmaaoi, r^g, Att. ylmi^a* i) fzeXiaaa, ijg, Att. fiilma, the tongue, the bee. ninra, I fall, am falling. Ind. Pres. nima, ninzng, TTtmei &c. like l^u. nifijim, eig, a &c. / send, am sending. 44. uTio {an, ixg)') away from, from. A Preposition. ano 70V, from, the. (Governs only the Gen.) * The Greek language was spoken in several leading dialects ; of which the Attic, spoken at Athens, was the most highly cultivated, and employed in most kinds of literary composition. 48 GREEK OLLENDORFF. y.) out from, out of. A Preposition (proclitic). si' before a vowel, as t'l olxlag, in before a consonant, as, eV rrjg olxlag. ix Toi, out of the. (Governs only the Gen.) ano trig oiHiag, ano oly.iag, or an oiy.iag, acp' idgag, iy. rl^g xm/^ijg, «| aaavQ-qg, (away) from the house. from a house. from a seat. out from, out of the village. out of a thorn. Out from; out of the porch, {Away) from the porch, On the porch, In the porch. £x Trig '^'tous. a.710 T?ig azoag. STzr rrjg azoag. iv rr^ at OK. Render, I am running (away) from the house. I am running out from the house. I am running on the house. I am running in the house. iatt ti, 'iati ti. ; ov8t'v icmv, ovu kativ ovdsv, there is something, is there any thing? there is nothing, there is nothing', there is not any thing. greek ollendorff. 49 45. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O vsaviag. — 01 vtavlat. — Ti t^tt 6 v&uvlag ; — rXcoGOav t/Cii- — 01 viaviat yXaGOag t^ovaiv. — H yXcJGSa tov vtaviov. — Tcov vtavicov al yXcoO- Gat. — vsaviag yXdoGav i'^tt iv ttj pacpa?^^. — Hov siGiv al jusXiGGat ; — Al fxeXiGOal tlaiv iv rrj vofifi- — 'O nmQ f-inXcGGav e^tc iv rfj Xtiqi. — Ov>e t/^tL 6 Tiuig fisXiGGav STvl rrj; ^acpaXrjg- — Ov, dXV fj xoQT] /xvlav iv rfj ;cii^l tZit- — MlXiGGa xd-&riTac im rijg dxavdrig. — IHtitco. — Tig ninvtc; — 'Hfitlg TviTiTOfxiv. — ^"ff GcpaiQci Tcmv&c djvo rijg tdqag. — "^H /3ovg TQt^Ec ix Ttjg vo/uf/g. — Al xoqui ix rfjg Gvodg tq^xovGlv. — 'H/iitig Tisf^Tiofxtv. — Tlva %Ef4.%o^tv ; — 'O narrjQ tov vtuviav nsfxizHL. — 'H ftr]rr]Q rrjv aoQrjv ifi rfjg TivXrjg nsf-iitti. — Al ftsXcTvat dtl avTOV xa-drjvrai. II. Render info Greek. The boy is running from the house. — The maidens are sitting in the house. — Not on the hearth, nor in the porch, but in the door. — In the gate, not in the shadow of the house. — Whom does my father send ? — He sends either the youth or the maiden. — He sends the young man out of the village. — The cows are running out of the village. — What has the boy on his head ? — He has a fly or a bee on his head. — He has either a hammer or a 3 50 GREEK OLLENDOEFF. hall ill liishand. — -The hammer now lies on the hearth. — The bee always sits on the fig-tree. — Who sends? — Both I and you send.^ — My father and mother send. THIRTEENTH LESSON. 46. Masc. Nouns of Decl. 1. 6 ylsjTTijg, the thief. SING. DUAL PLHR. N. Klsnrrig N. vXimai G. vlinrov N. A. V. vlima. G. vltmSiv D. ylsnrr} G. D. vXintaiv D. vlimaiq A. alsnTTjv A. y.XenT fy.HOtP, Ivii-vOev, oixads TQt^co, ovm fj'co, ohzs ov, oiizn ivzav&a, ovrs iy.£t, ovzs (iaxTijQiav, o'vzs aq)iiQav oiiTS xdOijftcit, ovzs y.et/xai, whence do you run ? I run thence, hence. I am running home. neither I nor you. neitlier here nor there. I have neither a staff nor a hammer. I neither sit nor lie. 49. Exercises. I. Render i?ito English. KXsTiTTjg. — 'O xXsTiTii^. — IJ xtcpaXri rov xXsti- Tov. — Tify^ti 6 fcX&Tirrji ev rfj X^^Q'- > — '^X^'- ^^^ ^Xalvav 60V. — 01 xXiTirai rai ^XaivaQ r^/uav i'^ovOcv. — XXahag ccvrl (BasivriQiav txovocv. — Uod'tv TQS^ovocv ol xXbTiTUL ; — Ex rrjg oi>elaQ, tqs^ovOlv. — Ot vsavtuL viiv utco rav xaf-iav tqs- ^ovGlv. — 'EQyarrjQ xal Ti/v'iT)]:^. — i^yartj^ xal 6 Tt^viTtj;. — OiJ/C ol SQyaraL, aXX ol Tt^vlrai. — 'EQyavac dvrl rt^viTav. — Ti t^ti o aQyarriq ev Tr\ X^'-Qi' y — ^(fVQav dvrl GcpaiQag i^ti- — naTg ol'peads tqsj^h. — ITov xttrai rj p(Xalva juov ; — HXtjaiov rrjs piQr]vr]g xtivai. — Jlodtv oTS^Tvec at 6 nuTriQ 601J ; — Oixo&kv nsf-inti f.iE. — Ovx £p{iIi)'iJ>, ovds dvTtv&iv. — Oi/n uvtov, ovrs sxtl. — Ovrs sv rr] teafxri, ovrt sv rr] vojurj. — ti jusAirrce ovrs sm TTjg 6vxr]g xa&rjrac, ovrs inl rrjg dxdv&rjg. GREEK OLLENDORFr. 53 II. Re7ider into Greek. Both the laborer and the artisan. — Not the laborer, but the artisan. — The artisan, not the laborer. — -The arti- san instead of the laborer.— Not a laborer nor an artisan. Neither laborers nor artisans. — Neither my cloak nor my hammer. — The artisan has his (the) cloak. — Whence runs the boy 1 — From home. — Not from home, but from hence. — The girl is running home (homeward). — My mother sits at home. — Does not your father send the young man home ? — My father sends the yoimg man out of the pastures. — The cows lie in a corner of the pasture. — There is a gate near the village. — There are neither fountains nor fig-trees in the village. — There is nothing in the village except houses. FOURTEENTH LESSON. 50. riV Igyarrig ; iig oixia ; ttveg ol-Aiai, what laborer? what laborers ? what house'? what houses 1 The house in the village, ^ ri iv irj KWftrj olxia. (i. e. the house which is in the / ^ ohia r] iv irj xa/iij. village), What house ? The one in the village, That (which is) in the village, , . , , \ v Ir zr, oixt'cc Qvna. The door in the house, ^ ,'.",,'- N / ' I tj VVQa fj IV TT] OIKM. rig ofAta ; 1] iv tJ; Kajxrj. 54 GREEK OLLENDORFF. That in the house, The one in.the house. What youth do you send 1 I se-nd the young man (who is) in the porch, I send the one in the porch, What balls? The balls (which are) on the seat, Those on the seat, What cloaks have we ? We have the cloaks (which are) near the hearth, We have those near the hearth, rj tv TTj oi/.ia. iiva reaviuv nturzeig ; TZi/irzoa 10V Iv irj aroa vsaviav, nsfiTzco lov fsaviuv zov ev rrj azoFt. tor iv TT) arori. nt/xnco. 7ivtg atfiuQca ; at ini zTjg kd()ag acpaTQUi. ai acpMQUi al Ini zJ^g t'8()ag. ai int Trig tSQug. Tiiag •j^lairag t^o/xsv ; zag nXijaior tljg soziag i^^ai- lag yXaivag k'lonev Tag nlij- aiov Trig *'ff^'«?- Tug iyyvg Tqg saziag s'/^ojiev. 51. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tig tj/ii TTjv ^Xalvav fiov ; — 'O xXsTirriQ tp^tc rrjv ^Xalvav oov. — Tiva x^alvav t/^kt ; — Tqv sttI Ttjg tdgag prXulvav txtt. — Hov tloiv at jBotg; — Tivtg ^otg ; — Al iv rjj vo^fi /Sotg. — Oux <^^'i- ^'v T^\i vofA.ri ^osg, aXX al nXtjalov rrjg fi^r,vfjg. — Al ev rjj ^(o/urj olxLac — Ov^ al iv rfj xcojurj olaiaL, dXX al iyyvg Trjg ptQTjvrjg. — Al TtvXai rav olxicov. — Al TiuXai rav iv rfi f€cof.ni olxiav. — Tivccg Ovxug ty^iTi. — Tag Oyxag t^o/utv rag iv rj] ycovla rijg vo/u?ig. — Tag TrXrjalov rrjg XQrjvtjg, ov rug ivrauda t;(Ofttv. — Tlox^tv TQb^iTt j — Tqi/^ofxtv oiHOiytv. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 55 II. Render into Greek. The hammer. — What hammer? — The * hammer (which is) in the hand of the workman. — What cloak have yon 1 — I have the one on the seat. — I have the one on the seat, not that (which is) near the spring. — I have neither the one on the seat, nor the one near the fig-tree. — What cow ? — The one in the pasture. — When does the father send the young man home 1 — Both now and al- ways. — The tongue of the young man. — A bee is sitting on the fig-tree (which is) in the pasture {Itu t^g iv iy vofty avxijs). FIFTEENTH LESSON. 52. TTie /Second Declension, Ends in the Nom. Sing, in og and ov (Attic endings of a few words, m? and cof). og (and mg) Masc. sometimes Fem. ov (and oov) Neut. 6 xrJTTog, the garden. SING. DUAL PLHR. N. lijjnog N. Kijnoi G. y.iJ7Tov N.A.V. n^nco G. KTinatv D. KlJiT(j) G. D. KliTlOlV D. xrinoig A. KtJTlOV A. Minovg V. X^TtS V. Krinoi So iiinoQog, 6 ntkog, 6 innog, Fem. 4 oSog, " rj irfkog. the merchant, the hat. the hoYse. the road, way. the chest. 56 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Rem. — Accent. 1. Observe xf/iro? is Properispomenon, ex- cept in those cases in which the ultimate is long, where it becomes Paroxytone (Introd. ^ 4. 4, 5). 2. Oxylones in this Decl., as in Decl. 1, make the Gen. and Dat. in all the numbers Perispomena ; as, o8oq, odov, odw, odolv, oSwv, bdotg, xtj^og, %rj),ov, &c. 53. sig, into. A Prep. (Proclitic.) £ig i6v, into the. (Governs only the Ace.) eig 7i]v omiav, neixnw dg rug xc6[xag, into the house. I send into the villajres. From tlie, Out from, out of the, Instead of] for the. On the. In, among the, Into the, Near the. Except the, ano Tov. la (f J) 7011. av7i rot). ini TOV. iv T(^, iv 7oTg. Eig TOV. nlriaiov, iyyvg tov. nXijv TOV. Render, From the chest, unh tijg xi]Xov. Out of the chest. Instead of the chest. On the chest. In the chest. Into the chest. Near the chest. Except the chest. GREEK OLLENDOEFV. 57 TZOl ixuas dtVQ svtav 0, v&oi, ) lohither 7 thither. hither. Thus, nov; er avT 'lav&a, I vzov, ) ■where! no&BV ; whence? noX; whither? there. ey.H&sv, thence. SHsTas, thither. ivzsv&sv, hence. Evrav&ol, I , .,, » . > hither. here. BsiiQo, i hill Qintw, sig, &c. / throw, cast. noi QintEig ttjv aqiaiQav ; dsvQO Trjv aifMQav Qimovaiv, Qinmi Qi^av etg rov niXov fiov, whither do you throw the hall "? they throw the ball hither, he throws a root into ray hat. I send thither. 54. Exercises. I. Render into English. ^Xalvav rov s^tvoqov. — Ov rrjv ^Xalvav, dXka TOV TllXoV TOV SftTVOQOV t^SlZ- Tl I'^Of^iV SV T(p xrjTtco ; — ^vxdi xai axav&ac, sv ra arjTva t'^tri:. — Ovx tlOL fiQrjvac sv roii xtjtiols ; — Nal, «V rolg if/jTcoiQ nQrjval iloiv. — Tl e^ovOtv ot efinoQOt, iv 3* 58 GREEK OLLENDOUFF. roig TciXocQ ; — OvSsv iv toIq niXoig i'xovac nXrjv Tcov xtcpaXav. — Tig xadrixac inl tov innov ,• — Oi vtavlccc STil TCOV iJiTtcov xaO'rjVTac. — Tq'cX^i' o iit- nog iv rfi 68a ; — OiJPi £V tjj 68a, dXX iv rfi V0f.ift rqsxu. — ^O iTVTtog tig rrjv 686v tqsx^c. — Uol tqs- XOvolv 01 iJTTtoi ; — Ou diVQO tq'sxovGlv, dXX tig TTjv vojurjv rrjv Tchjoiov Ttjg ?ico^rjg. — Oux ixtlot, dlXd. dtVQO. — IIoi qinnig rrjv (your) ;//l«rj'ar; — T/jv Tt p^Xadvav xai, tov ttiXov tig ttjv ^tjXov QCTtTa. — "PinTa Trjv ^Xalvuv dvrl Trjg ^axTTfiqlag. — "^H 6(paiQa TtLTTTSi. tig ttjv ^r^Xoi'. II. Render into Greek. The workman has my hat. — The workman has not {nvi 6 igydziji') your hat, but the artisan. — The artisan has neither a hat nor a cloak. — The merchant has both hats and cloaks. — The boy has nothing on "his head ex- cept a hat. — What has he in his {iv rrj) head ? — Nothing but a tongue. — Whither is the horse running? — He is either running hither, or into the road. — Neither thither nor into the pasture.— Into what (sj? riva) pasture ? — Into that near the village. — The ball falls into the gar- den. — The ball lies near the fountain. — The fountain (which is) in the garden. — Not the fountain in the gar- den, but that among [iv) the rocks. — The pasture has nothing except rocks, and thorns, and fig-trees. — -The boy sits on a horse. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 59 SIXTEENTH LESSON. 55. The Second Declension. TO QoSov, the rose (Introd. § 3. 1). SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. qqSov N. ^68a G. QoSov N.A.V. ^o5(B G. QoSaiv D. Qt')Sc^ G. D. QoSoiv D. po8o«ff A. (loSov A. Qoda V. q65ov V. ^o'5« So, TO lov, the violet. TO fiijlov, the apple. TO dei'dQor, the tree. Exc. — Ssvd^ov hag commonly dhSgscn(v) instead o£ divdQoig in the Dat. Plur. Rem. — Neut. nouns always have the Ace. and Voc. like the Nom. in all the numbers, and in the Plur. these three cases end always in a. The same rule applies to Adjectives, Pronouns and Participles. o a)'Qo?, ov, 6 SiddanaXog, ov, fi §i^log, ovi b ua&rjr^i, ov, Tj iJLrikia, ag, the field. the teacher. the book. the scholar, the learner. the apple-tree. 56. Rule.— Tht Neut. Plur. in Greek generally takes a Singular verb ; as, 60 GREEK OLLEND0E.FF. to. QoSa ey^Ei axdv&as, kaiiv la, iv Toig mjnoig, za iirila ninrsi, the roses have thorns, there are violets in the gar- dens, the apples fall. 57. 87/. 7Z17Z7SI ra firika, ovy.hi jQtjovaiv ol vsaviai, still, still further, no longer. the apples are still falling, the young men no longer run, we no longer send. 58. aliTor, him. it avrriv, her. it avTO, it. Do you send the young man 1 I send him, Who has my hatl The boy has it, Has he not the balls 1 He has not them, Who has the roses'? The maiden has them, PI. avrovg, them. (Masc.) " avTae, them. (Fem.) " avid, them. (Neiit.) nsfiTieig 7.0V vsminr ; nfjjmo] avtov. Tig sj^si Tov mXov fiov ; 6 naig s)(Si avzov. ovx 'iisi zdg acfalqag ; om 'iiH auTug. rig s'^si TU Qoda ; rj aoQi} t;f££ avza. Rem. — avxov, alnrjv &c. are often omitted in Greek, when they are easily understood from the connection. Has the boy the hat 7 He has it. Does not the teacher send the books 1 He sends them, l^£t 6 naig tov mlov ; ov nifinn o diddaxaJ.og rag ^ip.ovg ; nijxnu (^avrag). GEEEK OLLENDOfiPF. 61 59. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tig k^tc QoSov ; — ^H xoQrj q68ov tXHi- — Al >i6- QUL Qo8a Tt xal La h'^ovGcv. — '-'Eart qo§a iv rfj /^tiQt T/jg xoQi]g. — 'if f-isXiOGa sjii rcov Qodcov xa- d-t]Tai. — O ayqog ovra qoda t/^tc^iOvrt la. — ITov So re ra 8sv8qu ; — Ta dSvdqa ovu ev ra xr'jTVCp, dXX iv Tolg dyQoTg eGtlv. — Al fxriXicci t'^ovai fifj- %a. — Al iv TO xr]7ia fir^Xsai fj.rjXa t^ovotv. — Ov^ al iv rfi vo/ujj /ur/Xsai, dXX al iyyvg rrjg xQrivrjg fxilka K^ovGlv. — Ov TOC la, d'kXd rd qoda dxdv- ■dag tx^c. — Tig i'xsi rdg /3iJ3Xovg ; — '0 Sidda^aXog t'Xii avrag. — 'O fxu&rivrjg ovheti rdg /jt/8Xovg i^«. — Ti t'xii ; — Ex^i OcpaiQag dvrl /3i/3Xcov. — Tig ns/j-Ttii ra la ; — 'ff xoQiq ns/J.nti {civra). — Tig t'x^^ TOP TilXov fzov ; — Ovx o tfiJcoQog, dXX 6 xXsnrrig f^£i avrov. II. Render into Greek. An apple is falling. — The apples fall from the apple- trees. — Do they not fall into the fountain ? — Not into the fountain, but into my hat. — What has the young man in his hat? — He has either a bailor a book. — The schol- ar has in his hand both balls and books. — The maiden has in her hand both violets and roses. — She has nothing except roses. — She has roses instead of violets. — The teacher and the scholar are now in the field. — Who has the books? — The teacher has them. — Who has the ap- ples ? — The young man has them. —He has apples instead 62 GKEEK OLLENDORFF. of books. — The young man has still a book in his (the) hand. — Whither does the father send the young man ? — He sends him hither. — He sends him neither into the field nor into the village. — The young men are sitting among (sV) the trees. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 60. Adjectives of the First atid Second Declension. These are so called because they follow in the Masc. and Neut. the 2 DecL, and in the Fem. the 1 Decl. xaXog. beautiful, noble. SING. Masc. Fem. Neut. N. Kahjg uaXt] xuXov G. xaXov naXijg xaXov D. yaXqi xaXy xaXqi A. yaXop xaXrjv xaXov V. xals xaXjj DUAL. xaXev N.A.V. xaXm xaXd xnlco G.D. xaXoiv xuXaiv PLUH. xcdolv N. xaXol xaXai xaXu. G. xaXav xa7MV xaXmp D. xaXoTg xaXaig xaXoTg A. xaXovg xaXag xaXa V. naXoi xaXai xaXa So, aya&og, tj, 6v, good, aoifog,, jf, 6v, wise. Xivxog, ri, or, white. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 63 61. Rule. — Adjectives agree with their substantives m gender, number and case. So also Pronouns and Par- ticiples. Xsvytia, ot ayu&oi fsfiTiOQOi, the white house, the good merchants. 64 GREEK OLLENDORFF. (S) But if the Noun is to be made emphatic, it can stand first, and the Adj. follow it with the Art. — The Noun in this case can have or omit the Art. according as the _/??-5f conception is definite or indefinite. XOQfj Tj Kolri, 01 r(yri'izai ol aoqtol, tsivizai ol aocpoi, the beautiful maiden. {lit. the maiden, viz. beautiful.) the wise artisans, (artisans", the wise.) the Examples. (a) The beautiful house, (a) Not the beautiful house, (a) But the white house, (o) The good, not the beauti- ful girl, (6) Not theAozise, but the beau- tiful garden, (&) Both therose, and thewhite violet, (6) The white roses, and the white violets, Tj naX)] oixia. ov'/^ ri Kulri oialrt, dlX fi XsvAY] o'lxia. naTg. ovj^ fj olxia, odX 6 KTjnog 6 xalog. 70 T£ Qodov, Httt TO lov 70 XeV xov. za XsvHa Qoda xat z« la la Xsv/ia. noi; whither 7 63. Exercises. I. Render into English. XXalvCi XSVXT]. AiVXOQ TtlXoQ. '0 XiVHOQ m- ^og. — Ovx o livxoi; nlXoq, d%X fj ocpalqa fj Xtvxfj. — 'O nalg acpalqav i'^si Xivxfjv. — Ot dtddoxuXor, txovGi- nuXus /3i/3XovQ. — 'O Oocpoc, dcddoxaXos fil- GREEK OLLENDORFF. 65 fiXovi t/^ki. xaXdi Tb xcd dyad-dg. — 'li pialt/ HV{ti]. — O^X ^) ^CC'^') >iOQJj, dXX rj dyavhrj. — Ou;^ r) ^OQr], dXX 6 %aTr]Q fxov 6 dyad^og. — Hov tloiv ul ;ic{Xul xOQuc ; — 'Ev rjj Xevxfi 6 rod ^dd-rjVTUi. — Ovi< iv Ti] Xtvpifi oroa, dXX inl riig tdQag TTJq Xtv^fjg. — JJov xkLTUc r) fia^iTrjgicc oov ; — Ov>e inl rfjg xa- Xijg i'dQccg rijg iv rfj nvXrj xtTrac, dXXd nXrioiov }iQr]VJ]g Trig sv ra }c!]na. — Hov xtivrai at xaXal /^Xalvai /iiov ; — 'Ev yavla ^ttlvrai, rijg Xtvarig /j]- Xov. — Ilo&iv Tqs^aL 6 mnog ; — ^Exti&av TQ&p^tc. — Tqe;(sc sx tov TcXrjalov rijg xdf^Tjg dyqav big rfjv ooov. — Tig >{a{}-rjvac iTvl tov 'mnov ; — O veaviag STtl TOV iTtnov tfa&rjTai. — IIol %'i-[A.%tL 6 dcddoxu- Xog TOV ^ad-riTifiv ; — Eig ttjv xco/Lirjv avrov tts/h- II. Render into Greek. A wise young man.— A wise teacher.— A beautiful boy. — A beautiful girl. — Beautiful maidens. — Where is the beautiful maiden sitting? — She sits among the trees in (iv rotg iv rm &c.) the garden. — Not among those in the garden, but among those in the field or the pasture. — The young men are neither sitting here nor there. — The garden has a beautiful spring. — The teacher has nothing but good books. — A. good father. — A wise mother. — The wise teacher has a good scholar.- -Whom does the father send hither? — He sends either the good workman or the wise artisan. — I and you send the young man home. — The apples are falling into the beautiful fountain. ■ 66 GREEK OLLENDORFF. EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 64. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension. Adjectives in o? pure {og preceded by a vowel) and gog, have the Fem. in d, thus, og, a, ov. But Adj. in oos have 1], except those in Qoog, which have a. nlovdlog, a, ov, rich. SING. Masc. Fem. Neut. N. nXovatog nXovaia nXovaiov G. nXovaiov nXovsidg nXovGiov D. nlovaloi nlovaia nXov6i(^ A. TtXovaiov nXovaldv nlovaiov V. nlovais nXovaid DUAL. nXovawv N.A.V. nXovai'm nXovata nXovaim G.D. nXovaioiv nXovaiaiv PLUB., nXovaioiv N. nXovaioi TiXovaiai fiXovaia. G. nXovGmv uXovaiav ttXovoiwv D. nXovaioig nXovaiaig nXovaioig A. nXovalovg nXovdlag TiXovma. V. nXovuioi nXovaiai nXovaia tC^ Observe, nXovalmv (not nXovai&v) in the Gen. Plup. Fem. (See 1st. Lesson. Accent.) So, a'AolXog, a, ov, fiaxQog, d, ov, [UxQog, d, ov, crooked, winding. long. little, small. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 67 65. 6 norufios, ov, the river. 6 ddxjv).og, ov, the finger. 6 av&Q03!zos, ov, the mail. 6 TiXovaiog 'i[i7toQog, jxTjkov i^ixgov, anoliog Tiotafiog' jjiaxQa odog, the rich merchant. a small apple, a winding river, a long road. 66. Adjectives in the Predicate. The road is crooked, The houses are beautiful, The roses in the garden are white, My father and mother are wise, The young men and the maid- ens are good, The river and the road are long. ^ 686g iari axoXiix. at olxiai xuXai daiv. ra iv 7(p K);w(j) Qoda Xsvxd iaiiv. 6 nairjQ y.a.i t; fi'^TriQ fiov ao- (poi elaiv. ol viavlai ycit ai aogai aya- ■&01 daiv. 6 noza/iog nai rj 686g Eiai [laxQci. Rem. — When the Adj. refers to Nouns of different gen- ders, if they he persons, the Masc. takes precedence of the Pem. and the Pem. of the Neut. ; ii^ things, the Adj. may agree with the nearest noun, or be put in the Neut. Plur. without regard to the gender of the Substantives. 63 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 67. TzaiZm, Eig, &c. Iplay, sport (fr. ncug, child), dg, as (proclitic). otizmg or ovrm, thus, so. ovzcag — wg, so — as. ovra aoaog ag svco, ovj^ ovrco aocfog ag v.aKog, ag lya Tiity^m, ovzco xaj ah TQt'xsig, as wise as I. not. so wise as beautiful. as I run, so also you run. cogneg, 0V7C0 Xttl, just as. so also. agneg nintu to oevoqov, ovtco xHzai, cagnsQ av, ovtco kou iym, just as the tree falls, so it lies, just as you, so also I. 68. Exercises. I. Mender into Ejiglish. "^fj.noqoz nXovGioz. — 'O t/nnogog TcXovGioq, ioTLv.- — Ov/ 6 Ef.inoQOQ, dXX 6 TS^i'iTT/g nlovotog iortv. — Ov^ OVTCO TiXovoios ag dya&og eGtlv o t[.i7tOQog. — ^H oSog sari GptoTiia. — Sxo'kcui ti6iv ul oSol at syyvg rov noraf^ov. — ^H odog ovre outoj l-iaxQu iariv, ovrs oi/rco Gxo'kid wg o norajj-og. — O noraftbg ovva fj,cxQbg ovrs axoXcog ioiiv. — GREEK OLLENDORPF. 69 8c(xrii)Mi GOV f.icc>€()og sOti teal f-uxqag. — TV t'^ti 6 Tia/g i-jil Tov baxTvXov ', — '^O fj.ixqoz naTg k^hL ]] fiviav r] fj-iXirrav etiL tov daaruXov. — Tl tj^ti sv r>/ X^^Q'- ^ (iv&QCJTtos ; — ^(pvqav 7] ^Xalvav £^4^- — TIov Ttal^bi 6 TvaiQ ; — "^0 Jtalg iv ra xrjTicp nai^tc. — 01 60(f)ol vtaviai iv roig ciyqolg Jval^ovGiv. — Uol Ttjv 6(pcuQav qinrovOcv ; — "^O vtaviag rrjv Gcpaiqav tig rr]v XQrivriv qinrtL. — ^'H Gcpalga tig tov tiotccjuov niTcvtc. — '0 iTi%og i.x TTJg odov tig ttjv vofirjv tqs- X^L- — O TilXog xal fi x^f^^va fxov accXa sGtcv. II. Render into Greek. A rich man. — The merchant is a rich man. — The ar- tisan is not so rich as the laborer. — The laborers are rich. — They are not so rich as wise. — The young man is not beautiful, but wise. — Not so wise as beautiful. — The scholar is not so wise as the teacher. — Who are playing in the gardens 1 — The boy and the girl are playing there. Who is running out of the river ? — The man is running out of the river into the crooked road. — A small fly. — Small cloaks. — The fly (that is) on the cloak. — What fly ? — The one on my finger. — What bee ? — The one on the rose. — ^Whom does your father send into the village ? — He always sends the wise youth. — Just as he sends the youth, so also he sends the workman. — The young man neither plays in the garden, nor sits on a horse, but throws his (the) ball into the river. 70 GREEK OLLENDORFF. NINETEENTH LESSON. 69. Contract Nouns of the Second Declension. Some nouns in tog, oog, sov and oov of this Decl. are contracted ; 6 voog, the mind, TO oat&ov, the hone. SING. N. foog rovg oarsov batovv G. roov vov oariov oarov D. i'6q> v^ oart'o^ ocrrctj A. voov t'OVV oatsov OdTOVV V. fOS vov DUAL. oaziov oaiovv N. A. V. voco fOD otsreai oato} G.D. VOQIV VOIV PLUB. barioiv bazolv N. root VOL OCTTSa oar a, G. vocov vav baisav oarmv D. vooig voTg oareoig oaioTg A. voovg voiig 6 area 6 at a V. VOOl vol oazsa oaza So, ^00?, Qovg, a stream, xdvsov, itavovv, a basket. Accent. — vw and oo-Taj(dual) irregular for via and oo-ra (see 38. Accent), xavovv from xavsov, irregular for xavovv. o vovg rov vsavLOV, %o) oato. iv 7^ xavw, the mind of the young man. I have Bones in my (or, the) basket. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 71 70. Position of the Gen. {a) Partitive Gen. (Lesson III.) Emphasis mainly on the governing noun. The Constiuction of this has already been given ; as, Tj &vQa irig oixiag, 7^S owiag tj &vQct, the door of the house. (6) Adj. (or Attributive) Gen. Emphasis mainly on the Gen. The Gen. then has an Adj. force, and is placed like the Adj. either between the art. and noun, or aftgr both with the art. repeated ; as. ij T^f otxi'ag -Ovga, 7j &vQa rj tr/g oixiag, the door of the house = the of-the-house door. 71. Examples. (a) Partitive Gen. (emphasis chiefly on the govern- ing noun). The basket of the young man, Not the basket of the young man, but his (the) ball, Both the cloak and the hat of the man, TO xavovv rov veaviov. ov 70 xarovv zov reaviov, aXX 9] acfiaiga. rj IS x^uiva, v.ci.i b nXlog %ov av&Qwnov, (b) Adj. Gen. ; (emphasis chiefly on the Gen.) The cloak of the merchant, Not the merchant's cloak, but that of the artisan, The youth's ball, and the work- man's hammer. ^ rov i/jiTZOQOv ylaiva. ov^ rj 70V tiinoQovfkaiva,, alX ij 10V liiyitov. ij toil rsanov aqxuQa xai rj acfvga ij rov (Qyarov. 72 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 72. Promiscuous Exainples. The roses of the garden, Npt the roses of the garden, but the trees. Not the roses of the garden (i. e. the garden roses) but the roses oi ihejidd, The finger of the man. The finger, not the head of the man, Both the man's finger, and the youth's, Not the young man's finger, but the workman s head. ra QoSci Tov nrjnov. ov zk QoSa 70V n^nov, aXXa ■za SivSqa. ov la. rol) xrinov QoSa,, aD.a ra Qoda ra 70V dygov. 6 ddxTvlog TOV uv&gmnov. 6 ddxTvXos, ovf^ 7j xecpaXi; tov avdQionov. T£ TOV dvOgmnov 8dxTvlog, •Aou TOV veai'iov. ov^ Toil I'satiov dai^rvloi;, dXX Tj xscpaXy 7j TOV BQyd- Obs. — This last construction, rj xscpalrj rj &c. is chiefly employed when not only the Gen. but also the govern- ing noun is to be contrasted with some other object. 73. What ball'? That of the young man, The young man's. What hammer do you throw ? I throw the merchant's, I throw that of the mer- chant, 5 What horses are running? | Tivsg "nnoi, TQtjovaiv ; Not the teacher's horses, Tig aqiaiga ; ?} TOV v^aviov. Tiva. aqjvgKV ginTSig ; Qinroa tijv tov sjinogov. Not the horses of the ( "^^^ "' '^''*' ^'^"'^""^"'^ ''''''"■ teacher, 5 But the scholar's, /,..,, But those of the scholar, \ ""^^ "' ^"^ f^^^^V^o^- greek ollendorff. 73 74. Exercises. I. Render into English. Ti I'xiiQ sv ra ttava ; — ^Oora t;^a. — Ta sv rw Kava ogto. Xtvxce e6Tiv. — Tig ^ovg ; — sv ra dyQa. — Ov^ 6 sv ra dyqa ^ovg, d'kX 6 ■jtXrjaiov Trig Hojfirjg. — '^O vovg tov vsaviov. — Ovvs 6 vovg, OVTS t) xtcpa'krj tov vsaviov. — "^O tov dcha6}c tov dyqov sig tov ■moTa[.LOV tqe^ovGiv. II. Render into Greek. A white basket. — White baskets. — Our baskets are white. — The basket is not so white as the bones. — The 4 74 GREEK OLLENDORFF. merchant's basket is not so white nor so small as the artisarCs. The merchant's basket, is not so white as his (the) cloak.— l^\\e girl has small and white violets.— We have nothing hut bones in the basket. — They have roses and violets in their (the) baskets, instead of roots and thorns. — A fly instead of a bee. — What has the thief? — He has my cloak. — He has the young mayis cloak. — He has not the merchant's cloak, but his hat. — A ball is fall- ing into my hat. — Whence does it fall? — Out of the fig- tree. — The apples fall from the apple-trees into the beau- tiful spring. — The little boy is sitting on the white seat. ■ — The cow lies on the rocks, near the corner of the pas- ture. TWENTIETH LESSON. 75. aii\(f6g, ov, b vioi,; 01), 11 aSsXcpij, ^f, ^ dgocpj], rig, 6 XQot'og, ov, rots, noXai, the brother. the son. the sister. the roof. the time, time. then, at that time. of old, anciently. o vvv XQorog, XQOVOS 6 fvv, 01 Tore av&Qconoi, 01 av&Qwnoi ol tots, 01 ndXai vsaviai, at vsaviat ol ndXai, the present time (the now time), the men of that time (the iJ^eramen). > the young men of old. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 75 Rem. — Adverbs following an Art. have the force of Adjec- tives. .76. The pupil will observe that whatever word or clause has an ^c^'ec^ii'e force can stand, between the noian and its Art. or after both with the Art. repeated; as, 1. The Adjective, 2. The Adj. Gen. 3. The Adv. as Adj. 4. The Adj. clause, (a) (jocpog S,v&QCx>noi. (6) 6 (IvOQwnog 6 aocfiog. (c) uii&()a)nog 6 aiXfog. (a) ri 70V reiiiiov adtXcp^. (6) !i aStXq)i] rj rov viaviov. (c) aSel^fq fj 10V ■peatiov. ((7.) oi rvv ai&Qmnoi. (6) Oi ai'OQoonni ol vvv. (c) av&QCO7!0l 01 vvv. (a) ri iv tij oi-Aa OvQa. (b) rj OvQU ij sv jrj olxia. (c) &VQa i) iv irj oixia. Thus, e. g. What men? I. The wise men, 2. The of-ihe-village men, (The men of the village), 3. The qf-old men, (The men of old), 4. The near-ihe-river men, (The men near the river), I Tiieg civOqcotzoi. ; { (a) 01 ancpnl uvOQmnoi: I (6) 01 ai-Ogmnni ol aocpoL ^ (f) at'QQmnoi. ol ffoqpo/. I (a) ol zJji,' '/.(Ofirii av&Qamoi. < (6) oldv&(>a>no(.ol 77j>,'y.(oi^/ji! f (fi) af&QoinoL ol tiji y.aixtji;. (a) ot nakai anQQtanoi. (6) ot at>&(ja)7zoi oi naXat. ((,•) av&Qconoi ol ndlai. (a) ol iyyvi; rou notanov av- dgainot. (6) ot avdQanoi ol iyyv(s tov noia/xov. (c) av&fjainoi ol iyjvi; tov noTafiov. (tj GREEK OLLENDORFF. Rem.— In Examples (a) the emphasis is eaxlusiveli/, or mainly on the Adj. or qualifying word or clause. In (6) and (c) there is additionally some emphasis on the first noun as contradistinguished from some other noun, (c) Differs from (6) only as it first presents the con- ception indefinitely, but immediately made definite by the Art. following ; as, av&gajiog o aya&oq, a man, the good one = The good man. 77. |l3^ The pupil will specially observe that whatever Adv. or clause has the force of an A(Jj. must immediately fbllow the Art. — He must guard against being misled by English constructions ; thus, The door in the house, not. but. or. The cow near the river, not. but Tj OvQa sV T§ oi'x/re. rj SV jy oiy.ia &vQa. ri {)vQa rj iv Ty olkik. Tj ^ovg Trltjaiov zov nozufiov. i] nXtjaiov tov nozafiov (SoJi,'. or, Tj ^oog ij nli]aiov xov izozafiov. 'H dvQa ii' rfi olyJa, would mean, the door is in the house {tariv understood), or, the door, when in the house; not, the door [which is) in the house. 'H ^ovg nXtjaiov tov noTajAov, would mean, the cow is near the river (taziv un- derstood) or, the coiv, when near the river ; not, the cow which is near the river. Examples. Render, The horse (which is) in the road. \ ? f '^ °^^] '"1°fi . ^ ' ( mnog o tv zy ooo}. The cow (that is) in the field. The rock near the stream. The bones in the basket. The boy on the roof. The fountains in the village. The apples in the apple-tree. GREEK OLLENDOUFE. 77 78. Observe also the various modes of rendering the Art. in connection with a Gen. or with an Adj. clause ; thus, ilea thv rov aSaXqiov, tivag In/iovs exsii ; ZOVg TOV fflTlOQOV iy^M, what horse have you ? I have that of my brother. I have my brother's. I have the one in the pasture. I have that which is in the pasture. I have the one which is in the pasture, what horses have youl I have those of the merchant. I have the merchant's. I have those there. I have those which are there. Ihave the ones which are there. 79. Exercises. I. Hender into English. JTou nai^tL 6 ddtXcpog gov ; — 'O d8t'k(pbs xal ri dStXcpr] jxov sv tcj ttrfTia %uiQov6LV. — Ovx sv tco TOV EQydrov xriTia, aXk sv ra tov nXov6iov sfA.- TioQov. — Iloii Ttai^ai 6 viog Gov j — vlog fiov ■jiai^ki iv TYj Gata TfjQ oixiag. — Ovx sv TJj T/jg ol- xiag Oxi^a.) dXX sv ttj tov devd^ov. — 'Hfxsig xa- ■&i]fiti}cc sv TYj TOV 8sv8()OV Opiid. — Ov Ttai^ovGcv ol viol r)/L(cov nXrjGiov tov noraf-iov ; — Ovx sxsl nai'QovGiv., ovBs uvtov, d^Jka %l.r]aiov Trjg avx^g. — T/pa 7t£jiin-ii 6 TiaviiQ GOV tig tijv xco^ujv ; — Tov dya&ov vlov Tis/nTtti. — 'Eyco xal 6 dStXcpog qIjtto- /Liiv TTjV GcpaiQuv. — Tlva GcpaiQuv ; — Trjv sv Trj 78 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 6voa. — Trjv STtl TTJg tdQa; rfj^ iv rfj Oroa. — JJots ^iTCTtTH rrjv OcpaiQav ; — 'Ev rco viiv ^qovco. — Ob vtaviat ra; iv ri] ^rjXa OcpaiQag qntrovOn'. — Ours rag iv rfi x^i^^? ^iTvrovocv, ovvt rag iv roig xavolg. II. Render into Greek. A wise son. — A good brother. — The beautiful sister. — Who has the beautiful staff? — My sister has it [avtijv). — ■ Not the merchant's son, but his brother. — What hat has my son 1 — He has the hat of his (the) brother. — He has not his brother's hat but his books. — What staves has the father? — He has those of the young man. — He has not the young man's, but the merchant's. — What violets? — The beautiful ones in (ta y.ula. ta iv) the garden. — What roots ? — The roots of the apple-tree. — Not the roots of the apple-tree, but those of the fig-tree. — The thorns of the rose. — Nothing is so beautiful as the rose. — Not roses but violets. — We have nothing in our (the) baskets except violets. TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 80. f'/MoV, ri, 6v, (from tfxov) my, mine. aog, arj, gov, (from aou) thy, thine =y our, yours. (fllo^-, ov, a friend. 6 if Hog. the friend. cpiloi fwv, a friend of mine. i/xbg epilog, or qiilog s/jog, a friend oi" mine. 6 epilog fiov, my friend. ifiog epilog, ) n ■ ^ '']'=' > my Iriend. epilog s/tog, V ■' GREEK OLLENDORFF. 79 Rem. — When my, thy, (your) &c. are to be made emphat- ic, ifioi and aog are always used. Have you my cloak? I have not your cloak, but mine, Yoicr brother, not mine, My friend, not the teacher's, fjffVf,' Till) ^XaTfiiv fiov ; k^sig 7)jv ffiiiV ylahav ; ov zi]f ai,v '^Xaivttv ej^co, aXXa TtjV ffArjV. (JOS aSsXtfog, ov]( 6 Bfxos. 6 iftoi (filog, ovf^ o tov diBas- aaXov. 81. Tivog ; of whom 7 whose 7 (Sing.) tivmv; of whom 7 whose 7 (Plur.) 7ivog sariv o mnog ; sfiog iaiiv, 6 'Innog aog iativ, aXX c iriv ti'vog i^sig ^axrtjQiav ; riiv zivog 'i%ug ; iv Totg rivmv a^noig elatv ; iv loTg EiioTg, iv xolg zmv cfllcav ij/imv, Ti'vog iazlv rj acpaiga, sazi rov adslq}Ov fiov, 'iazi 70V eftov aSeXqiov, TOV fflTZOQOV ioTlV, i] acpaiQK ifiij iativ, aiX rov zsyvirov. whose is the horse 1 it is mine. tlie horse is yours, not mine. whose staff have you? whose have you (that of whom have you ?) in whose gardens are they.? in mine. in those of our friends, whose is the ball ? it is my brother's. it is the merchant's, the ball is mine, not the arti- san's. Rem. — If the question is, 'whose is a thing?' the Gen. of the Possessor is used ; if] ' xehat does he possess?' the Dat. with iazl, or the Ace. with e/w. 80 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Whose is the cloak'? The cloak is the workman's, What is thereto the workman? (What has the workman?) There is a cloak to the work- man, i. e. the workman has a cloak, zlvog fMT\v ri fXalva. ; rj yXaiva, iari tov iyyarov. 71 lazi TO) (Qyarq; 11 'iffii f(jy(i.Ti]g ; sazi ylaXvu. to) fQyarri, b fQydzrjg ylahav s/^si. What have you beautiful? Have you any thing beautiful ? We have nothing beautiful, Have you beautiful houses? We have. We have beautiful ones. We have the white ones (which are) in the village, rt sy^srs y.a).ov ; Sj(STS 71 y,alov ; ear IV vj-ilv ri xa).oi' ; ovdsv r/ujiev y,alov. saTiv ij/uv PvSsv Kalov. r/^s7£ -AaXag omiag ; HlOjltV.^^ KttXas s)(Ofisv. 7ai; levxag iiofisv tag iv ly KCOfllJ. rag sv ry y.cofiri Xsvnag e)^0[isv. 82. Exercises. I. Render into English. "AdsXqioQ. — "^O ddsXcpog juov. — 'O s/z6g cxStX- qjog. — Ovx o Sjitoq, dXX 6 aog dStXcpoQ. — JJsfi'Jva TOV (my) vlov tig tov dyqov. — Tov rivog vlov nsfiTCEcg ■ — Ov rov sfj-ov nE[j.%a, aXXa tov oov. — ^Ev Tolg Tivog arjTioi-g Ttui^ovetv ot vtaviai; — JLv ToTg xaXoig Toig tov sjlitvoqov. — Ov>e sv roTg ifioig, ov8a iv Tolg oo/g TcaiL^ovoiv, dXX iv Tolg tov dya- ■d'ov 8i8a6xaXou. — Tivog ilalv ol xfinoc oi iyyvg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 81 TOV xaXov Qov ; — H ifiol slaiv, r] tov aocpov ts- ^vItov. — TivoQ tiolv ol f(aXol dyqoi ; — Ov tov sfA.ov ahtXcpov ilocv, akXa tov gov. — Uov tloiv ol cpiXoc fijLicJv ; — -H inl tcov tietqcjv, rj sv tuIq GtouIq xa&r]vvut. — TV sgtc tco (pi'Xco (.lov ; — Ovdsv tco cpiXcp GOV EGvi, nXrjv /SaxTrjQiag xal fiinQccq ^rjXov. — Tl xaXov e^sis ; — OvSsv ovts xaXov tx^o, ovts dya&ov. — Ovblv xaXov sgtI fioc nXr^v qoScov xul I'cov. — Ovx k^st vovv vnaviac. ^ — 2o(pov vovv i'X^t. — H TOV fj.a-&r}TOV yXdJGGa ov^ ovtco Gog^rj €GTiv, cog rj TOV didaGxaXov. II. Render intd Greek. What has my brother ? — Your brother has a staff.— My father has nothing but a staff. — Whose staff has he 1 — He has mine. — He has not mine, nor the merchant's, but that of the wise artisan. — Has the teacher (any) books? — He has. — He has (some) good ones. — The teacher has not so good books as the scholar. — Neither I nor you have so good books as the teacher. — The teach- er has a wise tongue. — What has (what is there to) the scholar 1 — There are to the scholar good books, and a good mind. — Has the artisan any thing beautiful? — He has something both beautiful and good. — What has he beautiful? — He has nothing beautiful except a small hammer. — He has a ball instead of a hammer. — Is not the hammer mine ? — It is not yours, but your friend's. — Where does it lie? — It lies either on the hearth, or in the small chest, or near the beautiful fig-tree. 4* 82 GREEK OLLENDORFF. TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 83. Contracted Adj. of the First 4* Second Declension. XQixsEog, a, ov, golden. SINQ. N. )[nva-en',; id, SOP XQva-ovg V, ovv G. y^ijvn-tov, tug, tov XQva-ov, ni' ov D. XQva-t'q), {?. i'o) lQVS-^,_ v> (f) A. V. •/QVtJ-SOV, doubtful, tav, nor eov DDAL ■leaXu dg- yvqd ^fiXu. — -E^ei dgyvqag ocpvqaq, huI ^qvad 7iOTt]Qca. — Ta rlvog norrjQia ^gvGa sgtcv ; — Ou TO- Ef.icc novriQia ^qvGcc eGtiv, ov8s to. Ga, dXXd Tcc Tcjv cpiXcov rjjucjv. — TV egti ra ifx-noQco • — -EGrt ra Sfinoqa xXulva TiOQCpvqd rt acci ^quGrj. — nou xtlvrccL uL ^Xaivai ; — 'Ev rfj /^qvGy /j]Xa KtJvTat. — TL Gcpalqa ov xalrac stvI ri/g rqaTTE^i/g, dXka niTtTSt STvl TTjV ^rjXop. — Oi vtaviai i] xudt^vrac snl rfjg tdqag, r] sjtl rrjv oqocprjv rqsxovGLV. — 'O nalg qlTtrat ttjv Gcpaiqav sttI ttjv olxiav. II. Render into Greek. A friend of mine. — My friend. — Not my friend, but yours. — Both my friend, and the merchant's. — -What has tlie merchant? — He has purple cloaks, and golden cups. 86 GKEEK OLLENDORFF. — The silver cup is not so beautiful as the golden oi^e. — Whose is this golden cup?— Whose is it {zivog iaziv)! — It is the merchant's. — It is neither mine nor the mer- chant's ; it is the laborer's.— The purple cloaks are not so beautiful as the white ones. — Who lies here ? — My son lies here. — Where? — On the roof. — Not on the roof, but on the table. — The ball falls on to the table. — The ball does not lie on the chest, but in the chest. — The apples fall not {ov nintu) on to the basket, but into the basket. — The horses always run either into the road, or on to the rocks. — The cow is either running in the road, or into the road. — The boy is not running on the house, but on to the house. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 86. Declension 2. Attic Form. o tacog, the peacock. SING. DUAL. PLUH. N. raag N. ta4 G. T«(» N. A. V. TKCO G. tawv D. ra(p G. D. tai^v D. THtpff A. tawv A. tacag V. rawg V. Taij) So, ?} f'o)?, the morning, dawn, Exc. Ace. Sing. £W. laycog, the hare. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 87 70 avmyetav, the dining-hall. SINO. DUAL PLnR. N. avayemv N. avmyEm G. avcoyew N. A. V. avtiysta G. arayeav D. aj'Mj'fq) G. D. avwyimv D. avmyec^g A. avwyioiv A. aKaj'soo V. KJ'Co'j'fCOJ' V. avwyeat Accent.— Ge.n. Sing. Taw instead of thw. «>'cu/£o))' Propa- roxylone throughout, a standing for o, and being re- garded as having but half its usual length. 17 TjixsQa, ag, the day. ?; sansQU, as, ihe evening: ri fisarifJi^Qta, ag, noon (/iEarj middle, ijfifqa day). tj ovQot, ag, the tail. 6 GMOvpog, ov, the squirrel, {axid, ovqa, shadow-tail). Xafi^&vm, I take, catch. 87. riQo, in {ioutoi= before. A Preposition. !ZQo 10V, before the., (Governs only the Gen.) TiQb trig nvXrig, TiQO Tov 2q6vov, TtQO SdJZfQa?, 71Q0 r~ig £w, nQO rifieQag, TiQO trjg TjiAtQag, before the gate, before the time, before evening, before the dawn. before day. 88 GREEK OLLENDORFF. aTzo rov, £x rov, avTi TOV, 7ZQ0 70V, im rov, sjii rov, er 7^, sig rov. from the. out from the. instead of the. before the. on the. on to the. in the. into the. bQlofiai, I come, go. (Passive and middle form.) Ind. Pres. SING. 1. 2. 3. eQXOfiat, EQlBZai, / come, am, coming, you come = thou comest. he, she, it comes, is coming. DUAL 1. 2. 3. SQyojis&ov, SQXsn&ov, tQlsa&ov, we two come, you two come, they two come. PLllR, 1. 2. 3. tQXOflB&a, iQXsa&s, SQXovrai, we come, are coming, you (=2/e) come, (^c. they come. 7I07E epxBOt^e ; nQo ^sai]/j^(ii'ag tg^o/nsOa, nais axiovQov Xafi^dvsi, when do you come ? we come before noon, the boy catches a squirrel. greek ollendorff. 89 89. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tig t(}y(STai; — "E^ji^arai 6 navrjQ ^ov. — Ov>c tQ^tTCCi, tig TTjv Groav fi firjTrjQ Gov ; — Oup( rj ijutj f.tr]TrjQ EQ^ivat, dXX fj 6r]. — '0 racog. — Taa xal Xuyco. — 01 TS Xaya xai ol raw. — TV 'kufx/Savtc o Tialg ; — SxiovQOv Xafj./3avic. — 'Yjutig ov gxlov- Qovg, dXXa Xayaig Xafi^uvtvs. — Ovx V/^'^^i roi/g Xaycog Xau/3avojLiiv, dXX vfj.tlg. — "H/iitlg rs aal vfj.tig %Q0 TTjg kco tig to dvcoytav SQ^oiLit&a. — 01 cpiXoc. r)ficov nQO rf^g eOrcsQag tQ/^ovrai. — Jlort nSfiTTse- 6 narrjQ rov vlov ; — Hsftnti uvtov nqo trig rifzsQag. — 'if ovqa rov tccco. — Ovji( r) ovqa, dXX Tj }itrpaXr] rov tuco. — Ovrt rj rov raw ovqu, ovTE rj Tov OxcovQOv. — 'H rov Gxlovqov ovqcc ov^ ovTCo xaXr] s6tcv, ag rj tov Taa. — Ugb tov XQ^' vov. — ^O xXsTtTTjg jiQO TJjg tco tqx^raL. — At /Sotg fcilvvac Tigb Ttjg 7CvX?]g. — 'H tag ov^ oiira xaXri sGTtv ag T} honsQu. — To juoiQov dvaysav. II. Render into Greek. Wlience comes the young man ? — The young man comes out of the dining-hall. — The peacock and the squirrel are running into the dining-hall. — When does the thief come ? — Not before noon, but before morning. — The teacher sends his (the) disciple before evening. — Whither does he send him? — Into the village. — Into 90 GREEK OLLENDORFF. what village ? — Into the one near the river. — What do the young men catch? — They catch hares and peacocks. — The tail of the peacock is beautifal. — The tail of the peacock is not so small as that of the squirrel. — A pur- ple cloak. — "Whose is the golden cup? — It is mine. — It is not mine, but my brother's. — The horse lies before the gate. — The maidens sit before the porch. — Noon is not so beautiful as morning (^ sag). — Where lies the basket? — It lies in the dining-hall. — The day is beautiful. TWENTY-FOUETH LESSON. 90. Adj. of Declension 2, of two endings. Most co7npound Adjectives in og, and many others, belong in their inflexion, entirely to the 2 Decl. The form is the same for all genders, except where the Neut. has a separate ending. aloyog, irrational, unreasonable. (from a privative, and loyog, speech, reason.) SING. DUAL PLUR. N. aloyog akoyov G. akoyov D. aXoycQ A. akoyov V. akoys akoyov N.A.V. aXoya, G. D. aXoyoiv N. aXiyoi aXoya G. aXoymv D. aXoyoig A. akoyovg aXoya V. aknyoi akoyu So, adinog, unjust. 'ilifiEiQog, experienced, sJcilfid. dO^dvarog, immorlal. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 91 ?/ xpT'Xfl, ^?, tfts soul. TO fcoo)', ov, the living creature, the animal. 6 luTQos, ov, the phi/siciati. fj ^ivym afydrarog laiiv, t] yjvx'i u&dvttzov iaziv, 6 uv&Q(a7iog ^wov iaitv, the soul is immortal, the soul is immortal (an im- mortal thing), man is an animal. 91. nowg, a, ov, of what sort 7 what kind of 7 xajio'f, ri, ov, evil, bad, wicked. now? av&Qwnog ; noTa QoSa i^^i rj aoQi] . rot. noia sx^i ; TO, Koka S^El, what sort of a man 1 what sort of roses has the maid- en? what sort of ones has she? (the of-whai-sorl ones has she?) she has the beautiful ones. Rem. — Tidlog referring to something previously spoken of, commonly takes the article. ygdcpo), sig, bi &c. Tj F.ntaioXrj, iji, nQog i6v, I wriie, am writing the letter, to the. 92 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 92. nQog, in front of, before, to. A Preposition. niiOi rov, T^, i6r, (Governs Gen. Dat. and Ace.) TTQog Tov, to the. TTQog Tiva YQacpF.ig ; TZQog s/^s y(>aiOi sGtlv. — Tqacpoj ettiOtoXt'jv. — 'Eyco aaX ov STtcGToXag yQacpo^tv. — Tlgbg riva yqacptTt ; — Uqog rov tfj-Tttigov lurqov. — Hoiag STTiOrolag yqacpsrs ; — KaXag yqagjojusv sttioto- 'kag. — JJocav ijtiGroXrjv yqacpic r] xoqt] ; — KccXrjv ygufpsi. — '^O TvarrjQ yQa(f>t(, nqog rov (tis) vlov. — 'O d8iXjv. — Tivtg ngog rj/iidg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 97 tqxovTac; — 01 vsaviac f.i6voi iqxovrai. — Tlvu 7isfj,7t£i 6 narrjQ ngog rov 8i8cc6f(aXov ; — Tov /u6- vov vlov 7vsfA.7t£t. — Ov fA.6vov TOV viov nsftnsi, aXXa aal s/us. — IJonqov sp/sc rijv if^rjv x^l^ov 6 Ts;(vtTrjg, tj ttjv tov £^%6qov; — Ovts Tt}v i/Lir)v i^si, OVTS rrjv tov sjutioqov. — Trjv 6rjv, dXX ov Trjv TOV ijUTVOQOv £;(£t. — O oocpog dtddoxaXog ivvovg £Gti Ta dya&co fxa&rjTi}. — JJotsqov d&d- vaTog £6tiv r] ipv^rj, rj ov ; — 'H tpv^rj f^ovrj d&d- vccTog sGriv. — OvSsv jtXrft> Trjg ifjv^^g dddvuTOV ioriv. — Tav dv-d-qctncov fiovcav al ipv^al d&dva- Toi slaiv. — xXETtTrjg xal siaxog xcd ddixog iorcv. II. Render into Greek. The soul of man is not irrational. Is the soul in-a- tional or not? — Is the physician experienced or not? — My physician is not so experienced as yours. — Is the soul immortal or not? — Even (xai) the wicked soul is immortal. — What sort of a cloak has the merchant ? — He has a pur- ple cloak. — He has neither my cloak, nor yours, but my friend's. — He has not only cloaks, but golden cups. — When does our friend come ? — He comes not only be- fore morning, but also before evening. — Not only the day IS beautiful, but also the morning and the evening. — Both the morning and the evening are beautiful. — -To whom does your father write letters ? — He writes not only to me, but also to his only son. — The son comes alone. — Who comes besides {nlriv) the thief? 5 98 GREEK OLLENDORFF. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 98. Adjectives of the Attic 2 Decl. iXsmg, propitious, gracious. SING. DUAL PLUR. N. iXimg 'IXstav G. tXem D. 'Ilscp A. IXecav V. IXsaig iXsmv N.A.V. tXem G. D. iXscpv N. iXecp J'Aeto G. tXemv D. iXecpg A. " &Ea)? iXsca 6 &E6g, ov, God. (Voc. Sing. &B6g not ■fl-fs.) dixatog, a, or, just. [taxaQiog, a ov, happy. a&)Xog, a, ov, ivretched, miserable. 99. 6 Sixaiog, 01 dlxaioi, 10 dixaiov, ■za dixaicc, 6 aya&og, 6 xaxog, 01 aya&ol, ol xaxoi, TO ayaQov, to xaxov, TU dya&d [taya&d) ia xaxd, the just (mail). the Just (men). that which is just, justice. the things which are just, just things, the good (man), the bad (man), the good, the bad. good, evil (that which is good, &c.) good things, evil things. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 99 The good man is happy, The unjust are wretched, God is propitious to tlie good man, God is not friendly to the bad, ayaQo? fia>tdQi6<; (ianv). oi aSmoi slaiv a&hoi. 6 &sbg ilsmg lati r^ dya&^. 6 &Eog ovH Evvovg lolg xanoXg. 100. 5(00X0), iig, SI, td&ijvTai tiqo tijg 7ivXi]g, rj o'v ; 70 noTTjQior oi xslrai sni zrfi TQans^ijg, dUa tiititsi ini rriv TQUus^av. 6 naig rj xsiiat sni Ty xQijvri, t] SQ/^srai, nqog itjv xcofiijv. 98 GUEEK OLLENDOEFF. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 98. Adjectives of the Attic 2 Decl. ilswg, propitious, gracious. SING. DITAL FLUE. N. iXBag iXsmv N. iXscp tXsco G. ilsm N.A.V. 'iXsoo G. 'iXsmv D. 'iXscff G. D. 'iXecpv D. iXst^g A. ilsmv A. tXsmg iAeoo V. (^£03? tXeoav V. iXscp iXsm 6 &e6g, ov, God. (Voc. Sing. &s6g not &el) Siitaiog, a, ov, just. fiaxcLQiog, a ov, happy. u&Xtog, a, or, loretched, miserable. 99. 6 SUatog, ot dixaioi, •CO dixaiov, la Sluaia, 6 aya&og, 6 ttaxog, 01 aya&oi, ol xaxot, to ayadov, to y.ax6v, ta aya&d (taya&d) the just (man). the just (men). that which is just, justice. the things which are just, just things, th e good (man), the bad (man), the good, the bad. good, evil (that which is good, &c.) good things, evil tilings. GREEK OLLENDOEPP. 99 The good man is happy, The unjust are wretched, God is propitious to the good man, God is not friendly to the had, ayadoi ixaaaQiSi; (ianv). 01 adi'Aoi siaiv a&Xioi. 6 &SOS i^eoJs" ioTi. zQJ aya&^. 6 &sog ovy. tvvovg lolg xaKoXg. 100. Siconta, etg, ei, &c. I pursue. (fEvyoo, £ig, £1, &c. I flee, shun. CO viana, dtaxsig to uya&ov, 01 aycL&oi zo y.ay.bv qisvyovaiv, [lovov (ftvyofiev to y.ay.6v, 01 laym tov raafiuv ifsvyovaiv, young man, you pursue what is good, the good shun evil, we shun evil alone, the hares flee the young man. 101. im T9, close on, at, by the. }id&r]fiai, £711 T(jj norufiip, rj naig ini zrj xQ^vri addi^rai, I sit by, at the river, the girl sits by the fountain, we are playing at, by the fountain. Prom the, out from the. In the, into the. Instead of, for the, Before the. On the, on to the. At, by the, to the, Render, nno 10V, £y. tov. £V 7(p, £ig 70V. avr\ TOV. TIQO TOV. £711 TOV, £711 TOV. £711 zqj, TlQOg TOV. TQ£j^o(i£V a.710 %r\g iioii.ijg, £y. tov aygov. r; acpaiqa nEiTai iv t^ jcav^, ?j tiitztei Eig to Kavovv. Xafj.^dv(o ditiovQOvg dvz\ layaiv. TiOTiga xd&rjvTtti ngo Tijg nvlrig, i] ov ; to noTTiQior ov xEizai etiI Tiji TQUTid^Tjg, dXXa tii'tztu etii zny TQdftB^av. TzaTg ij y.£hai £7zt t-q HQ^fri, ij £Q](STai nQog zrjv xufiijv. 100 greek ollendorff. 102. Exercises. I. Render into English. '0 S-tos I'Xicog ioTC toTq dyaS'olg. — Ov roig ?{axoig tvvovg sotcv 6 ■d'tog, dXXa roig dyadotg. — 01 dya&ol dil rd dyax)^d SiaxouOcv. — "^Hf-itig oudsv -jtlriv TOV xaxov cptvyofj-av. — 'O xaxog dil TO xa^tov dccoxtc. — Tig /naxuQcog sOtcv ; — 01 81- ftaioi fA.ovoL fiaaaQiol tlotv. — 'O dya&og dsl fia- tcaQLog iOTiv. — 01 dyad'ol ov jzovov Oocpoi, dXXd xal fiaHaQioi tlotv. — 01 aaxol f^ovoc udXcoi tioiv. — "^0 -diog ovx iXscjg sGn roig aaxoig. — f(uxog dil d&'kiog. — Tiva dtcoyticg ; — Tov ^Xi-nrriv dicoxco. — 01 xXiTTvac rj/udg dicoxovGcv. — "Hf-itig ov fxovov 8t,o)XOf.tsv^ dXka xai Xafx^avofxhv rovg xXsTiTug. — 01 dhiHOL dil rovg ddt'fiovg hicoitovGiv. — 01 xa}(o\ rovg ayaSovg iptvyovOiv. — Hov xa- ■OrivraL cd nogac ; — 'EtiI rarg ^qrivacg xa&rjvTai. — 01 viavluL inl ra fxtxQa qa Tvai^ovGiv. — To dya&ov dsl xaXov aonv. II. Render into Greek. The thief is miserable. — Thieves are neither wise nor happy. — The young man is not a thief. — The thief always shuns the good (man). — The good (to a.yo.&6v) is always honorable. — God is propitious to the good. — The good neither flee nor pursue the bad. — The unjust al- ways either flee or pursue the just. — The morning pur- sues the evening. — The good always pursue what is GKEEK OLLENDORFF. 101 rjoble (to xalov). — Is the physician just or unjust? — He is just, not [ovK or aXl' ovu) unjust. — Is the good (man) happy or miserable ? — The good (man) is always happy. — The bad are always miserable. — The soul of the un- just (man) is evil. — God is always propitious to the good. — What have you in yoiu: (the) basket ? — We have purple cloaks, and golden cups. — Not «7,y cups, but the merchant's. — Where do the silver balls lie? — They lie by the fountain. — Both the horse and the cow are fleeing. — The youth flees alone. TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 103. The Demonstrative Pronoun. ovTog, this, this person, he. SING. N. ovTog avzri zovzo G. tovzov ravzrig zovzov D. zovztp zavzy zovzc^ A TOVtOV zavz>]v DUAL. zovzo N.A. TOVZCO Zttvza zovzm G.D. tovzoiv zavzaiv PLUE. zovzo IV N. OVTOl avztti zavzS. G. TOvTcor zovzcov zovzoav D. rovToig zaviaig Tovzoig A. tovTOvg raizag zavza 102 GREEK OLLENDORFF. This merchant, This cup, This beautiful cloak, These golden baskets, ovTog o eftnoQog, o sfinoQog oviog. to noiriQiov tovto. avrti ri uttXrj -flaTva. to. "K^Qvaa. y.ava ravza. Rem. — This golden basket admits all the varieties of position consistent with the article's standing before the Adj. and being omitted before the Pronoun ; as. This golden basket, This cloak of mine, (this my cloak) This purple cloak of mine. TOVTO 10 iQvaovv yttfOVV. TO )^QV(Sovv xarovr tovto. to y.avovv tovto to j^Qvaovv. to y.avovv to ^Qvdovp tovto. tovto to xavovv to ^Qvaovv. avtri rj yXouvK ftov. avtij Tj ifiri ■^Xaiva. avrri t] noQCfivga yXttTi/d (lov. avzri ij ifiij noQcpvQa ^^aiva. ovtog. this man, this person. aVTTj, this woman. tovto, this (this thing). ovtoi, these men. tavta, these things. tovToav, of these persons, of these things. ovtog o av&qmnog tqi^si, ovtog tQf'xsi, tovto iati Kalov, tavta Sixaid, sativ, tavta ygdcpco, ttva 'innov Sj/sig ; tovtov Sj[(a, ovtoi a&Xioi slaw. this man runs. this is noble. these things are just. I write these things. what horse have you? I have this one. these (men) are miserable. GREEK OI^LENDORFP. 103 6 Xotf.og, ov, TO nsStov, ov, vxprjXoi, ij, ov. the hill, ilie plain, high, lofty. 104. Exercises. I. Render into English. Avvrj ?} olxia. — Avtt] rj vifjTjXr) oixla. — Al oixiai avTUL al xaXal Otoccq not loviuQ t^ovGiv. — Oi/Tog 6 Xocpoe viprjXog eariv. — Ovrog 6 Xocpog OVX oi/TCog vifrjAog eOtiv, cog 6 nXrjOiov vov nora- /iiov. — Ilo&tv iQ/^ovrat oiiroi ot ccyu&ol vsaviac ; — 'Atvo T^g iv ra Titdicp xcoftrjg tQ^ovrat. — Tivsg iiolv sv TOig terjTvocg rovroig rolg xaXotg ; — Avrac al ftaXal xogat aldlv avrov. — Ti eOtc tovto ; — TovTO iOTi ^coov aXoyov. — Ovrot ol dlxacoi av- ■d'QcoTTOi TU dyad a dt(oxov6tv. — Ovrog 6 teXi-jvTrjg Tov dixaiov . Render. Away from the river, and out of the house. Instead of a basket, and before the door. . Not on the roof, but on to the hill. Either in the field, or into the plain. He sits, or plays by the spring. I send the young man to the physician. The boy comes (along) with the merchant. 111. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tiva nsfXTitcQ TtQog e/^i; — Hsjuttco nQog os tov vlov. — lEvv rive nsfinaig avvov ; — ^vv ra if.ia dStXcpa. — TivL 6v ^ns jj,%s.L(i ri^dg, ; — "Yf^ccQ Gvv t(S OogytS xal i/xTtsiQco 8c8aOxaXcp GVf^TTSfina. — Tivsg eQXOV^<^^ j — Ov f^ovov eg^ovrac ol iQyarac, dXka xal GvvsQX^T^^^ o dyai^-og larqog. — TIov fjg s/^&ag; — 'Ep^&ac konkqag 6vv v/u-lv iv ra xrjnco ijv. — Ovx iv Tovra ra xrjTicp, dXX iv rco rcXr^aiov tov vipi^- GREEK OLLENDORFF. Ill Xov Xocpov. — II06OC TS^vTvac 6vv odl fjOav iv ra xrjTia ; — Ov TOOovTOL ooot svrau&ce r'jOav. — Il6r8 tqX,ovTUb oi q)iXoc rj/Ltcov ; — Ovvs Kco&sv tQXOVxat, OVTS eOnsQUQ, dXXa nqo jLiaOrifi^Qiag. — "^O xXkTTTrjQ ovt: SQ^STat a/na rfj ^/uSqcc, dXX rj hOnsqaQ, r] ngo Trjg tcj. — 2v del Ttga tQXTl- — ^^X ^IM-^^^ oi/rco nqai SQ^ofj-si^a cog vjualg. — Ti oqcj ^ — Ovdsv ov8a/uov OQCo. — Ovdtcg ovdsv oqa ovSccjlwv. — O udtXcpog f^ov ovdsv ygticpic tvXtjv tovtcov tcop STiiOToXav. 11. Render into Greek. What are you writing? — We are writing nothing but letters. — Nobody writes any thing but letters.— When does your mother write letters 1 — Either in the morning (sm&sv), or at evening. — With whom does the little girl come ? — She comes with the wise maiden. — Where were the maidens at evening? — They were in the white and beautiful porch. — Was the young man's sister there or not? — She was. — She was not. — Where was she? — She was nowhere. — She was neither here nor there. — I see the hares nowhere. — Nobody sees the peacocks any where. — ^T'\''ho comes at day-break ? — Nobody comes to the house at day-break. — This man coines into the field only in the morning. — Were you in the field yesterday or not? — I was not there yesterday, but the day before. — How many evenings? — Not so many evenings as mornings. — What sort of wine do you drink? — This wine is not so good as yours. 112 GREEK OLLENDORFF. THIETIETH LESSON. 112. amos, self. 6 avxog, the same. SING. N. avTog avTi^ avzo G. avzov avtTig avzov D. avT^ avTTi ahto^ A. avTov aVTTjV DDAL. avzo N.A. avToi avza. uvta G.D. amolv avzaiv PLDH. avzoTv N. avTOi avzai avza G. avrav avzm avzaiv D. avTOig avraig avroig A. avrovg avidg avza 113. I. avrogwith the Art. means in all cases and numbers, the same. avzog raag, rj avzTj avv-Ti, to avzo odTOVv, ra avza xava, iv ToTg avzoTg nozt^Qioig, the same peacock, the same fig-tree, the same bone, the same baskets, in the same cups. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 113 Rem. — The Art. often coalesces with the Pronoun ; thus, TO avro T«i'7o(j'). Sing. N. avTog, avzog ij air^, avrrj G. 70V avTov, TttvTov, but T^t' avrrig D. TO) anTcj), ravzco jri avTy, lavry A. Plur. N. 01 avroi, avzoi, al avtai avzai, bin, zap avzcov &c. TO avzo, xavz6{v). TO, avTci zavzd. |E^ Distinguish carefully from Sing, avros (for 6 avzog) avzri Tavz6{v) Plur. ttvioi (for ol avroi) avtai zavza Thus, This merchant. The same merchant. This tongue, The same tongue, These roses. The same roses, the same, the same. this. these. ovzog sfinoQog, avzog or avzog Sjinoqog, avzri 71 ylaaaa. tj avzTj, or avzri ylioaau. zavza za QoSa. za avza, or zavza ooda. 114. II. av tog without the Art. (a) In the Nom. always means self, and applies to either person ; as, I myself run. you yourselves write. these men themselves, these very men write, the father himself, the man himself; the very man. this thing itsell] this very thing. avzog ZQijim, v/ietg avzoi, ygaqjezs, ovzoi avtol yqdqiovffiv, avzog 6 nazriQ, b rzazrjQ avzog, avzog 6 uvdQcanog, zovzo avzo. 114 GREEK OLLENDORFF. (b) In any case when accompanied by a noun it means self; as, Qovg avTog, avios o Qovg, 7IQ0 avtav 7C0V &VQmv, m tv avTcTi 70} apmyso}, avTOv tovzov. the stream itself. before the doors themselves = before the very doors, in the dining hall itself, of this itself =of this very thing. Rem. — Observe that avzog, self, can often be rendered by ve7~y, (c) In an oblique case (any besides the Nom.) stand- ing without a Noun, it means him, her, it, them. TzarijQ avTov, i] ddtXqirj avTtig, zig svvovs iati xo^ aSsXcp^ fiov ; fyra s'vvovg avTC$ si/xi, ot innoi avicop, sycx) oQco avTovg, noTiQov r]TS h rolg itijnoig, rj ov ; 7jfiev iv avroig, the father of him^his father, the sister of her=her sister. who is well-disposed to my brother? I am well-disposed to him. the horses of them=their horses. I see them, were you in the gardens or not? we were in them. 115. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'H juula. — Avrr] rj fivla. — H avrrj ^vla. — To avvo 8i:v8qov. — Ta avra h'cvhQa. — Ti iGrcv iv ra xri^ioi -y—^EarLV iv avra ^taXij ovxf]. — Oui( tOvcv iv ra avra xrjTia ^irfkba; — Ovx kOrtv iv rovrco GREEK OLLENDOllFF. 115 rw xTjncp (.ir]ksa, dXX ip tco TvXrjGwv roii Xocpov. — AvTOQ 6 av&QcoTTog. — Avrt] t] ifJV^rj. — '-'Eotlv f] tov vtavlou ipvxh oocprj ; — Nai, r) ifv^rj avrov 60(prj EOriv. — Tig EQ^trai ; — '-'EQ^srai avrog 6 JtarrjQ. — TlvsQ avva Ovvsq/^ovtui ; — Ql dya&ol cpDMc, av- rov GvvsQxovrat. — JJots yQaqjHt 6 Tiarriq nqog TOV vlov ; — 'Eoni-QaQ TCQog avrov ygdcpsi. — Tl 8i- axtt 6 vsavlag ; — Tov xXkitrriv dtcofist.—^Hfxttg rov avrov xXsTtrtjv §icoxof^tv. — T.ig tov Xayuv Xafj./3av£c ; — OvdsiQ avrov Xa^/Sdvu. — 'H olx'ia f^ov iorcv iv ravrr] rfj xco/urj. — 'ff Sjurj olicia iv rfj avrfl tecofxri ioriv. — 'Eycj xa\ v^tlg rrjv avrrjv 6(f)aiQav ^mrofi&v. II. Render into Greek. The porch. — This porch. — The same porch. — The porch itself. — In this very porch. — These houses have the same gardens. — The golden cup. — The cup itself is not golden. — Not only this ball is golden but also the pup itself. — Both the chest is silver and the apples (that are) in it (zk Iv alirj filjlaj. — Not the ball, but a cup in- stead of it. — What do I see in the river ? — I see nothing in it. — Nobody sees any thing in it except a horse and a ball. — Not in the river itself, but in the small stream. — The cows lie in the plain and the horses are running into the same plain. — Whom do the bad pursue ?— They pursue the good themselves. — The bad always shim the good. — God himself is friendly and propitious to the good. — Who has the merchant's hat? — /have his hat. 116 GREEK OLLENDOEFF. THIETY-FIKST LESSON. 116. This day, This same day, This very day, This same heautlful day, This very man, These same things, avrjj ri rji-ieQa, i] ijftffia avrtj. avtij r/ avrtj ijiiiqa. 1] avTt] rjfifQu av7i]. auTt] tj r/fttga avzrj. avTi] tj aviTj xali] fifitga. ovTog av7og, OLvtog ovrog. zavra xa avid. 117. Ride. — The point of time at which any thing happens is put in the Dat. Duration of time is put in the Ace. ravrrj trj ii^tuQa, TavtTjv rrjv rifjitqav, 70VZ0V TOV IQOVOV, on this day. on the same morning, during this day. during this time. fievm, Eig, ei, I remain, stay. noaov 1Q0V0V fisvofisv; Toaavrag tj/AtQug jxsvovaiv, IxaxQov ^(iriiov /ttveTS, during how much time^how long do we stay? they stay so many days, you stay (during) a long time. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 117 allog, 1], 0, another (like airos). sieQOs, d, ov, another of tivo. Another hat, The other hat, The rest of the hat, Other hats, The other, i. e. the rest of the hats, alio? mXog. 6 srsQOi mlog. J) aX7.og mXog. alio I mXoi. 01 aXloi m).oi. Thus, Another, a).log {keQog). The other, 6 sreQog. The rest of, (Sing.) 6 allog. Others, alXoi The others, the rest, oi allot. 118. txEirog, ri, o, that person, that, he (like aviog). tMivr) ?/ oixta, ri o'lxla iycslfTj sxsivov 70V avrov j^qovov, ixslvr) avrri rfi ianeQa, oil ovTog, al)J ixsTvog, that house. on that day. during that same time, on that very evening, not this man, but that. Tig alXog ; ovtog b hcQog, ovSeig alXog, aXXog Tig, 11 uXXo ; aXXo Ti, what other person? who else? tliis other person, no other person, nobody else, some other person, somebody else, any one else, what else ? something else. 118 GREEK OLLENDOllPF. ovSh aU.o, Tol'TO to STCQOV, tavra ToXka {la alia) Ovdsv ttXXo TOIOVTOV ovSev alio twv toiovraiv rig allri ^l^log ; av77] ri 8T iga ^i^Xog, ai alXai ^i^Xoi ixetrai, nothing else, this other thing, these other things. no other such thing. what other book? this other hook, those other books. 119. Exercises. Retider into English. Uov rjg spfiivr] rf, ^fis^a; — 'Hv sv rji Gtocc rfi nXrjoiov rfjg TtvXrig. — TigaXXog riv ixtZ sv ra aura XQOvcp ; — Ovdilg allog. — OvBtig ixil rjv 6vv i/j-ol tiXj^v tov q)iXov juov. — 'Eycj xal 6 ddtX^og fiov fiovoc sxsl rjfj,tv. — UoTSQOv aXXog rig fz'tvi-t uvvov oiiv 6oi, 7] ov ; — Ovdtlg aXXog. — Ti 'yquq)ov6iv ol Tt^vlrac ; — "ETtidroXag yqaq)ov6cv. — Ti aXXo yqacpovOLV ; — Ovdsv aXXo. — '^Hf^sig ovdsv yQu^o- fj.tv TiXrjv STtcOroXwv. — -AXXrj /Si^Xog. — "^H ersga /jifiXog. — Ovx avvrj fj (SijSXog, aXX fj srsqu. — Tiva ^Xalvav %Sfj,nsL 6 ifxnoqog ; — Ov rriv sv rfj ^1^^ TiSjUTTSi, dXX aXXi]v. — Ov raVTiqv s^si, ccXXa rrjv STSqav. — 01 iTTTtoc ovx sv tavraig ralg xco^aig tl- olv, dXX sv TaTg dXXaig. — Uoaag rjjusqag f^svsrs sv rfj aw/Ui^ ravTTj ; — Ov roOavrag fisvoftsv rjfisqag boag ol dXXoL. — 01 dXXoL sxslvoi fiaxqbv y^qovo^ fxsvovGtv sjii TOV Xo(pov. — ^E>€tivac ccl dXXai feafiac ovy ovvco xaXai sloiv ag avrat. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 119 Mender into Greek. This day. — On this day. — On this same day. — On that very day. — Another day. — During these other days. The rest of the day.— The other days. — The rest of the village. — What village? — This village. — In that same village. — Into this other village. — We send into another plain.— What other plain 1 — No other. — Nothing else. — This other village is beautiful. — This fig-tree. — What fig-tree ? — This other fig-tree. — What other fig-tree 1 — What does the young man wjite ? — He writes letters to me. — What else does he write? — Nothing else. — Who else writes ? — Nobody else writes. — Either this finger or the other. — Not the same tongue but another. — How long (noaov xQovor) do you remain on this high hill ?— We remain a long time.— We stay during so many days. THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. Possessive Pronouns. 120. si^og, ri. Of, (from S|«oi;) mi/, mine. aog, c-q, aov, ( " aov) yOur, yours =thy, thine. ^fihsQog, «, ov, ( " rjiiwv) our, ours. vftbTSQog, a. Of, ( " vjjimv) your, yours. aqsiiTSQog, a, ov, ( " acfug) their, theirs (rare). 120 GREEK OLLENDORFF. My friend, Not my friend, but yours, Our village, Both your village, and ours, qn'Xog fiov. fVoi' (fiXog. 6 qi'loi 6 (fiog. oix 6 ifiog epilog, alX o Oog. Tj -AWfiri rifj-cov, fjfimy rj xaifirj, ri ij[A.srsQa y.oii^r], rj xcofijj ij ijfis- TJ IS vf^sTtQU xmiiTj, xai 7] rjjit- Rem. — rj/jojv and vfiojy differ less from ri/ihiQog and v/ihe- Qog, than jUoC and uov from ifiog and aog. Yet in cases of marked emphasis i.^tTiqag and ifihcgog are preferred. Are these baskets ours? Are these our baskets? They are not ours, but our friends', Are not your friends in the vil- lage ? Our friends are not there, but yours. Whose ball do you throw ? I throw ours, I throw the young man's, I throw not mine, but his, £(jTi ravza ru xuva ijuerega ; sort TKvza ijfiizSQa v.ava ; ovx rjiihsqa iaiiv, alXci tihv (piXav ijnav. ov>i eiaiv Ev rg kcOjUJ oi (pi).ni. vfimv ; ovy^ 01 TjfisziQOi cpi'loi sxei siotr, aXX 01 vfihsQOi. irjv rirog acptugar Qinrsig ; ri]V rjfiETtQav Qlnrm. Tijv Tov rsariov QinTco. oh triv iftrjv Qirzim, aJ.Xa rrjv SHEIVOV. GK.EEK OLLENDORFF. lai 121. Tovtov and ixeivov, rovimv and ixsivmv follow the rule given for the position of the Gen. in Less. XIX. 70, 71. The house of this man, Not this man's house, but that man's, Not their cloaks, but ours, Not only that man's cloak, but this man's. Not in our chest, but in his. TOVtOV. oima. ^ r] oiaia Tovti I rovTOv rj olx 0V1 rj TOVTOV ohla, aXI^ ^ iy.sivov. ovx at ixsivmv ^XaTvai, oXIl a'l ■rjjJ.STSQai. ov /jiovov ^ ixslvov ^Xaiva, aX}^ i] TOVTOV. ovx iv TTj rjf^STSQa x^^Vt <*^^' sV T^ ixsifov. 122. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O JtTlos fiov ; — JJoTSQOv bqa rov sfiov ntXov, ?] Tov GOV ; — Tdv rivog nlXov oga ; — Ovts rbv E/j.bv 6qc5j ovte tov tov sfinoQov. — TIq oqcc tov tovtov nlXov ; — OvStlg oga ovts tov tovtov, ovts tov TOV It&qov. — Tacog. — 'O i^bg Tuag. — Ovx b i/xbg Tuwg, ovds 6 TOV nloveiov iqyuTOV. — Tlvog sStiv 6 xalbg Tuag; — Ovts rjfj-STSQog sGtcv, ovts vfiSTS- Qog, alia tov iaTQOv. — JJotsqov sxsig Tb tov s[a.%6- Qov XQ't^Oovv nOTYiQLOV, 7] Tb sfzov ; — Ovts to gov noTTjQcov s^co, ovts rb sxsivov, alia to inc Trjg 6 122 GREEK OLLENDOKFF. aQyvQccg TqaTis^rjQ. — Eiolv al xaXal xoqai sv roiq arinocc. ri^av; — Ovx sv roTc, 7if,ikT£Q0iQ tcri^ocq sleiv, akX n sv Tolg stu tco Tiorajua, r] sv rolq. tov sfxov dSslcpov. — JJooat ^i,8XoL dalv sv rfj xsiql Tovvov. — Ov roGavxai sv rf] tovtov X^'-Qh oOai iv TTJ sxsivov. — UoTtQa TOV 8c§aOxdXov sioiv al ^ijSXoi, avTUL, T] TOV fia&r]TOV ; — Ov tov fiadr)- Tov sioiv, dXXd tov 8idaoxaXov. II. Render into Greek. Where lies your silver ? — Our silver lies on the table. — The silver lies not on our table, but yours. — Not on your table, nor on the rich merchant's. — How much gold is there in our chest ?■ — Not so much in our chest as in yours. — The cup of this man. — That man's cup, not this man's. — There is not so much wine in that man's cup as in mine. — Who of us (rtV rmav) drinks wine 1 — Nobody drinks it. — What sort of wine does this mer- chant drink? — He drinks such as he has. — Does the thief take the gold? — He takes it. — Whose gold does he take ? — He takes either the young man's or the laborer's. — He either takes that man's gold, or. this man's, — The thieves take neither our purple garments, nor yours.— The morning. — On the same evening. — The noon is not so beautiful as the morning. — Before the morning. — In- stead of us. GREEK OLLENDOUFF. 123 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 123. Reflexive Pronouns. i[iavTov, of myself, (from f/ioi, of me, and aizov, self). Sing. Plur. G. fjiavTov, Ti]q, of myself, ri/Mwv avjwv, of ourselves. D. E/iavTia, fi, to, for myself, rifur aiirol;, alg, to, for ourselves. A. i^avTov, TjV, myself, rjfiug avTovg, ag, ourselves. asavTov (aavtov), of yourself . G. asavxov,fig, of yourself, &,c. vfiSiv avx&v, of yourselves Sec. D. atavro), fi, v/mv aiiTolg, atg, A. asavTov, »)V, vfiug avrovg, ag. iavTov [avTov), of himself. G. eavTOv, ijg, of himself, eavToJi' (^aviwv) of themselves. D. EKUTfti, »/, saviolg, , alg (^ainotg, atg). A. ittvjov, riV, 6, eavTovg, ug, a (^avrovg &c.) In^' Distinguish carefully between aiiTov, ofhim,ofself,a.ni,avtoii (= eoivTov) of himself (reHexive) avT7ig, of her, of self, " avTijg ( = e«t;TJj;) of herself, ttviovg, them, selves, " avzovg(^^soivTovg) themselves. Thus, fj i\)Vfrj avToii, \ his soul (the soul of him). Tj avtoii ipvxri, ) his own soul (the of himself V V'^XI V "^^oi) S soul). ogm avzov, I see him. OQK avzov or savior, he sees himself. 124 GREEK OLLE.N'DORFF. OgCO flXaVTOV, Jig savTOv OQa, ovdeii; itjv savrov ipv^iji' OQ(i, ip taii^ rifisTsqaii avtwv oi- y.iatg, I see myself, who sees himself? nobody sees his own soul. in our own houses. I see both you and myself, You have both your own cloak and mine, You have both your own and his, The merchant has neither his own nor mine, OQO) Kou as YMl SjXavTOV. s'/^eig Ttiv TS aeavTov y^Xatvav, xai triv ifjLriv. rriv 7S asavtov iiug, Koi 7ijv ixeivov. 6 eiiTzoQog ovte ttiv avrov s'lei, OVTS TIjV i[l1]V. |El= Distinguish carefully the following uses ofhis. (^a) The merchant has his cloak, (6) / have his cloak, (c) I have not his cloak, but yours, (cZ) He has not 7iis=his own, cloak, but his friend's. BfinoQog tijV '^Xaivav s^si. iyo) f/co jrjv ^laivav avrov. ov TTjv ixsifov ylaTvav £^o), alia TTiv ai]v. ov Tr/v savTov e^si ^^aivav, alia, Tijv toil (fiXov. (a) His unemphatic and referring to the immediately pre- ceding subject, and therefore expressed only by the Art. (6) His unemphatic, but not referring to the subject of the preceding verb, and expressed therefore by the unemphatic uvtov, of him. (c) His, emphatic and contrasted, — ixuvov, or rovxov. (d) A loose and inaccurate use of his for his own — iavxov. (JEEEK OLLENDOItFF. 125 ^fvoe, ov, 6 uyyuXoii, ov, §aivw, sig, ei, jSafif'^M, ei.g, st, Isym, sig, ei, &C. 2.tym Tivi, Xsyo) TZQog riva, rivi liysig ; ngog Tiva Isysig ; rlva oSov ^aivsig ; tavzi]v tiqv odor ^aSti^m, iv ToTg aygoig ^adiXo/jiev, the stranger, the messenger. Iwalk, go. I speak, say. I speak to some one. I speak to or before some one. to whom do you speak? what road do you go 1 I walk this road, we walk in the fields. 124. nsQi, about, around. A Preposition. nsQi tov, 7(j), 7oV, (Governs Gen. Dat. Ace.) nsQi TOV, about the, concerning the. 7.iy(o nsQi tovtcov, nsQi aov Xeyojisv, neql rlqg aSslcfrig yqaqiou, I speak concerning these things, we speak about, concerning you. I write about my sister. ano 70V, fx lov. ev Tw, tig TOV, avrt tov, ngo tov, ini. tov, t,ni. rov, ini TO), nQog tov, avv To;i, TiSQi tov, from the, out from the. in the. into the. instead of for the ; before the. 071 tlie ; on to the. at or hy the ; to the. with the ; concerning the. 126 GREEK OLLEXDOUFF. Render, I come from the hill, out of the plain. The ball lies in the chest, or falls into the fomitain. The messenger comes instead of the stranger. The cows lie before the gate. The young men sit on the roof or throw the ball on to it. The girl plays by the river, or near the tree. We send these letters to the strangers. Nobody comes with me except my brother. We say or write these things [ravza) concerning ourselves. 125. Exercises. I. Render into Ens'lish. Akya Tt^gl ifiavvov. — '0 narrjQ ravra ov %tq\ r/ficov Xsytc, dXXa tuqI avvoii. — Ti iieqt 6sauvou XsysiQ ; — OvSiv dya&ov Tttql if^aVTOv Xsya. — Ov niQl oov Xsysc 6 dyysXog, dXXd itsql rjf.i6}V. — Tl- Vis ravra mql havrav Xsyouoiv ; — Ovrot, ol ^hvol ravva rs xul ccXXa voiavva TvtQl havroiv Xsyov- Oiv. — JJqoq rlva yqacpu 6 Tiarrjg; — ITQog rov vtov yqacpat. — Ov ngo; rov iavrov vlbv ygacptc, dXXa TtQOQ TOJ' i/uov. — TivL ravva XbysL o dyytXog ; — ^H sfj.01, rj aol Xbytt ravva. — O ^svog ravra Tigog GKEEK OLLEiNDOlil'F. 127 TOi' ayytXov Xtytc. — 'Hjuiig del to. uvtcc (the same things) Tttgl tcov ca/rdjv Xtyouav. — Tavra 'k'tyoj dvv\ sxtivav. — Tivog iorlv avri] ^ ^uttrr]- qia; — -Ean rov dyysXov. — '0 dyy&Xog t)(ti rrjv ejur/v paxTYiqiuv cevr} rrjg savrov. — ^0 §£vog e^fi rrjv kcwrov /Xulvav cevrl Ttjg rov dyysXov. — '0 nuxog huvvov cptvytc. — 01 xaxol ov ^ovov rovg dyai}ovg dlXd aau havvovg iphvyovGiv. II. Render into Greek, Of myself. — My own hat (the of -my self hat). — Not my hat, but yours. — I have not your hat, but my own. — Whence comes the stranger? — He comes from his (the) house. — He comes from his own house. — We come not from our house but from his. — To whom does the mes- senger speak 1 — He speaks to me. — He speaks to himself. — These messengers speak to themselves. — We write letters to ourselves. — Nobody writes to the stranger ex- cept me. — The stranger writes instead of me. — I speak concerning these things. — Who else speaks concerning the same things? — Nobody else. — The young man writes concerning his sister. — What do the good pur- sue ? — They pursue wisdom. — The bad not only shun wisdom, but pursue evil. — They pursue evil instead of good. — Evil comes before good. — Whither do you walk ? —We walk into the fields. 128 GREEK OLLENDOIIFF. THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. 126. [itydg, great, large. (Irreg. in the Sing.) SINQ. N. G. D. fiiyiig lisyaXov fisydXcp fisyaXtj lAsy&Xrig HeydXij [isya fieyaXov /A-sydXcp A. V. lityav fisya fisydXijv fiBydXtj DDAL liiya (liya N.A.V. G. D. fisydXm /xsyaXoiv HsydXa (isydXaiv PLUE. HsydXo) fiiydXoiv N. G. D. A. V. [leydXoi fisjdXav fA-sydXoig [isydXovg (itydXoi fiiydXai ftsydXwv ftsydXttig fieyaXag fisydXai fifydXii l^eydXmv l^eydXoig fieydXa fisydXa A large table, Great wisdom, Something great, I have nothing great, These great things. These things are both beauti- ful and great. These evils are so great. fieydXi] rgdTzs^a. IxsydXri aoqiia. fisyd XI. ovSev t^fw fitya. zavza. TO. n^ydla. lavta naXd xi iati y.at jis- ydXa. tavza id xay.d xrjXiHavTa. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 129 127. all-^lmv, of each other, of one another. Dual G. D. aXl^Xoiv, aiv, oiv, A. ai^ij^w, 6, CO, Plur. G. aklrjlmv, wv, av. D. allriXoig, aig, oig. A. ai.X^XovL;, ag, a. 128. noXka-Mg, ivtots, ^IdnToo, sig, rjiico, sig &c. fi8r], oiinrn. many times, qfle7i, frequently. sometimes. 1 hurt, harm, injure. I am come, have come. (at the time)^ already, immediately. not yet. t-, ^ ' ' > visible, manifest, clear. Otjlog, 1], or, ) ■' ' ravTK ovTzm qiavsQU sanr, 6 ayyslog ^drj tjxii, noXXaxig ^fxoig avrovg ^).dn- ZOIMV, ol xaxoi dsi dlXijXovg ^Idn- Tovaiv, these things are not yet mani- fest. the messenger has already- come. we frequently harm ourselves. the wicked always harm each other. ri Itysig, w vEavia,; tig Si, €0 ^ivs; what do you say, young man ? who are you, stranger? Rem. — In Greek prose w is commonly employed in re- spectful address. 130 greek ollendorff. 129. Exercises. I. Render into English. Msyag 'innoq. — "O iTtnog, f^syaq sGrlv. — 'Hfiiig iv ^sydXcp ntSla sOf-isv. — Tovro to dsv^QOV jusya TS xctl viprjXov sGtlv. — Tiig nigl tovtcov 'kkym; — Ov ntql TOVTCov, dXXcc ttsqI dXX>]Xav Xsyo^uv. — 01 xaxol dil dXXr/Xovg dicoxovOcv. — "O xanoQ rrjv haVToii xpv;(r]v (jXdnTtt. — UoXkancq, ol xaxo\ savTOvg /SXajiTOVCcv. — Ov fiovov aXXovQ ^Xan- TOVOcv ol ddixoL, dXka stcd eavrovg. — Ti ^mrst 6 nalg ; — O nalg evlors ocpaiQuv qiTTTSi. — Ovx r]§r] rjxsi, 6 dyytXog ; — Nal, rj§r] rj^esL — OvTia rixsi 6 ^fzsTSQog ayytXog ; — Tavva ovnco (pavsga iorcv. — UoTS EQ^ovTccc ol dyytXoi ; — Uqo ^/j-SQug eg- Xovrac. — ^'O ^svog tQ^trai TtQog fjfxdg d^a rrj rj/usqcc. II. Render into Greek. We speak concerning one another. — I do not speak concerning you, nor you concerning me. — This (man) always speaks about (concerning) the same things {nsgl rav avtmv). — Whom do the wicked flee? — They flee both each other and themselves. — They harm their own souls. — The good harm neither themselves, nor others. — Who is great 1 — God alone is great. — God alone is both great and high. — A large tree. — I see a great tree on the hill. — The messenger is already coming. — These things GREEK OLLENDORPP. 131 are not yet evident. — God is not manifest to men ((fccvs- Qog roTi cifOQmnoig). — The wise are always happy. — This teacher is sometimes wise. — The maiden frequently writes letters to her (the) brother. — Nobody sees his own soul. — Nobody sees God except the good (man). — God alone sees the soul. — Is the soul immortal or not ? — The soul is immortal. THIKTY-FIFTH LESSON. 130. TioXvg, much. Plur. many. SING. N. 570^^? Tiollri nolv G. nollov nollijg nollov D. nolla;i nollrj noll^ A. nolvv nollriv nolv V. TioXv nollri DUAL. nolv N. A. V. TZoXXoj noll& nollw G.D. TzoXXoiv nollalv PLDR. nolloiv N. nolloi nollai nolla G. Tiollmv tzoUdSv nollwv D. noXloTg noXlaig nolloTg A. nollovg nollag nolla V. nolloi nollai Ttolla 132 GREEK OLLEiMDUllFF. nolvg XQOvoe, noXXoi, noXka, ov toaavta — oaa ovx ovTco TzoXld — oaa izoXla xal xaXu, (a) noXXa xcu vipyjXa SevBga, much time, a long time, in much time, in a long time, many persons, many things. not so many things — as. many beautiful things, many high trees. (o) Rem. — JTO^iJs connected with another Adj . generally takes xai,and; as, many golden baskets, noXXa xal^gvaSi xa- va. But not with uXXog, jowviog &c. as, TOtavta TtolXa, uXXoi noXXoi, aXXa. noXXa,, alXa roiavza noXXd, nolXoi Tovrcav, noXXa, TovTODV, many such things, many others, many other things, many other such things, many of these persons, many of these things. ovSsig finSiv, ovder joiovror, OvdsV tWV TOIOVTCOP, ovdsv tovtcav, noXXoi rmv iftnoQmv, rig Tcov ifinoqiav ; no one of us. no such thing. nothing or none of such things. nothing or none of these things, many of the merchants, who of the merchants? 01 aw ^fuv, at vvv, 01 ndXai, those with us. those of the present time. they of old, the men of old. GIIEEK OLLENDORFF. 133 131. dltyne, tj, ov, a little, little, oltyot, Plur. a few, few. oh'yog, little in quantity, opposed to noli?, much. /jJxQog, little in size, " fieyag, large, great. So Plur. oliyoi, few, " nolloi, many. liinQol, small, " [isydXoi; large. fityag »/ ^ixQog yi/jnog, noXvg ^ bXiyog otvog, noXXoi ij oliyoi av&Qconoi, oXiyog ygoi/og, fiixQog ^Qovog, bliyov ^Qovov fisvei, hliyag ruitQag fxovag fihsi, ollyov zi, oliyoi rivsg, ovx ollyoi, 01. Tiolloi, 01 oliyoi; a large or small garden, much or little wine, many or few men. a little time. he stays (during) a little time, he stays only-a few days. some little. some few. not a few=many. the many. the few. 132. Exercises. I. Re7ider into English. UoXvg xQVGog. — Ov roaovTog ;/^va6g oaog aQyvQog. — Movog oXlyog aQyvqog. — -'O ev rf/ x^^^ aqyvqog %o%vg s6riv. — JJoXXa teal xaXa dqyvqd TiOTTjqca. — sv ra if^a norriqia p^qvoog oXlyog sGtiv. — IIoTsqov t^st 6 ^svog noXi/v ^qvGov, rj oXiyov ; — Movov oXiyov e^si. — JJoXXal fjf^Eqai. — Uoaag fifisqag /uevsc 6 (piXog oov ; — Ov iioXXdg rjfi.Eqag. — "^O sfxog cpiXog ov TOOavvag ^/asqag f^svsi^ 134 GREEK OLLE.\UOi!PP. oGaQ 6 Gog. — Ovrog roiavra ttoXXu Xsyat. — Ov juovov ravra, aWa xctl ■jioXXu rOLUVva aXXa XsyovOiv. — Uoaov ;(q6vov yqacpki 6 narrjQ rjfiav ; — Ov Tiolvv ji^QOvov. — IIoXXol Tcov dyysXcov ra TOiavva Xsyovai ■jTsqI e^ov. — 01 xaxol ovx oXiyot tlolv. — 01 dya&ol ov tooovtoI sIolv o6oi ol xaxoL ■■ —JLv Tovva TCp TCidlcp tlol noXXcu xat xuXal jxriXsai, teal ovxcd. — 01 Gvv f]fA.lv iloc noXXoi. — 01 Ovv TOVTOiQ ov TOOovToi tloiv 0001 ol ovv exsivoig. — 01 ■TiaXac dv&qcoTzoL ovx fjOav ovtco %oXXdi ovda ovTco 6o(po\ dg ol vvv. II. Render into Greek. The few. — Only the few are wise. — The many are not wise. — The many are neither wise, nor good, nor happy. — Not a few came with us. — They stay a long time. — These (men) stay many days. — They either come before morning or in the evening. — In this time they flee. — There is a little wine in the cup. — There are a few cups on the table. — There are not so many cups as balls. — Many of the merchants are rich. — None of the work- men either (ovts) says or {ovzs) writes these things con- cerning me. — The brother writes many such things con- cerning us to his sister. — There is a little gold either on, or in the silver chest. — Gold instead of silver. — A white hat instead of a purple cloak. — The cows either lie be- fore the gate, or run on to the hill, or into the pasture. — Not a few cows. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 135 THIETY-SIXTH LESSON. 133. anovoo, s(ff, &c. I hear. evQicTxm, sig, I find. iaQim, sis, 6 aqtog, ov, 6 nvQog, ov, 6 aiTog, ov. 7] qimviq, jjg, 7] §QOVTTi, rig. I eat. the bread, bread, Plur. loaves. the wheat, xoheat. corn, grain, food. the voice. the thunder. 1] dazQajirj, jjg, the lightning What do you eat 1 ri la&iug ; I eat bread, UQTOV ia&im. I send these loaves, What do you hear? STfjUWM TOVg UQTOVg TOVTOVg ri axovetg ; I hear a voice, qjcavtjv axovoj. Whom do we hear ? tivog aKovofisv ; You hear the messenger, rot) ayytXov axovsrs. They hear this man, Tovrov ay.ovovaiv. They hear these things, d-^ovovai ravza. 134. Rule. — d>tovm tisually governs the Ace. of the sound, or thing heard, and the Gen. of the source whence the sound proceeds ; thus, CLKOVOi TTjV ^QOVZIJV, axovco zov vsariov. I hear the thunder. I hear {from) the young man {the source). 136 GREEK OLLENDORFF. a/AqiorsQos, a, ov, both, snaajos, 1], ov, each, each one. Ufiqiorsfja zavta xaXd iaziv, 01 kfinoQoi eiaiv ajxqioreQOi nXovaioi, sxdnri] TjfifQa, J s>idaTt] fj tjfisQa, > each day, ij I'jfifQa sy.d(Ti]j, ) both these things are beautiful, the raerchanis are both rich. Tj xmQci, as, the region, country, tj ylj, the earth, land, •p], earth, is used only in the Sing. G. fiii, D. -^ri, A. -^riv, V. yi]. 135. avd, up, back, over. A Preposition. ava Tov, (Governs only the Ace.) ttva tor Qovv, up the stream. dva rijv Xfaqav, over= throughout the country. dva, rriv yljv, throughout the earth, the land. From the, ano rov. Out of the, £'A rov. Instead of, for, the. avTi rov. Before the, 7TQ0 rov. In the. iv TO). With the, avv i5). On the, im Tov. At, by the, im TQ). On to the, inl rov. Into the, sii rov. To the. iTQog rov. Concerning the. nsgl rov. Throughout the, dva rov. GREEK OLLENDOUFF. 137 Render, ano trii ymgag, ix imv laqmv. aoTQuntj ai/Ti. ^QOvirig. 7] TiQo irfi (JToag, rj iv r-q XI^V- «d&7]fiai uhr rg ddeXqi'ij inl rf; xQ'^t'TS- nai^ovsiv inl xav natgrnv aal rQf'yovmv iui rovg Xoipovs. 7a jxTjla. elg lov qovv nintsi. nefinofiev ngog rov di8day.aXov. ygdicfa} tzqos gs neQi jovtcov. rrjv ^QOVTtjv dva zrjv ycogav dnovovaiv. 01 Innoi TQSj^ovaiv dvot, lo nediov. 136. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tl dfiovsig ; — 'T-'covtjv dttova. — Trjv rivog ; — Trjv TOV ddsXcpov. — Hongov dxovco ttjv ^qovttjv, J] TTjv dovQaTtrjv oqco ; — Trjv /jQOvvriv dytovsig. — ^i ^Qovvrj £6rc cpcovrj rov ■O'tov. — 01 dvd rriv -yrjv rrjv ^qovTr]v dxovovocv. — 'Avu Tuvvrjv rrjv }^aqav raurag rag cpavdg dxovov6i-v. — TL avQiaxscg ; — Evqioxa noXvv dqrov iv rfj ^^/Iw. — '0 naig tvqio- xtc TvoXvv xal dyad-ov oItov ml Trjg Tqant^rjg. — '// Ttalg tt/qiOxsi ts xal eoSitt aqrov. — Oiivoi ol oocpol OhTE dqrov ioi^lovOiv, ovr& olvov jtivovOlv. 138 GREEK OLLENDOE.FP. — H/Lit'iQ dfx.cfidvtQOc ocQTOv iGi)tofj,tv. — Oga TvoXvv XQvooiiv nvqov sv ra mdla. — -E^ccOrog rap vta- vuov noXiiv TivQOi' sv ra xava e^m. — H xoqt] ooiOViL rriv r^g ^qovttjq cpcovrjv >eul tqs;(£C. — IIoi T()[-;(ti ; — EiQ TOV xrjTcov. — Etg tov tIvoq Hfjnov ; — H tig TOV eavv)); xfjTtov tqsx^'-} ^1 ^^i ^'^^ ^oy s/.i- noQOV. — H dOTQanr] cpavtQcc sGrtv. — '0 dgroQ iorlv dyadoQ. — Tivog df^ovsvt- ; — Aitovofxiiv tov oocpou diduOsidXov. — I'taviag tov dtdaOfeaXov dxovni. ■ — 01 fxa-diqTu\ rrjv tov btbaOxdXov cpcovrp' dxov- ovotv. II. Render bito Greek. What does the boy hear? — He hears a voice. — What voice does he hear ? — He hears his teacher's. — What else does he hear ? — He hears nothing else except the thun- der. — Who hears the stranger? — Nobody except me hears him. — Throughout the earth we hear the voice of God. — What does the young man find? — He finds hares. — He finds and catches peacocks instead of hares. — Much and beautiful wheat. — This wheat is not so good as mine. — Mine is not so good as my brother's. — What do I see? — I see the lightning. — Nobody sees any thing except the lightning. — The young men eat much corn. — They both eat bread and drink wine. — Wine harms the mind of the young man. — Young man, wine harms the soul. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 139 THIETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 137. Verbs compounded luith Prepositions. anon^fina, I send away, send hack. ixTisunKt, I send out. slinijinco, I send in. avjj.nif.inoi, I send along with. ansQXOi^ai, I come, go away, depart. iltQxonai, I go out, go forth. siaeQxoixai, I come or go in, I enter. avvsQxoi^i^h I come along with, come together, ara^airm, I go up, ascend. Observe, avfinifinai for avvnifinia (ctw and nifntia), unigxofiai from ano (kjt) and t§%oi.iai. anomnnm as ano rrjg oixiag, sxTif'i^nco Tov S.yyslov iy. Tijs KcafiTjg, 01 arOgconoi avvsQ^ovrai, ijfieis Tcp vsaria avvsQx6jA.s.&u, sis 7j;j' nhlav uaiQXovzai, ava^alvco em. top Aogr'"', avtt^airti ini top mnov. I send you away from the house. I send forth the messenger out of the village, the men come together, we come along with the young man. they enter into the house. I ascend (on to) the hill, he mounts his horse. 140 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 138. racoff ; how ? 7 sv, well. xalmi; beautifully, excellently xaxag, badly. dixaicog, justly. ov Kaxmg, not badly = well. ncos ygaqjSig ; iv yQuqico, ncog Tavza sj(2j ; ravia ev s]^si, ra tfia ovx ev s^ei, y.aXwg Xt'yeig, raiita sv Xeysig, how do you write ? I write well. in what condition are these things? (how do these things have themselves?) these things are in good condi- tion. my affairs are not prosperous. you speak excellently. you say these things well. 139. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O TiarrjQ rbv viaviav djj;on'siA.ntL. — '0 SibaO- pca'koQ, TOV xaxov vtavlav sk r^g oipfiag exTtsjunsi, — UsfXTiovGiv ayyiXov xal Gv/nns/xTiovOc top Xtv- }{0v innov. — JJovs tQ^ovrcci, ot ^svoc; — "Ea&tv tQXOvrac xat sGTtSQag dTisQ^ovvac. — Al xoqui af.ia rfj r)fi.£Qu djiSQ^ovraL. — ddtXcpog /uov {:las()/iTai tig TavTr]v rrjv }(aXrjv oixiav. — ^vv tivl alOEQ^t- TUL ; — ^iiv rfj sfifj d8a?icpfj f(ai %oXkalg aXkutg xoouLg. — Tig dva/3aiv£i stu tovtov tov Ititcov j — 'O vtaviag S'ji avrov dva^aivtt. — 01 vtaviai Ovv Totg iTtTtoig £7tl Toi/g Xocpovg dva^aivovotv. — Uwg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 141 £7ti6roXag yQacpovGiv ; — 'Evlors xaXcog yqacpovGiv. — /lixaicog XsytcQ.—^O iavQOQ raiira ov dcaalag Xsysi. — Ta ef.ia xaxaq t^tc. — Ta £/j.a ovx ovtco xaxag s^tc cog ra tov dyysXov. — Tavra tv t;(£i. II. Render into Greek. Whom do you send away 1 — I send away my son. — The teacher sends away his scholar. — Not his own scholar but mine. — We send this horse out of the pas- ture. — My father and mother enter into the village. — Both I and you mount the horse. — Who else mounts the horse 1 — Nobody else. — Nobody except the young man. — The young men depart before evening.— The horses come together into the plain at dawn. — Early in the morning. — A long day. — A beautiful evening. — How are these things? — They are well {sv sx£i). — The maiden writes beautifully. — The bad (man) speaks badly. — The good (man) speaks well. — -The just (man) always speaks justly. THIRTY-BiaHTH LESSON. 140. Greek Verbs. Greek Verbs have three Voices, Active, Passive, and Middle ; six Modes, Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive, and Participle ; six Tenses, Pres- 142 GREEK OLLENDORFF. ent and Imperfect, Perfect and Pluperfect, Future and Aorist ; three Numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural ; and three Persons, First, Second, and Third. Rem. — A few verbs have in the Passive a seventh tense, viz. a Perfect Future. 141. The Imperf. Ind. Act. Ends in ov with the augment (s) prefixed. yQaqi-a, I write, am writing, 'i-yqaqi-ov, I was writing, used to write. SING. 1. 2. 3. syQacpov, eyfjacpsg, syQa(fs{r), / was writing, used to write, you were writing, used to write, he, she was writing, &c. DUAL 2. 3. iygdcpsTov, iyQaq}hi]v, you two were writing, they two were writing. PLUR. 1. 2. 3. iygdcfOfisv, syQaqjets, syqacpov, we were writing, you were writing, they were writing. So from any Act. Pres. in ro, commencing with a Con- sonant, form the Imperf. in e—ov ; as, ^Xdnzm i-^Xanr-ov, iQSXca srQS)[OV, ^adi^co t^ddt^ov, ^airm s^aivop, / was hurting, used to hurt. I was running, used to run. was walking, going^ &c. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 143 nmtd) ntfunta (psvyto QlTfZ CO eninjov, srzsfinor, 'inai^ov, kqisvyov, iomntov, was falling, &c. XBas sending, was playing, was pursuing, was fleeing, was throwing. Rem. — Observe initial 9, after the augment,is doubled, and when doubled, the first q has the smooth breathing, the second the rough. oTs, {or, od') when (Relative). UQzt, agiicog, just now. noTs 'ilsysg ; UQTiatg sXeyov, sXsyov ors ifisTs tygdcpsrs, 1&SS t^dSit,ov iv xoTg oLyQOig. inai^ofiev sansQag, sTQi^ofiev Trjv rifxeqav. when were you speaking ? I was speaking just now. I was speaking when you were writing. I was walking yesterday in the fields, we were playing at evening, we were running during the day. 142. The Augment. 1. Syllabic Augment. — This is « prefixed unchang- ed to all past tenses of verbs beginning with a conso- nant. It is so called becatise it adds a syllable. 144 GREEIi- OLLENDORFF. 2. Temporal Augment. — When the verb begins with a vowel, the s iinites with this initial vowel, and if short, lengthens it, so that a and 6, become ij. t " V " T and V. " 03. ai " 01 " i[i '■ (p, i. e. lengthening the a and o, and writing under, or subscribing the i (called I suhscriff). KKovto, Imperf. rjHovov, I was hearing, used to hear, iadtco, " 7]evyw, " un-sq>svyoy, was fleeing away, escaping. tK-Qlmca, " e^-iQ^imov, I was throwing out, or forth GREEK OLLENDORFF. 147 On that day, On the same evening. During those times, During that same morning. ■zri avrrj saTiigcc. Tovs iqovovg (Kslvovg. iHStV'l]V ITjV aVTTJV i'w. (jvXh'yo) {avv, Xiym) I lay together, I collect. Imperf. avv-ilsyov, ivas collecting, used to collect. ^i^Xovg hi avlXiym, ravTci ovasri Gvllsyco, I am still collecting hooks, these things I no longer collect, no longer. Note. — li'yo) means originally not speak, but lay ; hence avXh'ym, lay together, collect. Note also avX-liya for 6vv-Xiyca, for euphony. r\ aoqita, ui,; wisdom. ri aQEtri, ijg, (manly excellence) virtue. ■&avjjidi^(o, Eig, I xoonder at, admire. ■&avfid^a) as, ^avfid^co Tt]v aq&rriv aov. I I wonder at you, I admire you. j I admire your virtue. 146. Generally the Predicate omits the Art. r; aQSrfj aoq)ia saziv, ri aocpta uQSTrj tazir, vsitriag ydsTZtrjg saziv, 6 y.)j7iTi]g ian vsaviag, ovrog SQydzrig sarlv, ovTog sativ 6 SQydrijg, virtue is wisdom, wisdom is virtue, the young man is a thief, the thief is a young man. this person is a laborer. this man is the laborer, i. e. the laborer is this man. 148 GRLEK OLLEKDORPF. 147. Exercises. Render into English. TJov fjv i^-d-sg 6 Tf^jfr/r^g ; — ^-H E/3a§c^sv iv ra Ttidia, rj dvE/Saiviv iTvi rbv Xo(pov. — Tiva 68ov s/3adi^iv 6 ayysXoQ ; — Tr]v tig, ttjv xcof^rjv i/3adi- ^iv. — Hfj-slg ixtivrjv rrjv r/fiS^ccv sniOTo'kccg syga- (po/xtv. — TtaiQ rag Gcpaiqag aTiEQQiTTrsv. — "H xo- qr] ovvkXtynv nig to xavovv qoSa ital la. — "Eya eaqcov ravra ra xaXa qoBa. — 'Efcsivrj rfj avrf, rifiSQa rj/^Eig sv rfj olxia Ovv v/xiv SfiEvofisv. — "^0 vtaviag ttjv ^aferrjQiav ccTTSQQiTtvsv. — i'^inoQog ov vvv TOOOVTOV olvov Jthtc oGov naXai titivev. — 'O bibuOna'kog ^l/3Xovg OvXXi-ysi. — Ovxstc rooav- Tccg fii/3Xovg avXXsyst baag iiaXai. awsXtytv. — "^H ocQiTTj Gocfiia sOtLv. — "^H 60(pia rov diSaOaaXov fziydXr] ioTiv. — IlaXac fjOav iifuv noTJkdl Hcii. 60(pol BcdaGxaXoi. — Qav^uoc^co rrjv aQtTrjv rov viavlov. — Tig ov S^av ^u^ti rrjv rov §idaOxaXov oocpiav ; — '^0 S-abg 60(p6g sGnv. — '0 S-tog fxovog Gocpog sGtc xa\ /nsyag. — Ovrog sgtcv viog fj,ov. — OvTog 6 ifxog vlog nalg sGriv. II. Render into Greek. I throw away my ball. — The boy was throwing away his ball. — He was not throwing away his own ball, but mine. — We had not mine, but the merchant's. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 149 — ^What was the young man saying? — He was saying nothing except this. — What were the young men pursu- ing ? — Either a peacock or a squirrel. — The squirrel was fleeing (from) the young man. — What young man was he fleeing? — This same young man. — We were then sending these letters to the good stranger, — We do not now send so many letters as we formerly used to send. — What were you admiring ? — I was admiring both the wisdom and the virtue of the teacher. — Who were play- ing among (in) the roses ? — The maiden was either play- ing there, or at the spring. — The horse was running into the large pasture. — The stranger had much gold. — The horses were fleeing away (escaping). — I see myself. — I see my own hat, not yours. FOKTIETH LESSON. 148. The Third Declension. Nouns of this Decl. are very numerous, and of all genders. The Gen. regularly ends in og, but a few classes of nouns have the Attic ending mg. Note. — Observe that any substantive. !in ag or -qg is of the 1 Decl. in ov, is of the 1 or 2 Decl. in og (or wg) is of the 3 Decl. 150 GREEK OLLENDORFF. («ifj', the month. SING. DUAL PLUR. N. flllV N. jwi/t's^' G. firivog N.A.V. ii)jvE G. [irjvar D. i^rivt G. D. fitjvoiv D. firic!i[v) (for firjvalv) A. fxriva A. fifjvai; V. ^jjy V. /^^J'et," Quantity. — The terminations Dat. Sing, and Plur. i, Ace. Sing, a, Ace. Plur. «q, are s/iori ; as in 1 Decl. is every- where long, as vittviug, x^^Q"?- Accent. — The accent generally stands throughout, as far as the general rules of accentuation allow, on the same syllable as in the Nom. But most nouns of one syllable in Decl. 3, have in the Gen. and Dat. of all numbers the accent on the final syllable, and ar and oiv are circumflexed : see in jU'ji'. Rem. — y before a is generally dropt, as in firjv-ai, /irjai. Decline like fii^v. acfriv, G(frjv6?, the wedge. 6 "EUtjv, jjvog, the Greek. oi''Ellrivsg (Plur.) the Greeks. 149. lig ; who ? ri ; what 7 SING. DUAL PLHH. N. tig ; Neut. xi ; N. ursg ; lira. ; G. Tivog ; N. A. 7I.VS ; G. Tivmv ; D. zivt; G. D. rlfoiv; D. Tiat{v) J A. 7iva ; A. Tivug ; tiva ; GREEK OLLENDORFF. 151 So also T(i,', some one, any one, with a change of Accent. SING. DUAL PLDE, N. tig; Neut. tJ N. tivse. tiva G. twos N. A. tivs G. ttvav D. 7IH G. D. tivoiv D. tiai{v) A. tlVU, 11 A. tivag ■tivcL Tig ; who 1 always retains its accent unchanged. T(ff some one, &,c. is enclitic. tig av&QoiTiog ; av&Q(an6g tig, tivog anovsig ; aKoim tivog, anovoiJiiv tt. what man ? a certain man. whom do you hear? I hear some one. we hear some thing. 150. The way in which Enclitics lose their Accent. 1 after Oxytones, 2. after Perispomena, axia tig GKld flOV axiai rivsg cxiav ts aximv ttvcov astiar fiov 3 after Paroxytones, oixia tig OMlCC IA,0V ouiiai tlveg 4 after Properispomena, aqiaiQa tig aqiaiQa [lov aqiaiQai tivtg for ama tig " OKlOt, ftov. " ay.iat tivs'g. " aximv ts. " axiwp tivmv. " axicov jMOtJ. " oixia tig. '■ oixia ftov. " oiniai tivig " aqiaiQa tig. " aifuTga ftov. " aqiaiQai tivig. 152 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 5. after Proparoxy tones, av&Qconog rig for avdQwnog zig. av&Qoonog [lov " av&Qanog fiov. av&QwnoL tivsg " ar&Qwnoi Tivtg. |CJ= Observe that after Paroxytones, dissyllabic enclitics retain their accent, as olxlai Tivig. Rem. — If several enclitics succeed each other,, they throw their accents back on each other ; as, oixia re ^k iimv. Here rs has the accent of zig, and Tig that otiaziv. Tiaim, 7V7ITC0, Imperf. 'inaiov, hvmov. rivi naisig ; acpvQK Tzaico, ivmm Ty isiQi, zy j'^cocnri; liysig. I strike. I was striking. with what do you strike? I strike with a hammer. I strike with my hand, you speak with your tongue. 151. Ride. — The instrument, or that with which a thing is done, is put in the Dat. Note. — Distinguish carefully between with denoting the instrument, and with denoting accompaniment (aw) ; as, avv Tin eQ'^siai ; with (along with) whom does he come? fQ'^^srai avv tw (film, he comes with his friend. Tin ia&iEi ; with what does he eat? ov zj yXcoaay ia&iu, he does not eat with his tongue. GKEEK OLLENDORFF. 153 axl^oi, I am splitting, I split, sa^i^or, ivas splitting, &c. TO ^vlov, ov, the stick of ivood. l^vla, sticks of wood, wood. iaiii,s Tig ^vla, 7(V Tovjav 'iapZsv ; somebody was splitting wood, who of" these was splitting? 152. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O f^irjv. — 'O liirjv ovTOC. — Ovvog 6 avrog fi?]v. — UoXXol f.ifjvsg. — Ov roGovroc f-cfivsg o6ac rjf.i8- qac. — OvTog 6 firjv ov^ ovtco /.laxgog sOtlv ug ixuvog. — Tig ^vXa Cxi^tt ; — '^O SQyarrig 'gv'ka G^i^si. — TlvL 6/JiC,ovac ^vXa oi egydrui. ; — Tovtco ra fiaydXa 6cprjvL — X-d-sg eco&sv ol SQydrai ivXu e'o^iyov. — -Ors 6 nalg ttjv Ccpalgav etvtttsv, fifisTg rd ^v'kcc ToTg 6cprjoiv E0y(i^0fX£v. — 2q)rjv rig. — Tig acprjv ; — Tiei, GcpTqGiv dqriag ^vXa io;(i^tTE ■ — TovTOig avTolg rolg GcpiqGiv. — Tivi naitc xov vta- viav 6 dvO-qcmog ; — '-H rfj y(iiQ} avrbv naitc, rj rfi f-Lixqa fiaarrjqia — Tivsg fjOav oi "EXXrjvsg ; — Oi "EXXrjVsg aaXol xul Cocpol dvd-qanot, fjOav. — -Oi "EXXrjvug ovx ovtco aocpol rj6av, a>g oi viiv dv&qa- noi- — UoXXoi Tojv 'EXXrjvav Oocpol rjOav. — Ttvsg (some) Tcov "EXXrjvcov Goipoi'rs xai dyadol f/Gav. J* 154 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. Render into Greek. A stick of wood.— This wood.— Who was splitting this wood ? — Somebody was spUtting this wood either yesterday or the day before. — This (man) sphts wood with a wedge. — Not with a silver, nor a golden wedge. — This wedge is not silver. — This month.— On that month. — During those same months we were writing. — Was your father writing during that month, or the other? During the other. — During how many months do you stay ? — We do not stay so many months as days. — The Greeks were wise. — The Greeks used to write many books. — This rich merchant, when he was rich, had many books. — He had not so many books then as he has now {oaag vvv ijsi). — A certain Greek was wise. — Certain Greeks were both good and wise. — God was always pro- pitious to the good. — The just are always happy. FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 153. 6 noifii]v, the shepherd, stem, TToifisv. SING. DUAL. PLnR. N. TtoifJiriv N. noifisvse G. noijisvog N.A.V. noiiiivB G. noijJLsrmv D. Tzoifisn G. D. noifisvoiv D. noiixiai{v) (for Tiotfisvai) A. noiiiha. A. noifiEvag V. noifiriv V. noifibveg GllDEK OLLENDOra'P. 155 Rem. — The Nom. of the 3 Decl. is often a strengthened or otherwise modified form of the stem, or root, to which the several endings are attached. The stem can gen- erally be found by throwing off o? from the Gen. as, jxrjv-6g, stein, fir^v, noijiiv-oq, stem, noifxiv. tCf" Observe Oxytoned sahst. ia-^v eVo; • r\^, igog,- retain the long vowel in the Voc. oij", ovog • 154. Fut. Ind. of Verbs. This ends in aoo generally added to the stem or root of the verb, as yQd.(f-oi3, Fut. yqd\pa> (from ygagj-ffoj) I shall write, zvnrm, stem rvn- Fut. tv'ipco from rin-aco. Giit,co, stem axiS- Fut. axioca from aiiS-aa, &c. (See Introd. § 1. 5). ' Observe na, §a, (pa,^xp, as, m^nco, nifin-aca =neii^p(a. in ra, fiu, ■^cy, the lingual is dropt; ff;(tfa), a/t'Scroj, axiooo. Thus, yQaqiw, Fut. BXaTzim, " " u ri'ACO, isja, " TZs'flTZO} " ivnrm, " naio), " QlTZZai, " svQiaKCO, " / shall write. shall harm, hurt. shall come. shall say, speak. shall send. shall split, cleave. OavfjLuato, shall admire. I'|ro, shall have. , ' -, ' I shall strike, naiam and nairiam, ^ ^lipco, shall throw, cast. iVQrjaw (from ivQso)) shall Jind. ygaypm, Bldipm, Xi^G), nefixpco, axtooi, 156 GREEK OLLENDOllFF. The Fut. in w is inflected like the Pres. thus : Sing. yQoixp-m, sis, St. Dual szov, STOP. Plur. Ofisv, STS, ovai{v). ai^fAsgov. Att. irjlXEQOV. avQiov. avQiov Eco&sr, aVQlOV TIQCO, TlQwi av()iov samqag, ' > to-day. to-morrow. to-morrow morning, early to-morrow morning, to-morrow at evening. fiOTS ri^si 6 uyytlog ; ttVQlOV ij^Sl, oil yQaypovaiv ; TZe'flXfKO TOV viov. when will the messenger cornel he will come to-morrow, will they not write ? I shall send my son. 155. Sm, through. A Preposition. 8ia 70V, ToV, (Governs Gen. and Ace.) dia tov, through the, hy means of the. dia TOV, oil account of the. nsjinoi 8ia tov dyysXov, 8ia ti, di sfis, dta ravta, 8ia noXXd, I run through a river. I send through, by means of the messenger. on account of what 1 for what reason? on account of me, on my ac- count. on account of these things, for this reason. on account of many things, for many reasons. GllEEK OLLENDORFF. 157 ano TOD, EX TOV, ai'Ti toil, nqo tov, sv Toj, avv 7^, sni lov, tni T(^, ini tor, eiV rov, nsQi zov, TiQot; toV, ava zov, dia tov, ditt TOV, from the, out from the. instead of the, before the. in the, with the. on the, at or by the. on to the, into the. concerning the, to the. over, througliout the. through the, on account of the. Render, nsfi'ipco as i] ano rijg voi^rjg, i] sx rov ayQOv. s|m ^axTijQiav am acpt^vog. 6 ayyslog 'iQf^iiai nqo lov ^qovov. rj xoQi} y.a&tjtai avv T(p udslq:^ sv t-q aroa. 01 vsttviai TzaiXovaiv stn zav TzszQmv, dXX ovx snl ry &VQa. 01 ^s'voc ovts slg rtjv olxiav ij'^ovaiv, ovxs im tov loqiov. 6 natrjQ ygaqisi nqog zov notfit'va tzsqi tuv vlov. ava 70 Tisdiov ktQS^ov oi mnoi. Sia zavra nsjinm nqog at dice tov ayysXov. Oi innoi Sia zov nsSiov zqtj^ovaiv. 156. Exercises. I. Render into English. JJov xaif^rjrac 6 7i;ocfj.rjv ; — 01 %oi/usvsg ovtoc eTtl TOV Xocpov xu^rivrac. — Uots dtvQO rj^ovoiv ; — 2rjfj.£Q0V rj'^ovGcv, ?] avQiov. — JJsfiipcj STnaro- %r\v. — Aca rl ravri'iv rrjv ijvcGroXrjv Tzt-juyjtig ; — Usf^ifjco avrr/v dia noXXa. — Jca t'lvoc, avzrjv tis/li- ipstg ; — TIsi^ip03 avTTqv 8ia tov f^ovov vlov. — JTo- oa £vXa cx'iGtt 6 SQyaTrig ; — Tooavra 6xiS£t oou 158 GJIEEK OLLENDORFF. t'^&i. — UoTiiQOv ^vXa ^-O-sg k'a^c^dv ol rsxvlrcu^ ij ov ; — Ov ;(dig to^i^ov ^vXa, dXX avqiov o^ioov- Glv. — IJoOaQ ETiiOToXaq yqaipai avQiov o TtarrjQ 60V ; — Ov yqdipBL oOas t^jluqov yQacpnc — Tivi, ravva Xk^siq ; — Tavva ra Ttoc/nsvc rovra Xe§(o. — OvTOL ol loyoL (words) rdg rpv^ocg i)^av fiXd- ipov6iv. — 01 dhixob dkl dXXr]kovg /jXaipovaiv. — 01 d'lHaiOL ovrs eavrovQ ovrt aXXovg ^XaipovGtv. — OvTOQ 6 itaxoc, Tov vtavlav ^uHTriqia nalasc. — 01 mnoc Tj iiQO rav tcvXcov tctlvrai., iq did tov TTidlou Ttqog rbv Xo but in eu. avzov iisvovfiev, fisvstts nollkg rifieQccg, we, shall remain here, you will stay many days. 158. Many verbs have the Middle form of the Fut. instead of the Active ; as, 160 GliEEK OLLENDORFF. Irreg. ^aivco, go, Fut. ^iqaoiiai, I shall go, waJk. axovco. hear, (( aKOvaOfxai, shall hear. (fsiym, flee, " (fsv^of^ai, shall flee, shun. ttmxw, pursue, cc Sim^d} and dm^ofiai, shall pursue !TatX(0, play. (C nailojxai, shall play, sport. Irrog. oQaw see, a oxpofiai, shall see. " niva, drink, u nioixai, shall drink. " laji^avm, take, » Xijxpofiat, shall take, catch. " mofJ^ai, come, C£ iXivaofiai (Poet.) shall come. All these Futures are inflected like 'iQiofiai. Sing, axovaofiai, axovaTj, axovasrai. Dual ttKovaoftE&ov, ay.ovasa&ov, anovaea&ov. Plur. axovaofis&a anovasa&s, axovaovzai. ai'a^ijaofis&a etzi tov Xoqiov, ara^ijaezai ini tov mnov, b xaxog ov (psv^siai iavtov, ova IIA.S ^rjtpr;, oixszi olvov Tziofxai, we will ascend the hill, he will mount his horse, the bad man will not flee him- self, you will not catch me. I shall no longer drink wine. 8QaiAov[iai, I shall run, irreg. from T^t^oo. nsaovfiai, I shall fall, " " nima. Thus inflected, Sing. Sguii-ovfiai Dual 0VIJ.S-&0V Plur. ovfiB&oi Tii lAjjla nsssTtaf, dQa/itda&E dia 70v Tzoruftov, tj or El sta&ov eia&s sirai. ua&ov. ovvzai. the apples will fall. you will run through the river. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 161 159. oil, noti an absolute negative. fiq, not, a conditional negative. Questions. — 1. In questions expecting an affirmative answer* ov is used ; as, ovx SQxsrai ; does he not come 1 2. In questions implying doubt and apprehension, and indicating that a negative answer is expected, ^ri is used ; as, firi nsasirai ; he will not fall, will he 1 he will not f alii Note. — This latter is often expressed in English by giving an interrogative tone to a negative expression; as, " he is not come ?" Otherwise, as above, " he has not come, has he ?" Examples. ftirtrsi 7j aq}aiQa ; ov 7117I7SI fj acpaiga ; firj niniu rj atfaiQa ; noTEQa fiiTZTSi Ti aqiaiqa, rj ov ; does the ball fall ? does not the ball fail 1 the ball does not fall, does it ? does the ball fall, or not 1 160. Exercises. I. Render into English. ^ivyovGiv 01 xXsJtrac j — Ov gjtv^ovvai ol xlknTatj — M.ii ccTiotptv^ovTai, (escape) ol ^X&Ttrat ovroi ; — IIoTSQOV aTTOcptv^ovTca ol x^stttccc, rj ov ; — Ovdtlg TOVTCJV Tcjv xaxdiv ctTLOcpiv^irac. — Tav- TU XsyscQ ; — Ov ravru Xsytt 6 qr]vcoQ ; — Mrj xav- T« Is^ovOiv Ol QrjTOQiQ j — Ov [A.6vov Tuvva, dXXcc nolla TOcavra Is'^ovacv. — IIooov xQOvov Xs^ov- 162 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Oiv 01 Qr'jTOQtg ovTOi ; — ToauvraQ 7.s^ovOcv fif-ikqaq ooug rjjukti d^ovoof-it-d-a. — Tig rov ^t'jTOQo; dxov- otTui; — OiiTog 6 oocpbg ^rjTCoQ fiaXag Xsyti.. — Tavra tv txhu—^Ors XsiovOcv ol qrjTOQii^, tots rijLikig d^ovooix-cd-a.—IIoGovg oxiovQOvglJiipkTai, 6 vtaviag ; — Ar'jifjtTai oaovg Scco^tTai. — O }€Xs%TTjg (ptv^trui, Hol rj/Litig didio/usv ts xal Xr]if/o/J.s&a. — Ov dqafj-ovvrac ol iTtTtoc dca tov tiotu/xov ; — JJoTEQa ■jikOblrac rj f.icxQcc ncdg tig tov qovv, rj ov ; — Mrj TViptc Ttjv x6Qr]v rfj paxTTqqia 6 xaxog ; — JJoTtqov TTjv /Sqovttjv axovOiGx^t, rj ov ; — 'H/ut/g TTjv Pqovvi]v dxovOo^ii&a, ots v/Uiig ttjv aOTqa- n)]v oipbods. — 01 dbtitoc dtl ddXiol tliUv. — Mrj tvvovg iorlv 6 dtog rolg xaxolg ; — Ou TOig xaxolg Evvovg sSrlv, dVka Tolg aya&otg. II. Render into Greek. I shall flee. — This thief will escape. — -Will the thieves escape 1 — They will not escape, will they ?— On what account {Sia ti) shall you say these things 1 — On account of many things. — Whom will these unjust (men) pursue "2 — They will pursue the good stranger. — When the stranger shall come {rj'^ei) they will pursue him. — This hoy will play. — When will he play? — The young men will play by the fountain. — The girl will not fall into the fountain, will she ? — Will the horses fall into the river, or not ? — When shall we see the experienced physician? — To-morrow. — By whom shall I send to GREEK OLLENDORPF. 163 him ? — By this orator. — What will these orators say ? — They will say nothing bad, but many good things [noX- ).a aya&d). — There is something in the chest. — What lies on the table ? — The cat lies on the table, or before the chest. — Has not the girl apples in her basket ? — The boy has not a thorn in his tongue, has he ? FOETT-THIRD LESSON. 161. gifti, am, Fut. eaofiai, F shall be. Sing, sao/iai sarj s'arai (for sasrai). Dual iao^s&ov saea&ov sasa&ov. Plur. iao/is&a sasa&s eaovrai. nov eari ; avTov kaofiai, easa&s iv i^ xtjtk^ ; sGofis&a, ly.u. where shall you be ? 1 shall be here. shall you (ye) be in the gar- den? we shall be there. 162. tliii, I shall go [shall come). Ind. Pres. "with Fut. signification. Sing. 6«j«i Dual Plur. 'ijjiiv El shtM. itov irov, " "- { \ izE iaat\v). 164 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Ind. Imperf. yeiv or ^a, I was going {coming). Sing. r'" (or ^a) tr (^eia&a) V Dual XltOV [fjSlTOv) ririjv {Tjeitriv) Plur. r^fisv {xiBifisv) fjTS {yens) ysaav. 163. slixi, shall go, ?/|w, shall come, are used instead of ilsvsofiai (Fut. of eg^ofiai). So ^eiv is common instead of tiqxo/xtjv Imperf. of eQ)^o- l^ai ; thus, Pres. sQ^ofiai, nQoaiQ^ofiai, Fut. ri'^m, slfii, ansifu, Imperf! i^sif, or ?;a, TTQoarjeir, dnyeiv, I come, am coming (go). I come to. I go away, depart. am come, have come. 1 shall come. shall go {shall come). shall go to, come to, approach. 1 shall go away, shall depart. I was going, coining. J was coming up, approaching. I was going away, departing. Examples. 6 isvog iioi nQoa^QiSTai, OL innoi anrjsaav, 770TS dnsi ; avQiov ans(fii; 01 cpi'lo!. /.wv aniaaiv, i^laaiv. the stranger comes to me. the horses were departing, when shall you go away ? I shall go away to-morrow, my friends will depart, they will go forth. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 165 164. 6 Ximv, the lion. stem, liow. SING. DUAL. PLOH. N R.fc'ojJ' N. Xiovrss 3 XiovTog N.A.V. liovrs G. XeovTmv D XiovrX G. D. 'ksovtoiv D. 2,f'otiOT(»') (for Uovtai)' K. Isovia, A. Xso-PTug V, 'iov V. Xiovreg 6 ysQwv, ovtog {stem, ynQovz), the old man. 6 hSovg, ovrog (stem, o8ovt), the tooth. Exc. Voc. Sing. oSovg. Sdy.vco, Tbite, am biting. Imperf. eSaxvov, was biting. Fut. Sfi^Ofiai, shall bite. 6 Xvxog, ov, 6, Tj aQKtog, ov, ■fj vl^, rjg, 6 ■&ijQSvztjg, ov, 6 &i]Qdt^g, ov. the wolf, the bear, the forest. the hunter, the huntsman. dia§aivm, T cross over. Sis^aivov, was crossing. Sia^rjaofiai, shall cross. Sia^alvm to* notafiov, 6 axiovQog roTg oSovai Saxvsi, I cross the river, the squirrel bites with his teeth. 166 GREEK OLLENDORFF. ^l3= Observe, the vowel of the Prep, which is dropt before a vowel, reappenrs before a consonant, as dia-^aivio, 81,-i-^aivov, Siu-^rjcro/iai, Rem.— y and vt rarely stand before a, and where vt is dropt, the preceding vowel if short is lengthened, a, t, V into a, J, V, I into £i, and into ov, as, bSovTOi o8ovai{v). ndvtai naai{v). 165. Exercises. I. Render into English. EljM sv ra yirjTta.- — AiiQcov rjfj.tic dficfOTSQOi iv ra ccvfS xrjTicp iGOfj.t-d'a. — Kal iyco xai ov rrj- fisQOv im, rais ■d'vquig, eGoui-d'a. — '-ExaGrog tcov XsovTCov sv TJj vXr] I'orac. — 01 ■&riQiVTal rov Xsov- ra dcco^ovrat. — Oiiroi ol S-riQavval noXXag rifjusqag xai 'kvxovg xcii aqxrovg Scco^ovtcu. — Mrj dnocptv- Sovrai ol XsovTSQ ; — UonQa cptv^ovrat ol "kvxoi, TOV ■d-rjQivrrjv rj ov ; — '^O Ttoif^rjv hiaxsi rov Xvxov, ■ — 01 xaxol dil diaxovGiv dXXrjXovg, it at dioo^ov- GREEK OLLENDORFF. 167 TCCL. — Oi oaovTsg rav Xtovrcov. — Ovy^ ol rcov "khov- TCOV odoVTiC, aXX 01 TOV ySQOVTOQ. — JJoGOVQ 686v- raq i^i-l 6 ysqcov ; — Ov vvv roGovrovq iXtc, oaovg na'kui. ti/kv. — 01 Ttot/^bvtg ccTisQ^ovTai. — Uol iiocv 6 TTOcfirjv ; — 0/ TVOcfiEVi-g rj sig rrjv vXtjv dniccdiv, r} etvI tov Xocpov. — "^0 ysQcov agrt nig Tr]v olxlav siarisc (was entering). — 'Hf^tig TTj/j.tQov ai;i,[xtv. — 'O GxiovQog daxvsc roTg odovOcv. — Mr] drj^srac ttjv koqtjv roig odovocv 6 Oxiovqog ; II. Render into Greek. An old man. — ^This old man. — This same old man. — This old man has teeth. — These bears and lions have large teeth. — The Avolf has his (the) teeth large and white. —The hunter pursues both the wolf and the lion. — The bears flee the hunter. — Thehunter was just now entering into the wood. — The boy will catch this squirrel. — The squirrel will not bite, will he ? — The squirrel will bite the tail of the horse. — Not the horse's tail, but the cat's. — I shall go away. — I shall come before evening. — Our friends were going away at dawn. — They will depart early in the morning. — Who is coming to me? — Nobody but this old man. — Has not the old man a staff? — He has neither a staff nor a cloak. — This is a good old man. — God will be always gracious to the good. 168 GEEEK OLLENDORFF. FOKTY-FOURTH LESSON. 166. The First Aorist. Form this tense from the Fut. hy changing m into a, and prefixing the Aug. thus ; YQaifbi, ygaip-w, 1 Aor E-ygaip-a, I wrote. 7tl/X7I0), 7tS/llp-C0, u e-Tie/iifi-a, I sent. liyio, }.sioi, 1! eXci-u, I spoke, said. qiTCTOS, (i/l/<0), IE eggiip-a, I threw, cast. naio), naitro), a ETiaicra, I struck. rVTlTOl, TVlptxJ, u ervipu, 11 II ^latnai, jSldi/jb), a E^?.afa, I hurt, harmed. uxovia, ay.ovaofiai, U TjY.ovau, I heard. &avfia^o} &av[iuij(a, I struck^ I was sending, %nifi\j)a, J sent. I was splitting. 'iaxtaoi, I split. I was throwing away, 8 ajiig^iipS, I threw away. 170 GREEK OLLENUOr-FF. 6 Tonog, ov, the place toff xaXog eatir oviog 6 jonog ! (og simsiQog 6 largog ! CO IeW, aig aocpog sj! ag naxoLQioi oi aya&oi! how beautiful is this place ! how skilful the physician ! O stranger, how wise you are ! how happy the fjood ' 170. The Copulative dni, am, is often omitted in general propositions, interrogations, exclamations, and in some particular words ; as Srilov for dqlov ianv, it is evi- dent; thus, ol uya&oi fiaxttQini, ri \pvy}j a&dvatog, ti Tovzo ; ag iXemg 6 &s6g.' dTJlov on aocfog el, the good are happy. the soul is immortal. what is this ? how gracious is God ! it is evident that you are wise. 8rilov oil ravra ovrmg e^ei, . Xeyovaiv on ^i^Xovg -avlleysig, axovto cog aocpog si. that, oil, mg. it is evident that this is so. they say that you are collect- ing books. I hear that you are wise. 171. Exercises. I. Render into English. "Eygaipa STtcOroXrjv. — ITgoq riva ravraq rag eTTiaroXag eyQutpaQ ; — "Eyqaifja avvag nqoq rov Sfxov aya-dov (piXov. — Uotsqov eTTS/nipas ttjv stiio- ToXt]v, }] ov ; — '-'ETtE/Liipa avvfiv 8icc vov dyysXov. GEEEK OLLENDORFP. 171 — Ovx sp(&£g £7V£fj.xpa aVTiqv, dXX avQcov jvsfiifjcj. — Ots Tjfiiig sygacpo/usv, al xoqac snl rav Ttkrgcov TOVTCov ixadrjvTO. — Ev rive, rona eGtIv o yslrav jLioxJ ; — Oi ysiTOvsg ^fj-cov sv rovvco avra ra tottco i€ax^r]VTUC. — OvteSTo iv tovtco ra Tonco, dXX sv sxiiva. — '0 HTtQog rOTtog oi)^ ovvco fxsyag s6rlv cog ixslvog. — X-d-sg zr/v ^Qovrrjv rjteovocfju&v- — AvQiov ccGTQaTtrjv oipo^f&u. — Ai]kov otl 6v ^qovttjv axovsig. — 'O ysQcov dnk^qups ttjv rs )(Xatvav xal rrjv ^axTYiQiav. — ^Q.g tcaXol^ ag fj,£yaXoi ovvoc oi XTJTvot ! — 'O ddixog ervips ^s rfj /ScaerrjQia. — Ot sqyaTUC ^vXa Oqirjolv i'oxt-Oav. — "^H ^tcov. — Atvxrj Xi-(^v. — TI ^icjv 'ktvxr] S6TCV. — "^H ^lav xsTruc sm TTJg yfjg. — 'H ;(icov ETtiTtvav dvd ttjv ^coQav. — Al /8o£C ergsji/ov did rov ^lovog, rj sv rfj %iOvc exscv- TO. — Afikov ag fxaaaQioi. ol dya-dol. II. Render into Greek. This place. — This same place. — -These very places. — ^Not into these places, but into those. — What other place ? — This other place. — Those other places. — What other places 'I — None of these places is so beautiful as that. — This place lies by {im 79) the river. — I wrote a letter. — The boy sent a letter to his sister by this hunter. — They say that the hunter pursued {s8ia>^s) the lion. — They say that the Greeks were wise and beautiful. — The boy threw away his cup. — The young men sent these letters to each other. — They sent these letters in- 172 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Stead of those. — They sent their own (rag savrmv) instead of ours. — Who lies in the snow ? — This old man was either lying in the porch, or sitting before the door. — The orator said these things. — Who heard the orator ? — They say that this is a great orator. — What is this 1 — Wisdom is beautiful. FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. 172. The Second Aorist. Some (chiefly irregular) verbs, have what is called a second Aorist instead of the First. Its meaning is pre- cisely the same as that of the First. It ends in ov and is inflected like the Imperf. TQSX<» Fut. dguftovfiai 2 Aor. tdQufiov Iran. nini(o ££ nsaovfiai ' eneaov, Ifell. lafi^iivio (I X^ipofiai ' ' slu^ov, I took, caught SQiOfiai (( (slsvaofiai) ' ' '^X&ov, I came. (fivyca (! (fsv^ofjiai ' ' eqivyop, Ifled. ia&tai U eSo/icu ' ' scpccyor, late. nlvm li mofiai ' ' smov, I drank. ScCHVtO li Sfi^ofiai ' ' eSaxor, I hit. opra « oipofiai ' ' sidov, I saw. svQiaxco a svQTjam ' ' EVQOV, 1 found. rixm, Fut. ^'|oj, Imperf. tikov; with Aor. meaning came. GREEK OLLENDOItFP. 173 Rem. — The 2 Aor. belongs chiefly to irregular verbs and is formed often from obsolete stems or roots ; as, 'dSgu- (iov (and dga/xovfiai) from d§£fio], dgdfiu], 'iliiifiov from i.a^a, TjX&ov (for rikvO^ov) and ikevtro/iai from sKsidm. Inflection. Sing. ^X&ov Tik&sg ril&i{v). Dual rik&itov, ifk&ixriv. Plur. fik&ofiev ijX&ete ^X&ov. 173. Interj'ogative Sentences. 1. (Questions of simple doubt and uncertainty are often asked by the mere tone of the voice ; as, yQdq)stg ; do you write 7 tjl&ov ; did they come ? 2. Such questions are often introduced by ccqci, so then, so, to indicate that the question grows out of some- thing precsding, or out of the attending circumstances ; tTzsasv ; aQa STisasv ; did he fall 7 sodidhe'fall? Note. — Strictly aga (from ccQa so then) has reference to something preceding, hke our so, so then ; but it often loses its primitive force and becomes a simple interroga- tive, or serves to heighten the expression of doubt or sur- prise. Tttvtu Xi'ysig ; UQa tavTU Xsysig ; do you say this ? (so) do you say this 7 Thus it can be used before om. aQa a&Xtog sijit ; aQ oiix a&Xiog ujii} am I miserable? (so) am I not miserable? 174 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Examples of Questions. did you come? (so) did you come ? KQCX. {ag) ^X&sg ; ■y , ^, %' > did you not come ? aQ ovx tjl&eg ; ) fA-Tj rjX&eg ; no'rsQov rjXdsg, i] ov ; you did not come, did you'? did you come or not ? 174. Exercises. I. Render into English. "Ervips 6t 6 vsaviag ; — 'Aga tnacGs 08 6 xaxbg Tco 'S,v'ka ; — Oii^ tvvipt rov fza-drfrriv 6 didaOxa- XoQ ; — Ovx cc&Xcol tlOLV dtl ol xaxoi ^ — M.r] tnn- Osv ilg Tov 7tOTa/uov o Tvaig ; — UorsQa nQ06EQX,ov- rai rijiitv ol ^svoi, r} dnkQXOvrac ; — Tig tq^uya TOVTOV TOV d-QTOV ; OvTOC HOi TOV UQTOV t(pa- yov Hal TOV oivov kitiov. — EiSov tov Xsovtu ots Udqai^kv tig ttjv vXrjv. — O italg tov CxiovQOv eXa- fisv. — O Xvxog edaxs tov noif^sva Tolg odovOcv. 11. Render into Greek. When I found the hat, 1 took it. — I saw the lightning. — Who else saw it? — Nobody but me either saw the lightning or heard the thunder. — Did the horse fall ? — (So) did the thieves come into the house ? — Who took the GP^EEK OLLENUORFP. 175 thieves? — Did the thieves escape (ans(fV'j'ov) or not? — Only one thief escaped. — How many golden cups did you see in the basket? — Not so many as I see now. — I did not see so many as I shall see to-morrow. FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. 175. 6 naig, (stem naid) the boy. ?/ naig, the girl. SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. naig N. naidsg G. naidog N.A.V. TTaids G. naiSmv D. 7iai8t G. D. naidoiv D. naiai{v) A. natSa A. naiSag V. nai V. naiSeg Id^ Observe irregular accent on Gen. Plur. and Gen. and Dat. Dual. See Lesson XL. (148). TO naiStov, ov, the child (diminutive from naig). TO d^riqiov, ov, the wild beast. 176. ^aif CO, I go, walk. 2 Aor. i^Tjv, I went. i^rjv, inflected like ^v, was. Sing, e^tjf e'^)]g i^ij. Dual ej^riTov i^tjtijr. Plur. s^tjixBv f^i^rs epijaav. 176 GREEK OLLENDORFF. avf'^Tjr, I went up. Sii^ijv, I crossed over. lff'^'^<^S^,n^,\thesea. Alt. vakaiTa, 7]g, r} yicpvqa, as, noilXv, 'd'avfid^m as on aya&o? si, ■ lavra. liyco ozi Bixctici saitv, Asyco ozi ravta dixaid iariv, dvt^riv im top innov, Sii^riaav rov noxafiov, ri]v ys- (fvqav. the lake (marshy lake). the bridge. back, hack again, again, because, that. I admire you because you are good. I say these things because they are just. I say that these things are just. I mounted my horse, they crossed the river, the bridge. 177. Exercises. I. Render into English. "0 oialg. — Oiirog, 6 nulg. — ^ff %al(i ixsivrj. — 01 naidsg nai^ovOiv. — "^H/j-tiQ Tvai^ofiav Gvv rolg nai- oiv. — At ptaXal Ttaldtg nai^ovOcv inl rfl P€Qrjvrj. — Aice Ti (ptvyec 6 TtoiiLitjv ; — 'O Ji:oi-/j.r,v (ptvysc on TOV Xvxov oqa. — 01 TtocjusvtQ i(pvyov ore rov Tm- xov tidov. — "Orb ra rhi^qiu fjXiftv, tore ecptvyov GREEK OLLENDORFF. 177 (went to fleeing) oi nalSss- — Ov}( sxtlvoi fzovoi, dXXa xal ^fj.eis i ing. N. ug fiia sv G. ivog iiiag svog D. svi jxia svi A. eva [Uttv si> So, oiiSeig, no one, nobody, none. Sing. Plur. N. ovdeig ovSifita, ovSiv, ovdsvsg G. ovdevog ovSe/xiug ov8sv6g ovSe'vcor D. ohSsvi ov8sjM.a ov8evi ovSEai[v) A. ovSivoi ovdef/tttP ovdsv ovdsvag So also jUj/SttV, none. 179. dvo, two. TQeig, three. N. Svo N. rqsig Neut. rqta. G. 8voiv {pvsiv) G. tQiav D. Svolv (Svai{v) D. rQiativ) A. Svo A. 7QHg TQia, ziaaaQtg (Att. rsTTaQsg), four. N. Tsaaagsg Neut. rsaaaQoi G. rsaadgcov A. TsaaaQuig xiaaaqa GREEK OLLENDORFF. 179 180. The remaining numerals under two hundred are indeclinable. nivts five, SlrSeHK eleven. !' , six, dmSsxa twelve. e/iza seven, TQiaxaidsxa thirteen. oxroj eight. si>toiyi[v) twenty. hvia nine, iQid-Aovia thirty. SVAO, ten, ey.arov. a hundred. T 3' O^QWTzog, one man. fiia y7. wTta, one tongue h podov, one rose. r/ one thing. slg Tovtcov one of these (men). ev TOVTCOV, one of these things. oiiSsig ilinoQog, no merchant. ovdeftiav oixiav ogm, I see no house. ovdsii; tav avv iuoi, none of those with me. ovdi'vsg slac rovrmv, there are none of these. ^ide sig. not even one, not a single man 181. Exercises. I. Render into English. Eig nalg. — Mia xoqri. — ^'Er xavoiiv. — '^H itoqri t^tL 8vo xavd iv rfi X^'-Q'-- — Ilooag yXdaoag t^si ovToq o vsaviag ; — Jvo yXaSOag e^si. — '0 oocpbg 180 GREEK OLLENDORFF. ysQcov fiovrjv (xiav yXaGOav tx£(- — 01 avd-qanot fj.iav yXaGGav xai 8sxa daxTvXovg txovatv. — OuSslg, TiXtjr TOVTOV roii nai86g, §vo yXoiooag t/st. — TQilg Tiorafxol tlacv iv ruvrri rfj X^Q^- — 01 TisvTE -d-rjQSvral ravvrjv rrjv fxiuv yscpvQav Scs- ^rjGav. — UoGac, ri/iisQagkfx.iiviv Evrav&u 6 Ssvog ; — '-Efxscvs TsGOaQag r] nsvrs fifj-SQaQ. — Al TiaiStQ b^ovac TQLOxaibtxa fj.i]Xa iv role xavolg. — Ovhtlg xav qrjTOQav ravTU I'Xs^iv. — Ovdsf^iav firjXsav OQCJ iv Ta tirjjia tovtco. — Ov8s fiiav oqoj. II. Render into Greek. One apple or two roses. — Either three men or four horses. — There are five or six apple-trees or fig-trees in this one pasture. — One shepherd pursues many wolves. — Many wild beasts flee one hunter. — How long {noaov yiQorov) do our friends stay? — They stay nine or ten months. — This boy has ten fingers. — This field has a hundred trees. — In the thunder I hear a hundred voices. — I see only four horses on that hill. — The three messen- gers crossed two great seas, and came into' this beautiful country. — How beautiful is this country ! — There is only one God.— There is no God but one. — God is propitious to none {ovSei/i) except tho good. — Not a single man will say these things. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 181 182. FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 6 xoQoi^, the raven. SING. DtJAL. PLnR. N. vioqa.'^ N. xoQcixsg G. mqaxoe N.A.V. xoQoixs G. xoQuxmv U. xoQaxi G. D. xoQcixoiv D. xoQa^iiv) A. xoQcixci A. xoQaxas v. XOQU^ v. xoQaxsg So, 6 Kola^, axog, the flatterer. b log, ov, the poison, poison, rj y.aQSta, ag, the heart. V '"■''nht V^i the fountain, source. 71 'l^cori, rig, the life, life. [to) azdSiov, ov, a stadium = (an eighth of a Roman mile). aiaSia^ Neut. GzaSioi, Masc. Plur. ■•) Pres. Imperf. Fut, 1 Aor. fzoQsvoftca, ifzoQsvofiriv, 7l0Q£V&tl60fiai, inoQsv&i]v, I go, journey, travel. I was going, journeying, &c. / shall go, &c. I went, journeyed.f itzoQsvdTjV, ijg, Tj, &c. like i^riv. 182 GREEK OLLENDOEFF. 183. aniico {kno, f^ro), I am distant, aniifov (Imperf.), I was distant. how great a distance do they travel ? they went a long way. I travelled ten stadia, how many stadia is the village distant from the river? they were eight stadia distant from each other, they were not far distant from each other, they are distant many days' journey. Rem. — Continued space, like continued time, is put in the Ace. noaijv ooov noQSvovtai / inoQSv&ijaav fiaxgav bSov, tnoQEv&riv Sma aiddta, noaovg azadiovg aneiu t] Km/xt] Tov nozaixov / aneiyiov allr^lmv oxtco araSi- ovg, ^ aTtd^ov aD-rfkBiv ov noXi, ane^ovai nolXap rjfieQwv bSov, 184. Exercises. I. Render into English. OvTog 6 xoQU^. — "Exslvoc ol avrol xoquxsq. — OvTOi ol HOQaxag ccvtoL — ^Oqa TQ8ig feogaxaQ sv rfj vlfi. — TseaaQsg i] Ttsvvs xogaxsg ettI rav hkv- dgav Tcjv iyyvQ tov norufiov Ena&rp^TO. — "0 x6- Xa§ sp^se, lav sv rf) yXcoGGrj. — Ou juovov ev t^ yXaOari tov xoXajeoQ eOtlv log, dXXa hcu ev t^ ipv^ri. — 'ff fcaqdlu tov TcoXaxog noXvv e^ei lov. — • jff aQETTf] S6TC Ttriyr] Trjg ^ojfjg. — 'Ev ttj Gocpla sOtI ^arj. — H oocpla xal rj ccQETrj ^ar] Trjg xfjv^rig eIolv. — Ovdklg dyuS'bg i'p(si lov ev rfi itaqdla. — ^H tov GREEK OLLENDORFF. 183 60(pov ieciQ^ia ov^lv t;(st xaaov- — Oi "^EXXrjvsg noXka Ovddca susivTqv Trjv tj/xsquv STvoQSv&rjOav. — UooovQ Oradiovg aTcs^ovGcv at xa/^ac r^g ■d'a- XaGGrjg ; — "Ogov (as much, as, about) Saarov 6ra- biovg. — 01 Xoqjoc fifxav anu^ov ov noXkav ^{j-s- Qav 68ov. II. Render into Greek. Virtue and wisdom. — Tiitue is the source of wisdom. — Virtue alone is wisdom. — Virtue is in the heart of the wise. — A raven. — Two ravens are sitting on that tree. — I saw three ravens yesterday. — Who is a flatterer ? — My friend is not a flatterer. — No flatterer shall be a friend of mine. — The flatterer has poison both on his tongue and in his heart. — How many teeth has the old man ?— He has only four teeth. — How many days' journey is that country distant from us? — Six days' journey. — The two villages are ten stadia distant from the sea.' — The two merchants were twenty stadia distant from each other. — When the Greeks crossed the river, they were about {oaov or wg) twelve stadia distant from the bridge. FORTY-NINTH LESSON. 185. Contract Verbs. Verbs in dm, iw, 6m, contract the Pres. and Imperf. in all the Modes. 184 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Pres. Ind. Imperf. SING. 1. 2. 3. > 4, ogam ogaeig bgasi ogm ogag bgd DUAL scoguov ioigaeg smgae sagmv iiagag scoga 2. 3. ogderov ogdajov ogdrov bgdzov PLUR. scogastop imgahriv smgdrov smgdTtjv 1. 2. 3. ogdoiisv bgdtzE 6gdovai{v) bgansv bgdrs bgatyi(v) scogdoftev scogasTS soigaov ioogafiEV smgdzs icogmv Rem. — Observe the irregular augment iaigSov for agSov. (see Lesson XXXV.) So, ysldco, ysXm, I laugh. Imperf. iyeXaov iysXwr, F was laughing, used to laugh. Flit. yskdao^ai, I shall laugh. 1 Aor. syeXaad, I laughed. ini tovTcg iyiXaaav, im Tin iysXdzs ; ysXooaiv in ifioi, they laughed at this. at what (or whom) were you laughing ? they are laughing at me. 186. ngmrog, rj, ov, first. Ssvtegog, d, ov, second. rgiTog, rj, ov, third, zizagzog, tj, ov, fourth. GKEEK OLLENDORFF. 185 mimros, ■>!, ov, fifth. e-Atog, ij, ov, sixth. dexKTog, jj, ov, tenth. nQtoTos, Tigmrov, TO nqmiov, nQWTOv Xsysig, nqmzog liysig, TO nQWTOv tavTU sXs^sv, zg nqcoTrj rjfifQa, ty devTega s(p, r^ dsxdzcp ptijvi. first (before any one else.) first (before any thing else), at the first, you speak first (before doing any thing else), you speak first (you are the first to speak), at the first he said these things on the first day. on the second morning, on the tenth month. 187. ^ XsiQ, the hand. SING. DUAL. PLDR. N. x^^Q N. x^iQSg Q. ;f£(po? N. A. V. /£(()£ G. XilQaV D. x^iQ^ Q. D. x^tQoiv D. XEQoi{v) A. xagS A. x^Xqag V. jrs'? V. ;(sr(OEg 7w yuQs (not to. ;f«rgs) rorj';(«/gorj' (rarely raiv xsiqoTv), etg Tag x^^Q"^? sAaj3s fianTriQiag, tTVlpS ftf TXl ^ilQh the two hands. of the two hands. he took staves into his hands. he struck me with his hand. 186 greek ollendorff. 188. Exercises. I. Render into English. Ti oqurs ; — KoqaxaQ oqaf^tv. — Ov tooouvov; sioqaxac, oqco/hhv oOovq xo'kaxag. — 01 noi/LisvtQ (ptvyovGtv OTc Tov Xviiov OQaOiv. — -Ots oi aoxroi }{ai ol XsovTSQ Tovg ■d'rjQtVTag sldov, tots itpvyov. — JJaXaL ■JioTJkac, jutXiTTUQ (bees) sv tovtoiq Tolq xt]Jtoe-g icoQco/uiv. — TaiiTa Ta ■d'tiqla ecoQcjv iyco OTS oil slG^X&sg. — Tl tXaj3tv tig rriv x^^Qoc 6 egyd- TTjg ; — "H TOV acprjvcc, rj ttjv acpvgav fzov. — Ov tt]v i/^rjv Ocpvqav tig ttjv /^slqa tXa^tv, dXXa ttjv 6r']v, r] TTjv TOV s/u.7Toqov. — -H TiQCOTrj fjjLiSQa- — UoTS rjS- ovGlv ol cp'iXot rjfj.d}v ; — H TJj dsvrsqcc r] tjj tqItt] honsqa. — 01 dyysXoi. ccTtiaai, tco hsxaTCO ^rjvi. — HoOag x^lqag s/^sl 6 avd'qanog ; — Avo /^slqag i'xki xal /Liiav yXcJaaav. — 'EttI tIvc ysXdg ; — ^EtvI tovvg) ytXa. — 'Hfislg aTvl rovTOtg ysXcofzsv. — 01 vsaviuc y^&sg TS iysXaOav, xal avqiov naXiv ysXaOovTUL. — '0 QtjTaq nqcJTog not f^ovog Xsyst. II. Render into Greek. We laugh. — We do not laugh. — These (men) always laugh. — What are they laughing at? — At nothing [m olSevi). — At nothing good. — The good (man) laughs at nothing bad. — I was laughing when I was seeing the squirrel. — I laughed when this boy took the squirrel into his hands. — The squirrel did not bite the boy, did he? — GREEK OLLENDORFF. 187 I shall laugh again to-morrow. — I always laugh when I see these two squirrels. — When I heard the thunder I ran into the house. — The first man. — Who was the first man? — My friend came on the second morning. — I saw the lion on the third day.— The little girl took into her (the) hands the fourth book. — One wolf, two bears. — The lions. — I saw not so many lions as bears. — We crossed the sixth bridge on the tenth day. — The first day instead of the second. FIFTIETH LESSON. 189. Contract Verbs in m. Pres. (ftXk'oi (ftXa, Hove. Imperf SING. t. 2. 3. qjiXtoo qiiXe'eig (fiXisi cpiXm q)iXsie cp(Xsi DUAL. iqiiXsov iftXssg icfiXss iqttXovv iqiXaig icptXei, 2. 3. (fiXseTov q}iXesTOv qnXsTrov cpiXshov PLUR. iqjiXserov iqiiXsizriv icfiXaiiov iqitXsk]]v 1. 2. 3. cpiXso/xev cftXovnEv q.iXsSTH qiXslrs q:iXi'ovai(i') q:tXovai{i') SqiXtOfJlSV sqiiXt'sTE iqiXeov sqii7.ov/xsv EcpiXeTiE iqitXovv 188 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 190. ^803 flow, and other dissyllabic verbs in m only contract «s into si ; thus, Sing. Qim Dual Plur, QiOfJLSV Sing. sQQSov Dual Plur, Pres. Qstg QfltOV ^SltS Imperf. SQgeig sqqsTtov i^QeiTS QEl QSltOV QS0V6t(v) SQQCl SQQSOV EQQSOflSV Flit. Qvijao/xai (QsvaoiAai) I shall flow. lira (filstg ; rove aya9ovg ifilm, 01 aocpoi 7}]v aoq}iav cfiXovaiv, Tiozafioe Q£t dia rov nsdiov, 6 tnnog rq^isi dia rijg odov, whom do you love 1 I love the good. the wise love wisdom. the river runs ( = flows) through the plain, the horse runs through the road. 191. ncalm, nmlm, I sell. Imperf. mmlsov, inmXovv, I was selling, used to sell. Put. ntahjaoa, I shall sell. 1 Aor. incolriaa, Isold. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 189 TO agyvQiov, ov, silver, money (small or coined silver). r] 7/|U;J, ijg, the price [worth, valuation). noaov i/]v olxiav 7i(aXeTe ; toaovrov intahiaa. for how much do yoa sell your house ? I sold it for BO much. I shall sell it for a great price. Rule. — The price of a thing is put in the Gen. 6 Tiovg, the foot. SING. DUAL. PLUH. N. novg N. noSsg G. noSog N.A.V. noSs G. nod GOV D. noSt G. D. noSoXv D. noc!i(v) A. noSa A. TzoSag V. novg V. noSsg 6, ri naXog, ov, the colt. 6, rj aiXovQog, ov, the cat. 192. Exercises. I. Render into English. '0 Tiovg Tov naXov. — Ov^ o novg rov naXov, ukX rj xscpaXrj. — Ov;( ol tov TtaXov Tvodsg, dXX oi TOV iTiTtov.-r-^O nciXog e^sc rkoOaQug Tiodccg. — 01 avd-qanoi dvo Tiodag ftal dvo x^igag t^^ovGtv. — 190 GREEK OLLENDORFF. afi, iT%lS, I'lr- ;^7xa (not E(T%idxa). |l5= Observe that verbs in ^-generally have their stem in d, verbs in tit have it in n-, /S, or cp, as, jvtcto), stem ii/jr ; ^Xanxm, stem ^Xa^. 196 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 198. Inflection of the Perfect. ysyquicp- a. as. <") arov. arov. ixfisv. are, aai{v) ir]v oiKiav nsnmlTjitag, I have Bent because I have written, you have sold your house. 199. 70 ovg, the ear. SING. DUAL. PLDR. N. ovg N. COT a G. coTog N.A.V. mzs G. aiTcov D. can G. D, oorotn D. aaiM A. ovg A. coia V. ovg V. cara TO nQoaanov, ov, the face. rj naqtia, ag, the cheek. b(p9akfi6g, ov, the eye. avHv, loithout (Governs the Gen.) avsv d(p&aXfimv, arev ^anTTiQiag, without eyes, without a staff. GREEK OLLENDORIT. 19/ 200. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tayqacpa. — Ti ykyqaipaq; — "EniOroXriv ysyga- cpa. — Uqoq viva rrjv eTicOroXrjv TTSTTOfzcpag ; — Ui- jiOf^(pcc avTTjv HQOQ TOP ddtXgjov. — /lia rh'og ; — ^i dyysXov. — OvTia Tr]v stvcGtoXtjv n£nofJ,(pa, dXX avQiov i;sf.iipco. — Uqog riva (to whom) ns- itco'kriituQ Tavvrjv ti]v olxiav ; — JJqoQ top nXovOtov tf^TtoQOv. — JJoTtQa 8t8co};/a6tv ot S'rjQSVTai ra •driqia, Iq ov ,' — Ovrs tovq XsovraQ dt8ia;(a6LV, ovT£ Tccg dqnTOvg, aXXd tovq Xvhovq. — 'O 6}{lov- Qog Tov natda didr]j^iv. — To ovg. — Td wtcc feal al Tiaqsicil tov vauviov. — Ovhtlg oqa dvtv ocf- ■d-aXf^av. — '^Oqcof.itv roig 6(p&aXfiolg, xal roig aolv dxovof.iev. — TavTU Ttavra rolg rjfz&ri-qoig avrav (with, our own) ocp-d-aX^olg aldof^sv. — 'O ysqav ov fialvsi dvtv ^axTrjqiag. — Otidiig dxovtc dvsv coTCov. — To rrjg aoqrjg itqaGanov xaXov iertv. — ndvTsg dv&-qco7tOL t^ovSiv ara, xai ocpd'aX^iovg xal TioBag xal xtiqag. — To qodov ovj^ outcj xaXov iortv cog to Ttqooconov xal al naqtial riyc xoOrjg. — Euqrjxa top vlov. — iqyaTrjg t'a^txs %avTa Tavra tu fxtyaXa dsvSqa, 198 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. Render into Greek. To whom has the father written all these letters ? — ■ To his son. — To the good stranger. — Who has loved the stranger? — Nobody has loved him. — How many ears has the boy ? — He has one ear and two tongues. — Other men [ol alloi av&Qoonoi the rest of men) have two ears and only one tongue. — We have split the trees and pursued the wild beasts. — We have sent as many letters as we have written. — The boy has laughed at [stiI) all these things. — We have always admired the wise (man). — The orator has showed to us {rifiir, nQog Tjixag) that these things are so. — Nobody sees without eyes. — We do not walk without feet. — We hear because we have ears. — We see with our {loli) eyes. — There is nothing in my eye except a thorn. — The maiden has roses and lilies on her cheeks. FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 201. The Perfect Indicative {continued.) Many Perfects are formed like the Fut. from obsolete roots, or otherwise somewhat irregularly ; as, Pres. Fut. Perf /SksVm §riaofitti /Je'/??;kS, have gone. Tgixii^ dijinfiovfiat SsdQnifir]xu, have run. i'g;(Ofiat (eXsvao/iaL) iXiji.'i&ci, have come, ■nimbi ntaovfiai nimiuKu, have fallen, qimbi qlipb} not used. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 199 axovbi axoiaojiai ax^xoa, have heard. oijiofiai (oji) kajjixxS, have seen. Isya is'Jw el'grjxu (^ica) have said, spoken. but avUs/at avU.il(t> (TvvaUoxu, have collected. kj> sJcD or a%ija«) eaxrixu. have had. Trivco ■niojiai TISJIWXU, have drunk. i(T&t(a idofiai idr/doxu, have eaten. laftftuvca Irjipofiai sl'hlfpS, have taken, caught. fiivco jxivai l^sfiivrjxu. have remained. QEta ^VTiaofiai, SQQvrjxa, have flowed. q>evy(a ffs-viojiai nscfpvya. havefled. Rem. 1. — The prefix ax-i\«oa, il-rjlv&u, i8-rj8o»tt is called the Attic reduplication. Rem. 2. — A few Perfects retain the letter of the root and are caUed 2 Perf., as nicfsvya for ni(fevxa, ax^xoa, for rjxovxa, iX'^i.v&a for iXrilvxu. Some verbs have both the 1 and 2 Perf, but generally with different meanings. avQQim, run, flow together. avreQQSor, was flowing together. avQQvriaoftui, avve^gvTjxa. 01 notttfioi avQQSovaiv, mansQ axijxoci ovzca kb.) iwQuaa, the rivers run together, just as I have heard, so also I have seen. 200 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 202. TO aoJiJia (stem acajiar), the body. SING. DUAL. PLUH. N. aana. N. amficcra G. amfiaiog N.A.V. odjims G. (iajt. G. D. am/xdzoir D. (jcO|Ure(it(j') A. casfici A. aafiaioi V. amua V. aa/Aaia So, ro (Tzo/ia, ^Ae mouth. 10 aijia, the blood, to iQlqiia, the thing. XgyiiuTa (PI.) possessions, money. Rem. — All nouns of Decl. 3 with Gen. in ktos are Neut. how much money? noaov aqyvQiov, nolla, oliya ^Q^fiara, | much, little money. 203. Exercises. I. Render into English. Ti i-WQUxag ; — Ov§£v haqaxa tvXtjv rovrav dvolv aiXovQCJV. — 01 Ticfidag eaQuxaOt tcsvvs xo- QaxaQ STvl TiJQ Gvxrjg ravrrjg. — 0/ "EXXrjvtc rbv no- rajuov Bca^efir'ixuat xal dtvQo rj8r] (already) aXr}- Xvihccoiv. — Oi ■Jioi^hvtc, >ia\ Xvhov toiQuxaOc, xal tls TTjv xojUTjv TTicpivyaaiv. — To alfxa QSt 8ia rov aafzavog. — ^H tovtov tov v'aaviov yXwoGa. — Toe GREEK OLLENDORFF. 201 ara tov vnaviov sig rriv y'kaGGav ovviQQvrjxtv. — '12 vaavla, 8vo ara e^Oftsv xcu f.ilav fxovrjv yXcoG- 6av. — Kal jTjv /Sqovttjv dxrjxoafzav, xctl rtjv do- TQaTtrjv stoQaxafikv. — ■O'rjQtVTrjg ov togovtovq Xbovvag iiXrjcpsv oaovg Bi8ia;(av. — KaXov oojfxa. — 'Rv ra GTO^axt ra tov ttoXaxog edriv log. — Ov fiovov iv ra oro^avc, dXXa >eal iv rij ipv^fi- — To ocofj.a t'xti- oord xal uifxa. — Oiirog 6 kf.i7tOQog f^£^ TioXXa ^QrjfzaTa. II. Render into Greek. How much money have you in the chest ? — Much. — There is much blood in the body. — Much blood flows through all the body. — The mouth has one tongue and many teeth. — We eat and drink with our mouth (rtji aiofiaTi). — Just as we see with our eyes and hear with our ears, so we eat with our mouth. — We have both eaten and drunk. — The shepherd has seen the wolf and fled. — The wolf has seen the shepherd and fled. — We have ad- mired the beautiful face of the maiden, and the wisdom of the orator. — Nobody eats without teeth. — The orator has not spoken without a tongue. — I have caught all these squirrels. — The disciple has collected all these books. — How wise is the scholar ! — How happy the just ! — How miserable the imjust ! — How white are the teeth, and how beautiful the cheeks of the maiden! — This young man's ears have run together into his (the) tongue. — We have stayed a long time. 9* 202 rheek Ollendorff. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. 204. xard, doion. A Preposition. xara lov, tov, (Governs Gen and Ace.) A. Kaxa TOV, down from, down in respect to. (a) Down from, nara tmv tzstqwd, down from the rocks. (6) Down in respect to = under, yaza T?jg y^g, under the earth. (c) Down in respect to = against (of speaking &c.), leyco xaza aov, I speak against you. B. YMja tor, pertaining to, belonging to (without intimate connection) ; variously modified by place, time, motion, rest, &cc. 01 xa&' ijiiag, those pertaining- { locally, those near, opposite us. to us, I temporally, those of our time. KCCT s>iSirov TOJ' yiQoror, xata TOV TioSa, Kara, jovtovg jovg loyovg, Kara yr/v nut Haza ^dXaaaav, at that time (pertaining to that time). at, on tlie foot. according- to these words. by land and by sea. tJ^Nbte. — avd denotes diffusion, over, throughout. xazd, contact at a point, at, on, &c. dva &dlaaaav, over the sea. xata ^dXaaoav, by sea. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 203 205. The Ace. with or -without xard is often used to limit a general statement. ddxret fts {•Aata) tor nod y.a).og to nQoGconov, ayaOoi; izdvza. he bites me on the foot, beautiful in the face, good in all things. xara^aiva, I go down, descend. dXysoj dlya, I am pained. ri kIi^ix,'^, ay.og, the ladder, stair-case ^ i;u.p ' t ri OKQ^, xog, the flesh. ^ ^ £vsy.a, for the sake of (Governs the Gen.) ivarrtov, in presence of. " xuza^i'^rjua xard Tijg xXifta- xog, xate6QaiA.s y.ata rov X6q)OV, tvEKK tovTcov, Tovzmv i'rsxa, ipuftlov ifiov, sfiQv svavTiov, I have a pain in my head. I have come down the stair- case, he ran down the hill, for the sake of these things, in my presence. Rem. — 'ivixa and Ivavjlov may either precede or follow the word which they govern. 206. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O av&QO}7tog xaran'mTSL (falls down). — Tu fifiXa slg T/jv ff^Tjv/jv xaTi-TiiOtv. — 'ff ecpalqa Tvm- rac xara rav TitTQav. — 01 8vo ltttvoi tcara rav nkTQoJv entcov. — Mrj 6 Ttaig xara riig icXifxaxog 204 GREEK OLLENDORFF. nsaslrai ; — 01 vaaviac, 'gvla xura rrjg OQOcpfjg sQQiTTTOV. — Kar sxtlvov tov /^qovov iyco oi'^ads snoQSvojLirjv. — ^0 Cxiovqog tov %al8a xara tov baxTvlov bkdiqx&v. — ^K xoqr] dXysl ttjv xtcpah'jv. — -Ovs 6 viavlag ttjv xoQiqv bqa, ttjv xagSlav dXytl. — '0 qrjTCOQ tuvtu navra tv tiQrjxtv. — Kutu tIvoq TavTU iXit,iv ; — Kutcc tov ddl^ov ytcTOvog^ — Tavra xut ovdtvoQ X&yco. — 01 ■d'rjQtVTul rot xaif savTOvg -d-rjQla dtl dtcoxovacv. — 'H odq§ xal Ta oOTu. — To Gco/iia OaQxa t^ti xal alfiu. — Tav- ra evavriov ndvTav Xlyof-itv dyaSov rcvog tvtxa. II. Render into Greek. The stair-case. — The cat will descend the stair-case. — The young men will run down this hill. — The flatter- er says these things against me. — The raven eats the body. — The flatterer eats the soul. — We have drunk so much wine and eaten so much bread. — The wolf eats flesh with his teeth. — At those times the young men were pursuing peacocks. — I have a_ pain in my hand. — The maiden is beautiful in the face. — The boy has a pain in his eye. — By land and by sea. — The thief has struck me on my foot (nara tov noda). — According to these words. — The orator speaks well. — He has spoken well. — I have laughed at these things.— God is just in all things. — In the soul of the unjust (man) is poison. — The blood runs through the flesh and the bones. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 205 FIPTY-FIETH LESSON. 207. nori, once, at some time, ever (enclitic). ovSsnoTs, V not at any time, never, ovdenconots, ) Rem. — oidiTiwjiois is not used of future time ; ovdi-nois rarely of past time. Jig TiotE ; who in the world 1 who, I pray 'I 71 nors ; what in the world ? what, I pray ? Ti Tiors; (more spiritedly for dta ri) why in the world ? why, I pray ? nov nozs; where in the world? ovnoTS ttvtov oxpojjiai, ovSsTiwnors scoQaxa, ovdtig nmTzojE sa>Qay.iv, 71 nozs Asytii' ; ■" Ti noje ).iystg zavza ; I shall never see him. I have never seen. no one has ever seen. what in the world are you say- ing? why in the world do you say this ? 6 fisyag ddarviog, ttoShg dd>tzvXog, 6 Tov noSog da>iTv7.og, 01 noSmv 8a>iTvXoi, the thumb. a toe. the toe. the toes. 206 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 208. 6 i^h — 6 ds, the one — the other, ot fiiv — ol 8s, some — others, (liv, indeed, to be sure (concessive). §s, but, and (usual correlative of fttV). ao) A. rvxTa A. vvKTag V. fv^ V. VVHTSg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 207 vvxtog, rris vvxrog, tV Tg VV/tTl, t-qv vi'XTa, vmra, ^(isgag xai fVATOS, )ta&' sxdarj]v vmra, fifiigav, XK&' rjfiigar, xaza vv'ATa xaza ixijvct, xar inavzov, xaO' sv, xara 8vo by night. in the night. during the night, during a night, by day and by night, each night, day. daily, day by day. nightly, night by night, monthly, yearly, one by one, two by two. 211. fisaog, Tj, ov, middle. fisaov TifisQag, aii(fi or nsgt fieaov tjixsQag, dfi(pi, nsQi fieaag vvxrag, fiiaai rvxTsg ijaar, i]8i] nsQi fitaag fvxrug rjaav, mid-day (the middle of the day), about mid-day. about midnight, it was midnight, already it was about midnight. fieaog notafiog, fisaog b notafiog, TO fisaov 70V notafiov, iv ry fisori oixia iafisr, the middle (or intervening) river. the middle of the river. we are in the middle (inter- vening) house. Rem. — jiiaoq an'd (liao? o, like o (lovog, [lovog o, Less. XXV. (94) ; thus. o fiovog viog, fxovog 6 viog, 6 fxEaog norafiog, ftsaog 6 Ttoruftog, 6 nozaiiog jxeaog, the only son. the son alone. the middle river. the river middle, where it is middle, i. e. the middle of the river. 208 greek ollendorff. 212. Exercises. I. Render into English. '0 iviavvoQ. — Udg ivtavrog. — JJuvrtq ot svi- avToL — TovTOV TOV sviavvov. — Ti novs eXt^tv 6 ^TjTcoQ ; — '-EXs§sv on 6 S-iog /uopog sgtI /nsyag. — 01 fisv aya-d'ol ^astaqioi, ol ds xaxol adXcol tlOiv. — ^O l^sv TcarrjQ vvxrbg ijvcOvoXag yqacpsc, ayco da ^jus^ag. — Hots fjX&ov ol ttX&TiTac ; — 'A^cpl fisOaQ vvxrag i]X{)ov. — '-Hdri dficpl f^saov rj^tQuQ fjv OTS TTjv ^Qovrrjv rixovGafztv. — Oi S-rjQiVTul ■d'iiqia ^LaxovGi xaff rju&Qav teal xava vvxtu. — 01 cpiXoi fiftcov tQXOvrac-, ol fx.ev teavd ^ijva, ol ds ^aff tvcavTOV. — fiav %oi-^a]v dccoteei, 6 8s Xvxog cptuyti. — 2v [xsv }ca{f snaativ firiva.) — The shepherds pursue the wolves annually. — It is clear that the stranger has stayed many months. — The middle of the garden. — The fountain lies in the middle of the gar- den. — The middle field lies in the middle of the plain. — About midnight. — Who Avill come about mid-day ? — No- body but my neighbor. — It was already about mid-day when the stranger came. — How long [tioaov xqovov) did he stay? — Six months. — He stayed a year. — He stayed a day and a night. — The nights are not so long as the days. — Some say these things, others those. — I indeed sit, but you run. — We (indeed) pursue, and you flee. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 213. The Relative Pronoun. og, rj, o, who, which, what, (like aXlog.) o vsanag ov oQa, TO nOTTlQlOV ?J(W, al oixitu iv aid >id&J]vtat, axovco a, f-syug. the young man whom I see. the cup which I have, the houses in which they eit. I hear what (things) you say. uy.ov(o navTO. a liyeig, j ^^^^ ^jl ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^_ a-Mvay navxa. oaa Keysig, n&VTig oao,., ^ ^U ^^j^^^ TiavTsg 01 210 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 214. i^tjQig and i^s'^qi, sag, fiiXQi- lovrov tov 1Q0V0V, lA.fXQi tl/jg Qalaaaiig, fUrXQii' ipruv&a, fxiy^Qi Tovrov, fi^XQig oi, IJ.t'X(>iS sansQae, /n'xQi rr,g samQag, fit'xQi zojJtoii fixovov tag. until, lip to, clear to, up to, until this time. clear to, as far as the sea. up to here. up to this. up to where, until where. until evening. until you came. up to this point I heard, until. 215. iv c[) ixQOi'fp), in what time = while, i'cog, so long as, while. ^X€sg iv (p e'j'gacpov, i'litvsg ecog kyQacpof, swg fitsvovfisv, Is^et, you came while I was writing, you stayed while (so long as) I was writing, he will speak so long as we shall stay. £v rovrcp rrp xqovcp, iv TOViqi, in this time, meanwhile, meanwhile. 216. narriq, the father. Drops s in some of its cases and changes the accent. SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. nairiQ N. narsQsg G. naiQog (narigog) N.A.V. narigs G. najigmv U. Tzargi [narsgi.) G. D. natigoiv D. najgaaiiy) A. naTigS, A. naiigag V. rtUTsg V. nazigsg So Tj firirriQ, the mother, ri -dvyatrig, the daughter. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 211 My father and mother. I nairiQ km rj i^jjtijq fiov. nartJQ jiov, xou i] (iritriq. Rem. — Observe Voc. irreg. nonsQ for TiarriQ. See Less. XLI. (153) ; but fiyTeg is regular. 217. (jLiXag, black. SING. N. /isXag (niXawoi fisXav G. fiiXavog fisXai'vrig fisXavog D. [lilarX l-ieXaivri (isXan A. IxiXoLva, fikXaivav (isXav V. fiilas fiiXaiva DDAL. fisXciv N.A.V. fisl&-ps fisXatva fA.sXaV8 G.D. liilavoiv fisXaifaiv PLUR. [xeXdpoiv N. (lil&vsg fieXaivai lisXava, G. fislavaiv lisXaivSiv lieXavKV D. [iilasi{v) pieXatvaig (iiXaai{v) A. [laXavag fiiXaivag fxiXavS. V. lAsXavss fikXaivai fikXciva (Qv&qog, d, 6v, red. 218. Exercises. I. Mender into English. 'O itoqa^ f.isXaQ ioriv.- — ^O xoqa'S, ov Gv iv rtj X^lqI iX^tq ovx ovTco fisXag sOtIv cog 6 iv sxtivrj rri vXrj. — 'O sioqa'S, ovx ovtco fj,s%ag eOtIv cog 6 212 GEEEK OLLENDORFF. xoXa^. — 'H Tov xoXaxog pcaQSla /.dXacva. — iv ra noTTiQiop olvog sqv&qoq sotiv. — ^I fj.tv ef^rj ^Xaiva f-iaXuLva iorcv, rj 8& 6t], igv-dgd. — 'fig fzsXavtQ ovTOc ol xoqaxtQ ! — Ta ftiv qodu a t^ti, 7] xogrj, SQv&Qa sOvt, ra Ss la, /u.t'kavu. — Uoaov XQOvov ifxtivars sttI tov Xocpov ; — 'Efxtivafxiv sti avTOV tag rrjv /S^ovr^v ri',(ovOaf.iiv. — ^Ef^tiva/ntv usxQi' TTJq eansQug. — 01 ■&riQtVTal ra {hriQia f-d^Qi Trig Xl^vr/g 8co)§ovTai.-^—'Ev a vjuaig iyQacptn, rifj-tlg iyyvg Trjg }ia, havefound. " shgrjusiv, hadfoiind. " UQt}y.oi, have said. " si^jjueiv, had said. 214 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 220. Inflection of the Phiperf. Sing. iyeyQ&q)- eiv, eig, ei, eiTOV, £LTt]V. sijuev, eiTs, ' uaav or iaav. I had sent, We had collected, He had already fled, He had escaped, He had come when I was de- parting. ETzsnofxcpsiv. avvsiX6)^sil-iev. tjdrj inecpsvysi. anSTiEcpeiyet. i}.7jXv&ei 018 anyuv. 221. Specimens of the entire Indicative Active. Pres. & Imperf. nifiTia, 'ini^nov, am sending, was sending, Fut. & 1 Aor. Tiifi^ia, snsfiipa, shall send, sent. Perf.&Pluperf. Jj£'7iO|U9oa, msnofitfuv, have sent, had sent. Pres. & Imperil nlnza, Fut. & 2 Aor. nscTovfiai., Perf. & Pluperf. nsmaxa, 'dnmxov, am falling, was falling. ETisaov, shall fall, fell, immojxuv, have fallen, had fallen. Pres. &Impf. iVQlaxia, cvgiaxov, find, am finding ; was finding. Fut. & 2 Aor. ivgriao), svqov, shall find, found. Perf. & Plupf. £i)§>)!]ra, I seek, look for (like qnXsai). P &• T f ^ Sv^'") i^riTsov, am seeking, was seeking. Fut. & 1 Aor. S?jujo-o), efijjTjo-a, shall seek, sought. Perf. & Pluperf. sf^'zijua, £^»ji^j<£jy, have sought, had sought. 222. ei, if. tj ^ig, the nose. SING. DUAL. PLTJR. N. Qis N. Qtvsg G. Qtvog N. A. v. Qivs ■ G. Qivmv D. qTti G. D. ^fyoM' D. ^ial.{v) A. Qtva A. prj'as,' V. giv V. Qiveg SI tavra Xsyu, aoqiog iativ, SI bq)&alfiovg s^si, oipsiai, sloslriXvOsifisv sig trjv oiaiav, s^i-fisv Ix rijg olniag, siaysiv sig tijv v7.i}v. if he says this he is wise, he shall have eyes, he will see. we had entered into the house, we shall go out of the house. I was entering into the forest. 223. Exercises. I. Render into English. rSygagscc rrjv e7j;c6ToXrjv. — Ov tots TOGavTag aTVLGToXag sysyQucpscv oGaq vvv y'syqatpa. — Atdqa- fir]>ea. — 'O nalq i8a8Qafj.r)xsc. — El x-d-sq tdqufzs, peal (also) itaXcv avqiov BqafA.tlTac. — Tov xoqaxa 215 GREEK OLLENDORFF. eaqaxa. — Tov f.uv fj.kXava HOQa^a oipofiat, rov ds Xkvy.ov, ov. — Ovtico tjjv /Sqovttjv dxrixoti-v ovvs TT)v doTQUTcrjv eaQccHScv, ore r7]v ylcpvQav §t£/3rjT£. — 'H8>] 8ii/jS/8>jx(:iT£ ore iycj ev ra ytijTva t)v. — El ^r]T£ig, tvQiGxsig. — El ^rjTrjOi-iQ ttjv ^XaZvav, tVQrioeiQ avTTjv. — '0 tpiXog /nou s^rirrjxsi. rs xal svQri^itt TTjv j;(Xaivcev. — ElXr](p£i.v to -d'rjQiov. — 01 %sovT8Q iTiicfitvytOav. — O Xvxog tjdr] eTrecpsvysi OTS 6 noc/Liriv nQOOrjX^av. — Td ^fjXa nmrti. — Xi)-ig tTiiTiTS ^sv Tcc fiiiXa, ovtvo 8s (but not yet) navra iTtiTircoxai. — "^H qiq. — Uavrtg ol dvd-gconoi fj-iuv ^Iva xal 8vo 6cf)x)'a'Kfzovg e^ovoiv. — 'H tov VKUviov Qig [xaxQa iorcv. — El fzaxuQioi ol aya- ■&ol, d&'kiot ol xaxoi. II. Render into Greek. A nose. — The nose. — A long nose. — The old man's nose is long. — This man's nose is not so long as mine. — I had come. — I had run. — We had written many letters. — We had not sent so many letters as we had written. — I am collecting books. — I am looking for a wedge. — I had not found so many wedges as I had looked for. — I had not drunk so much wine as my friend. — I had writ- ten my letter about mid-night. — The thieves were already entering into the house, when they saw the la- borer. — I hear thunder. — I shall see the lightning. — If we GREEK OLLENDOEFP. 217 hear the thunder, we also (xce/) see the hghtning. — The squirrel will bite the child on the foot. — The cat had bit- ten the colt. — At day-break («^a t^ w^q«) I had sent away (ansnsnoixqieti') the messenger. — The lake is ten stadia distant from the village. FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 224. noa&Kig, how many times 7 how oftenl roauMg, so m,any times, so often, oaaxts (rel.) how many tim,es, as often as. nolla-Aig, many times, often, frequently, ana^, mice, Sig, twice. TQig, thrice, three times. TETQaxig, four times. Ttsrtaaig, five tim,es. i^uKig, six times. Ssx&xig, ten times. How often does he come ? Not so often as I, They come twice a day, Not even once a day, Many times a year, How many times a night ? noaamg eg^stai ; pi\roadMs)6cTdxig iyoi. 5/V SQiovtai trig ^fiBQug. ovds &a| r^ff ^fisgag. noXldxig tov iviaviov. noad,Mg trig vvxto? ; 10 218 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 225. TtQozeQov {ttqo), before, previously. vazsQov, afterward. A little before, A little afterwards or after, Much before, Much after, A long time before. Not many days after, On the day before, On the day after, On the day before these things. On the day after the hunt. Within ten daysj oXi'yov nQoriQOv. bliycp nQorsQOv, (before by a little). Hf/.QOV TIQOTSQOV. oXi'yov vazsQOv. oXiyM vattQov. (liy.QOV VdTEQOV. nolv TZQoregop. tjoAAq) nQOTSQOv (before by much. 7zo).v varsQOf. nolXc^ VGTfQOV. noDS) yjjot'f^ tiqotiqov. [Gr. before by much time.) ov nolhug ij^iQtuii vmSQOv. rfl TJQoaOiv ijueya. Ti] vajSQuia [ijfA.tQn). l7j TIQOTliQUia TOVTCOV. ifi vajtQala 7tjg &>jQas. 226. ij &riqS., as, the hunt, chase oEvzrjg, ov, / 6 d'riQarrjg, ov, \ i]Q Ti]i,, uv, ^ ^^g hunter, huntsman. ■&7](}ua), a, r hunt, am hunting. Fut. &1 Aor. Pres. & Impf &ijQaco a, gdrjoaov, av, I hunt, was hunting. ■OijQaao}, i&rjQaaa, I shall hunt, hunted. &riQmsojj.ai. Perf &Plupf TsOriQaxa, its&rjgdy.siv, have hunted, had hwited, ayQiog, a, ov, wild, fierce. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 219 ■&ijQdaoiiai anb (ncp) Innov, we hunt lions. I shall hunt from a horse =on horseback, we used to go forth to the chase. 227. Exercises. I. Render into English. '0 Xv>eoQ ayqtov son -drjQiov. — 01 vtuviai oiiTOi -driQtVTai tlocv. — Ol ■drigtwal ovtol ■d'tiqa- Olv dcp iTtTvov XiOvvaQ, xal aQxrovg, xcu noXla alXa ■&'r]qia. — IIooaxiQ s^eq^ovtui ol vtavlai S7U rrjv -d-riQuv ; — Kath' rjf.ibQaP i^sQ^^ovrac. — 'Exiivoi jusv dig rov /xrjvog at,t:QxovTai, t^jiitig 8s xaff exudTTjv fjf.i£Qav. — IlQortQov /ucp dtxa^ig TOV ivtaVTOv s^rjiOav, vvv §s (.lovov dig, rj peed (even) ana^ rov svluvtov iiig/ovrui. — JjQcoi fj,sv e^EQ^ovrai, Ttdoav 8s rrjv Tj/usgav ^i]()W()iv. — JJoadxig rrjg vvjerog bQXirac 6 xXiTivrig ; — Jig r] Tolg rrjg vvuvog. — "Yf.itig fzsv oXiyov nQortqov tjX- ■dsTS, r]fj.tlg 8s JA.LXQOV vonqov. — Tfi vOTtqaia rijg driQccg Tr]v yscpvqav 8is^r]f.av. — "TfASig avqiov vr/v ■ddXaOCav 8iu^rjatOi)'£, xal rj^stg ov TtoXXatg rjjLisqaig vOrsqov. 220 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. Render into Greek. I eat and drink. — We eat bread and drink wine. — ■ How often do you eat bread ? — Twice a day. — Not so often now as formerly {mg hqotsqov). — This (man) eats three times a day. — How many times a year does the father write to his daughter? — Many times a year. — Six times a month. — Once a day. — Either daily or monthly. ■ — How often do the young men go out to the chase ? — Formerly (indeed) they went out twice a month, but now only twice a year. — A Httle before. — A little after. — Not long after. — I came .not many days before. — Who will pursue those fierce wild beasts ? — Nobody except the hunter. — The bad (man) is a fierce wild beast. — No wild beast is so fierce as the unjust man [adixog). — Some pursue good (za aya&d), others, evil. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. 228. nsQi, around, about. A Preposition. tisqI tov, 7(p, ToV, (Governs Gen. Dat and Ace.) tif.qI tov, about, concerning. ttiqI 1^, close about. heqI iov, aroutid, about (more loosely, totvard about.) Xt'ym negl rovrcov, ai 7!£Qt 70V noiaixov xa/Aui, I speak about, concerning thesa things. a girdle about the body, the villages about the river. GREEK OLLENDOEPF. 221 229. otKs'oi ofXM, I dwell, inhabit. c^xsov <^Mvv, was dwelling, &c. oi'MVfisv rag YMfiaii, oinovai nsQi Trjv ■OakaaSav, we inhabit the villages, they dwell about the sea. 230. aiKfi (like nsqi) about (lit. on both sides of). dficpi ri]v 'kiiivriv, d/Aqii TLvog leyEig, about the lake. you speak about something. Rem. — hfi(fi is much less common in prose than ncQi. 231. 6 dvriQ, the man. tj yvvrj, the woman. SING. N. dvriQ yvvq G. {dviQog) afSgog yvvatxog D. [dvfQi) dvdgi yvvaixi A. (dviQu) dvdQO, yvvaixa V. avsQ see ndreg (216) yvvai DUAL N. A. V. {dvfQs) uvSqs yvvalM ■ G.D. (^WSQOlv) dvdQOiv PLUR. yvvaiHoTv N. {dvc'geg) avSqsg yvvaixsg G. {ccfSQav) drSqav yvvaixav D. di'dQd(Ti{v ) . yvfai^iXr) A. (dvi'Qdg) avSqag yvvalxag V. {dvt'qeg) dvdQeg yvralxsg Rem. — dvrjQ, a man, in distinction from a woman or a hoy , av&Qianog, a wan, a human being, in distinction from other animals. 222 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 232. snti, , '^ , > since, after that, when, entioi], ) Since you say this, Since tliese things are so, After he had said this he came, When they saw tliis they laughed, As they heard tliis they laughed. After I had written, insl T0V7O Xt'ysii;. ine.iSij (eVf!) juvTCi ovrag f;fH. BTZSiS'rj lavra sAsJej', tikOsv. inei tovi sJdov, iyD.aaar. cog rovz' iixovaav, fytl.aaav. InuSq eysygdcpsiv. Rem. — 0T6 means at the time when. iuu8r\, when, after that, in the order of events. 233. Exercises. I. Render into English. JJtQl rivog dv&qconov rccvra Xsyti:; ; — Utql 60V. — Utgl i/navTov. — Tavra navra ov tuqI tov (your) ddbXcpov, uXXd ■JtiQl Otaurov XtytcQ. — '-'E;(a Tr]v ^Xalvav ■niQl ra e/uavrov ocof^iari. — Uov oi- xovolv oiiTOL ol dvdQtQ ; — IlQoriQOv fiav ntQl rrjv ■d'aXaGOav axovv, vvv 8i iv zoig rifj,tTSQOiQ TttSioig oIhovOiv. — IIoTS 60L TiQoafjXSov ol ^svoi ; — Ovvs p^&sg, OVTH rfi TCQOTtQaia r)Xx)'ov, dXXa rf] avrfj ■qusQa y a7tr]X&ov ol I'hrjoivraL — ^En;il tuvtu ovTCog 't;^tc, r)/.ii7g yaXcoiuiv. — 'Eyrndi) ravra tiQif xag, navra tii i'y(tc. — "ETcad/) 6 Ttoc^iitji' top Xvxop ildsv, hcpvytv. — ^ETvtidtj dvs/j/j 6 ihjQturrjg stiI tov GKEEK OLLENDOKPF. y23 Xocpov, TL eiSiv ; — OvSsy iiSi TiXrjv [xlu^ agxrou. — Jvo cifdQtg. — 'AvrjQ dvrl yvvaLx6ii.—-'Av{hqco- Tiog cevTi dXoyov Qaov. — '-Ozt 6 dvr^q layti, r] yvvrj axovkt. — 'H yvvi] ovx ovrco 6ocptj sCriv cjg 6 uvr]q. 11. Render into Greek. This man. — The man and the woman. — The man and the wild beast. — The man is not so beautiful as the woman. — When the first man saw the first woman, he was happy. — Man is a rational animal. — We speak con- cerning the soiil. — We have cloaks about our bodies. — The hunters were dwelling about the hills. — Since the young man is wise, he is happy. — After I saw the maid- en I wrote a letter to her. — Nobody but the wise is hap- py. — God is propitious to none except the good. — Since you say this [tav-ia) you speak well. — Because the old man is good and wise, all men {ndvieg) admire him. SIXTIETH LESSON. 234. 6, i] oQvii, the bird. SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. oQiTg N. oQvlOsg G. oQiTfyog N.A.V. ogrxae G. CQvi&av D. oQriOi G. D. oQU&oiv D. «pno(()') A. oQiXi'CPoctoQvlOa) A. oQiT&ut; V. oQfii; V. ognOsg 224 GKEEK OLLENDORFF. Note — Barytone substantives in ig whose stem ends in a lingual mute (as oqn&, ilmS) make in prose the Ace, Sing, in v. 235. ri atjScor, the nightingale. G. arjdovog and ai]dovg. D. arjdoi. A. arjdova, &c.like ^iwv. rj j^sXtBcov, ovog, the swallow. D. ^eXidoi, &c. like ^icov. adoo (aeidm) I sing. Imperf. fSor, was singing. Fut. aaofiai, shall sing. 1 Aor. '^aa, sang. 236. [isToi {/xsaog), among. A Preposition. jMsra Tov, Tov, (Governs Gen. and Ace.) fisTo. TOV, rmv, in connection with, among. fiEta TOV, after, next to. fie.T sftov, flStU TaVTtt, fiiT oXlyov, fista fiwQov, aXlog lUT aklov. in connection with me. after these things, after a little (time), one after another. Rem. — |U£T« TOV and avv ra often differ but slightly. Strict- ly, fieja TOV denotes coexistence ; fiilf rifi&v, in con- neclion with us : irhv tS denotes coherence ; avv rifxiy along icith us. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 225 Render into Greek. From the basket, Instead of me, In the chest. On the roof. On to the hill. Into the earth. At [xard) those times. Through the plain, Concerning the old man. About the river. After us. out of the stream. before the time. along with the hunter. at the gates. throughout the region. down the stair-case. to the father. on account of the messenger. (close) about the head. in connection with us. after those days. 6 novo?, ov, labor, toil. tav aya&mv ovSsv avsv jiovov sxofiev, ndvta la aya&a novov fiai}.si 6 &i6g. we have nothing good (none of the good things) without toil. God sells all good things for labor. Note. — novov in the Gen. as price of a thing. 237. u, if. El iirj, if not, unless. el h'ystg, anovm, el )J^eis, duovaoiiai, ■el sXe^ag, ^yiovaa, £( ft}/ leysis, ovx movco, if you speak, I hear. if you shall speak, I shall hear. if you spoke, I heard. if you do not speak, I do not hear. 10* 226 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Observe, jUjJ, iirfitiq &c. for not, none, after u. ovSsig le'ysi, El /itjdtig Isyst, ovdsig axovsi. nobody speaks. if nobody speaks, nobody hears. 238. Rem. — Constructions like the above (i. e. il with the Ind.) imply no uncerimniy, but rather that the case is as supposed, and admit in the apodosis (or answering clause) any appropriate tense ; as, SI ^r]7Stg, EVQiG-ASig, El ravza Xs^sig, aocpog earj, £1 [ir] s^ijzTjxaSjOvj^ £VQi]y.ag, if you seek, you find (and you do seek), if you shall say this, you will be wise (and you will), if you have not sought, you have not found (and you have not). 239. Exercises. I. Render info English. Ovdsv aya&ov avtv novov i^ofj-tv. — '^0 igya- Tr]Q adii jUSTce rov Ttovov.^-OuSilg juaxa^iog eoriv il jLir] (if not, except) juara novov. — 01 egya- TC(t adovai f-itra novov. — 01 OQvtdtq dtl adovOcv. — H fiisv ^kXchcbv rrJQ ta ada, rj 8s drjdoiv, aozi- GREEK OLLENDORFF. 227 Qag- — Oi OQVi&tg uSovaiv, ol fxsv iv rfj vXrj, oi ds fV Tolg atiTtOLC,. — IMiTcc TOi/g OQVL-d-ag, rav qrjTO- Qcov daovaofj-i&a. — Ei aatrac r) drjdav vvxTog, TiavTtg dxovoovrai. — Ei /nrjdilg Xs^si, ovStlg dxovotvac. — Ei /x>] aaovvac at dt/dovig accl at ^th.dovtg, ov8tig ccurcjv dxovGtrat,. — Oi vaaviac adovGi fxtrd rcov xoqcov. — Et Xs^ovOc Travrtg, ovdilg dxovOtrai. — Ei ovrog o Gocpog Xs^it, ol dXkoi TiavTtg dxovGovvat. — '^11 drjdcov TvaGav rrjv vuxrce ada. — To /u&v >ioquxog Oa[j.a, fikXav, fi §s xoXaiiog }fC(Qdia. II. Retider into Greek. Who is singing ? — My father and mother are singing. — My brothers are singing in connection with my sisters. — The nightingale is singing. — The swallow [fiiv] sings by day ^nd the nightingale by night. — If the birds shall sing no longer (/iijyJTi), nobody will hear them. — If the wise man shall speak, all will hear. — If nobody has said these things, all is well (ndvra sv e^Ei). — Unless you shall seek, you will not find. — If the young man writes a let- ter, he sends it. — If he shall seek his cloak, he will find it. — If nobody shall speak, who will hear 7 — If these things are so, all is well.— The boy caught nothing except a peacock and a squirrel. — Nobodyis happy unless he is also (xai) good. 228 GREEK OLLENDORFF. SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 240. Adjectives of two endings of the 3 Declension. acocpQcov, sound-minded, sober, virtuous. SING.. DUAL. PLUR. N. (jwqigojvNeut.abJcpgov G. aaxpgovog D. iTwtpgoiit A. adicfigova a&(fgov V. aSxfgov N. (TOKfgovsg aucpgom N.A.V. adifgove G. (jwcpgovav G. D. aatpgoroiv D. (7Wcpgoai(v) A. aoiqigovag (Tixicpgovii V. awcpgofsg cTco(pgovu So, Bvdaifiwv, prosperous (happy). Tj Ev8ai[4.ontt, as, prosperity, happiness ri aQEtrj, rjg, virtue. rj ao(fia, Sg, wisdom. 6 nkovtog, ov, riches, wealth. i^ aQStijg iativ tj sv8aifiovia, ov^ nlovaiog fiaxdQwg dXX 6 uya&og. from virtue is happiness. not the rich is happy but the good, (i. e. it is not the rich tliat is happy, &c,) GREEK OLLENDORFF. 241. [tdlu, very. aial (also) tor] juaxagiOQ. — Ov/{ sx nXovTOV sOtIv avdacfioviaj aXX sx oocpiag tea), ccQiTrjg. — GREEK OLLENDORFF. 231 OvX ^' '^'^ovoiot tvdaifwvsg sIolv, dXX ot 6acpQ0- vag. — 'O TiXovTog avtv aqtrrig ovdsv t'^ti dyad-ov. — 'O Cgjodga nXovGiog ov 8ia rovro fxaxaqiog io- Tcv. — Haw Ooqjog si. — El navTaTvaGt Gcoipqav fiq, juccXa f-iaxaQcog dv fjg. — El Eii:i.GTo7<.dg ygaipco, TtSfXTtco — El STtcOroXag eygacpov, i'nsfiTioj' dv. — El oiivog 6 nXov'Oiog oocpog ijv^ ■jiavxanaOLV tvSai- /.icov dv fjv. — El ravT dxovG&rac 6 %arriQ, %qo hOTiBQug t]§it. — El vjusig vov ^rjrogog rj^ovGurt, navv dv avrbv idav/iiaGaTS. — ^ETisidrj tig rrjv vXr]v tlGTqk&ouHV, Tcov drjdovav i]xovGafXb.v. — El rj8ov Soj^tv at ^iXcdovsg, rjfzsig dv rj^tovGafj-tv. II. Render into Greek. Virtue alone is happiness. — Virtue is the fountain of happiness. — Who is happy ? — None hut the sober-mind- ed are happy. — The sober-minded and just are always happy. — They are very happy. — If the scholar shall come to the teacher, he will be wise. — He will be very wise. — These roses are exceedingly beautiful. — If I were rich, I should have many books. — If the young man were wise, he would hear the teacher. — If he had heard the teacher, he would not have said these things. — If I had seen the wolf, I should have fled. — The squirrel bites. 232 GREEK OLLENDORFF. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 244. aaxriQ, the star. (Dat. Plur. irreg. like natrjQ.) SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. aazriQ N. aaiiQ^g G. aareQog N. A. V. uaiBQe G. aazsQtor D. aarsQi G. D. aatSQOiv D. a(jr()aCT(()') A. aaTEQoi A. aarsQag V. aazriQ V. dazeQsg So, 6 K);p, «'go?, //le atmosphere, the air. 6 ai&rjf), BQog, the pure upper air, the ether or sky. Exc. Dat. Plur. regular, asQ(}i{v), tti&iQai{v). 6 olqavog, ov, the sky, heaveit. riKiog, ov, the sun. Tj aeXrivi], i]g, the moon. 7j veqieXtj, rjg, the cloud. la^inQog, a, ov, bright, resplendent. X(ilA.nqo, I shine (chiefly, poetic). iXa^nov, ).dfi\po}, sXafiipa, was shining, &c. izETOfiai, I fly. 'Sig XafiTZQog 6 tjXiog .' lovg dazsqag vvAtog OQafisv, ot aoTSQEg nsQi tiji' asXijPTjv 7.djj,novaiv, 6 ijXiog 8id r£q)eXmv Xdfinu, how bright the sun ! we see the stars by night. the stars shine about the moon, the sun shines through clouds. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 233 245. Pres. a/iaQTafm, I err, mistake. Imperf. tjixaQruvor, was erring, used to err, &c. Fut. a[iaQrrjtj 0(10.1, shall err. 2 Aor. rifiaQTov, erred, mistook. Perf. tifidgnjatx, I have erred, have mistaken. Pluperf. rji^aQT^xsiv, I had erred. d tavra Xtjsig, a/iaQTCcvsig, si zavza eXsysg, ri{idqia.veg kv, el tavia sls^a, iqfiaQrov, si tavza sls^a, rijiaqrov uv, if you say this, you err. if you said this, you would err. if I said this, I erred, if I had said this, I should have erred. 246. Even if, even though, nai si. Even though — yet, Y.a\ el — oftag. If even, although, el xal. Not eve7i if, not even though, ov8' si. Yet, nevertheless, ofiag. Even though you are rich, you are miserable. Although I saw the lion, yet I did not flee, ««t el nXovaiog el, aOXiog si. el 'Aai Tov Xsovta sl8ov, ofiwg ovK eqivyov. 247. Exercises. I. Render into English. 01 dOTSQsg. — "£1^ xaXol ol doTSQsg ! — '0 rjXcos Xdfx^nsi iv ra aWsqi, ag fisyag xaX XafZTiQog darrjQ. — "O rjXcog teocl ol doTEQsg did tov al-d'sqog TtOQivovrai. — '0 /nsv tjXcog r'j/usqag "kd^ntc, rj 8s 234 GE,EEK OLLENDORFF. atXfjvrj teal ol ccarsQiQ, vvxtoq. — 'O /.il-v r'jXLog did roil aid'kQOi TtoQkvtvai, ol ds '6Qvi.{)tQ did roii a'cQoq TiETOVTac. — MsXatva vtcpiiXr]. — Al iv ra ubQL vtcphXccL Tvavv fA-sXaival alGcv. — Ov vvv ovtco fj'cXaival tlocv aQ oXlyov nQOvtQOv. — El XafXTiQog tOTLV 6 riXioQ, XafiTiQol hgl xai ol aOrsQkQ. — Kut tl XufxTtkL 6 rjXLOQ, Ofxag ov iiavra drjXol. — El hou Tiavra ravva Xbytig, ov/, dfxaQTavnQ. — "^0 Stbq ovQavov olxkl. — ^0 S-tog /lcuvoq ouTton d/uaQrdvti. — El ravva Xs^tic, d/uaQrtjarj. — El Xt^OjUtv ore j.(at;aQioc ol nXovOcoi, djuuQvr^oOf.ifd'a. — El rovg dovsQag eo^qav, f^d^Qe Ttjg tco dv STiOQivofirjv. — El iiTvov (had said) on ol >caxo\ tvdai/j.ovsg tlocv, Tj^iaQTOv dv. II. Render into Greek. A beautiful star. — The stars are exceedingly bright and beautiful. — No star shines around the sun. — The sun goes alone through heaven. — Nothing is so beautiful as a star. — If the stars were shining {slufinov), we should find the road. — Even though the stars were shining, we did not find (oij evQCfisj') the road. — Unless there had been (d fv] ijSai') clouds in the air, we should have seen the sun. — The sun did not shine through the clouds. — Even though you say this, you do not err. — Not even though Ave are rich, are we happy. — If I had written such things, I should have exceedingly erred. — The birds do not fly in the ether, but in the atmosphere. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 235 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 248. TtaQo., by the side of. A Preposition. naqa. xov, rtjj, rov, (Governs Gen. Dat. and Ace.) 1. naqa, tov, from the side oi^from (with persons). rik&s nuQ ijjiovj ri nag i]ftap iniaTolrj, riKOvaa ■zavza naqa yiqoviog, he came from me. the letter from us. I heard this from an old man. 2. naqa, tS> by the side oi=by, with [chiefly with persons). litvu flag £/iOt, naq fj/xTv Tav&' ovrag s^st, naqa. nasi (Jityag, fiivm aw aoi naqa r(p narqi, aw aoi, (isza aov, naqa aoi, he stays with rae, (at my house.) with us these things are so great with (i. e. in the estima- tion of) all. I stay with you at my father's. along with you, in connection with you. beside, by you ; where you live^ {apud, ch'ez.) 3. naqa lov, (a) toward the side o{=to, toward. (6) along side of = along, during, by (only of things). . (c) along side oi=in comparison with, be- yond, in violation of. (a) eqynuai naqa as, yqdcpco naqa 77jv dvyaiiqa, (6) naqa rov norafjov, rijv bSor, I come to you. I write to my daughter. along, by the river, the road. 236 GREEK OLLENDORFF. naga rovtov rov ^govov, naqa, ztjv &rjQav, (c) nuQa, Tovza, naqa xa. aXka ^wa, naqa to dixaiov, naqa rovg vonovg, during this time, during tlie chase, beyond, besides these things, in comparison with other ani- mals, beyond, in violation of justice, in violation of the laws. 249. ano 70V, m rov, avti rov, nqo rov, iv r^, aw T(j), elg rov, ava rov, dia rov, Sia rov, xaza rov, Kark rov, fisra rov, fisra rov, neqi (aixcpi) rov, nsql ra~) nsqi rov, izqog rov,, naqa rov, naqa rw, naqa rov, (away) from the. out from the. instead of, for the, before (for) the. in the. (along) with the. into the. up, throughout the. through, by means of the. on account of the. down from, against the. at, according to the. in connection with the. next to, after the. concerning the. (close) about the. around about the. to the. from the (only with persons). by, with the (with persons). to, toward; along, during, be- side ; in comparison with, beyond, in violation of the. GREEK OLLENDOEFF. 237 250. 6 vofiQs, ov, the law. naqa^aivw, I transgress (go beyond or aside from). TtuQEQy^ofitti, come to ; come, go by ^ pass. x naqsifjii {naqd, and sifxi am) I am, present. !taQf'^t]g rovg idfiovg, 6 QIJZOOQ TzciQiiX&sr, nuQsX^lv&sv 6 ^Qovog, aoi naQsaovtai, Kara rovg vojiovg, you transgressed the laws, the orator came forward, the time has passed by. they pass us by. they will be present with you. according to tlie laws. 251. to vSaQ, (stem v8ar) water. SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. vSa>Q N. ^.dara G. vSurog N.A.V. vdars G. vSdrcav D. vSarX Q. D. iiddtoiv D. 'iSaat{v) A. v8aQ A. v3tx.Ta V. vdwQ V. idata TO yaXa (stem yaXaxr) milk. Gen. ydXaxTog, Dat. PI. yuXa^i(v). TO fieXt (stem fiEhr) honey. Gen. [isXiTog Dat. PI. fiiXtaX{v). nivco vSmQ, vSarog nivco, to vScog nivco, tov vdatog nivm, ia&i, nlnT-ia, may fall, &c. 2 Aor. e-nsa-ov, nia-a, may fall. Perf. TtiTiJoix.a, mmtuK-a, may have fallen. Rem. — The above shows the formation of the Subj. Act. It ends in w. The Augment of the Aor. is dropt, that of the Perf continues through all the Modes ; thus, Pres. lafi^avco, lafA^dvco. 2 Aor. 'i-la^-ov, Id^-m. Perf ellTjcpd, elXi^tf-a). Pres. 1 Aor. Perf fisvm, (isvm. s-ft£ivd, fieiv-co. fj.ifii'vr]-^d, [/.snerijH-o). ^r3^ Observe that the 1 Aor. Subj. is sometimes lilte the Fut. Ind. as 1 Aor. Subj. and Fut. Ind. ygaf-co. — But from axova Fut. Ind. axoiicrofiat. (not axovaw) 1 Aor. Subj. axovau). Rem. — The Imperf and Pluperf are found only in the Ind. The Fut. is wanting in the Subj. and Imper. 255. sjfit, am. Subj. a, may Sing. T a, 1?. I Dual. r/TOV, Tjrov. Plur. WfiBV, nre, mai{v) GREEK OLLENDORFF. 241 So, all Subj. in m, thus, ■yQucp- ^ m. V?> 'C. jQaea xal GvXkk^ti >ea\ i'StTui. — Ttg navTa TuiiTa Tcc OVHU tcavbcpaytv ; — OvTog 6 ■d'rjquTrjg, eTthi-Srj oLTio Tiig ■d'rjqag tloi]'k&tv. — IloXXdt xtqaaoi tiOcv iv TO} TOTico TOVTa. — 01 xEQuaoL ova iv Tc5 lit \ t ejud fcijTVCJ tioiv, dXX iv tw oa. 246 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. Render into Greek. This experienced shoemaker. — How many shoe- makers are there in the village ? — Not so many shoe- makers as physicians. — The father sends his son to {ngog, naQoi) the sPioemaker. — The shoemakers live {okoloi) near the river. — The parents of the shoemaker live in the village. — The horseman sits on his (the) horse. — The horseman came as a messenger from the king. — This boy has eaten many cherries. — He will not eat so many cherries as figs. — The king of this country dwells near the sea. — As long as the king was sober-minded he was happy. — The wicked (xukol) pursue one another, that they may harm each other. — God is a good and great king. — There is no king except God. — God is one. SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 262. Subjunctive of Contract Verbs. oQaco oQw, I see. Ind. Subj. Pres. OQna oga, ogaco OQca. 2 Aor. Bldor, i'doo. Perf. SKQCci^a sojquxw. Sing, ogaco optu, ogiirjg ogag ogar; oga. tJ^^i- ogdrjzov ogazov bgi'ujzov ogarnv. Plur. ogdcofiev ogmfisv, bgdrj%s ogazs, ogdcaai{v) ogaiaiiv) GREEK OLLENDOEFF. 247 263. giiXfioj, cpiXa, I love. Ind. Subj. Pres. 1 Aor. Perf. qptJ.e'w (fiXw, icf.ii.rjaa, TiecpiXijxa, q:i2.s(o (ftXw. (filijaco. Sing, (filim (fiXco, ^li-srjg qnlris, (fiXey q)ily. Dual. q)iXs>]TOv (pil/jzov, ifilsijTOV qiili]tov. Plur. qnXea^sv qiilwi^ev, }X6(o dr;Xm, T show. Ind. Subj. Pres. 1 Aor. Perf. iSrjlmaa., dedijXaixa, Srfkom Srikm. dtjlcoao}. Sing. SriXoat dtjla, dijlnyg dijXoig, drjloy dijloi Dual. 8i]Xdr]Tovdi]lmtov,diiX6i]Tov dr/Xmzov. Plur. d/jXom/isv 8^7.afisv, di^Xorjze drjXazs, d>]X6aiat{v) 8ijXwai(_v). 265. idv, riv, av, (si av) if (only with the Subj.) sav sX&ri, oxpO[xai olvtov, i]v aocpos yg, /xaxaQiog say, av isyijg, a-Aovaojicu, if he come, I shall see him. if you be wise, you will be happy, if you speak, I shall hear. Rem. — lav, i]v, av (from si and the Modal Adv. av). are all different forms of the same mode, and used exclusively with the Subj. The conjunction «V, if, (si, av) must therefore be carefully distinguished from the simple Modal Adv. av which is a part of it. 9 248 GREEK OLLENDORFF. tCS" Observe «V, if, commonly begins the clause, av Adv. never. av Xiyrjg, ileyov av, el — av naqrig, Xe^stg, sXsysg av, si tiaqijg, if j'on speak. I should speak if— if you are present, you will speak, you would speak if you were present. 266. idv, {rjv, av) with Subj. implies doubt and inte- rest in a practical question. av G03(pQ(av y, q,i7.ijaco aizov, iocv T7]v flalvav evqw, ^|oo, if he be virtuous, I shall love him. if I find my cloak, I shall come. 267. Recapitulation. (a) si with Ind. implies that the thing is so. (b) si with a past tense of the Ind. followed by av with a past tense of the Ind. implies that the thing is ?iot so. (c) edv (^v, av) With Subj. implies doubt and interest as to whether the thing is or will be so. a) SI Sljll, (0) SI 7]]' — av, (c) sav to, if I am. if I were, in that case. if I be. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 249 (a) eI (lovog katai, oxpofiai avzoi; il fAOVog ijv, (idov avrov, (b) SI (toi'ot; r,v, imQcov kv avTov, £1 [lovog r^v, eldop av avior, (c) av uovog 11, oHmfttti aviov, lav fjij i^ovos fi, ovK oipo- fiat avrov, if he shall be alone, I shall see him. if he was alone, I saw him. if he were alone, I should see him. if he had been alone, I should have seen him. if he be alone, I shall see liim. if he be not alone, I shall not see him. Note. — English usage commonly overlooks many of the nice distinctions of the Greek. Especially it con- founds the Pres. Ind. with the Pres. Subj. and Fut. Ind. thus, u i'g;(iTai, oQci avTov, if he comes, I see him (and he does). el ijUh oijiojxai aviov, if he shall come {commonly, if he comes), I shall see him. av ei.S-7], cupoftai, if he come {commonly if he comes), I shall see him. For the sake of clearness we shall adhere to the Greek structure as closely as possible ; thus. si ravra laysi, afiafjiavsi, SI javra ?.«|£t, a/xaQzrjastai, av Tavia As/;;, anaqzriastai, if he says this, he errs. if he shall say this, he will err. if he say this, he will err. 268. Exercises. I. Render into English. {a) si with Ind. implying that the case is as supposed. si "]^si 6 vsaviag, sarai iva Hsgdtnn ia&irj. si aSovatv ol OQviOsg, rjfisig dsi aKOvofisr. si ^Qovztjv axovaoi^ai, aal (also) oi/)Oft«t r^v aarqaniiv. 11* 250 GREEK OLLENDORFF. «f Kui //.elairai ai rtcfelai, oficog Xdfinu Si aviwv ^ uarQamj. SI trjv eTziaroVrjv tyqatpctg, xat tni/itpag avt^v. « avxa svQi'iasi 6 nai^, ndvia sderai. ii ToTg oqt&aX/xoig OQaftev, axovofxsv joTg dtaiv. El (ir) Xafi'ipu rjXiog, ovdsv 6\p6jis&a, u Tig TULvra, siqtjxs, fiaKa aoifog sativ. SI rilOs "lOeg 6 tsfog, ^^si xcu avqiov naXiv. (b) El — ar, with past tenses of the Ind. implying that the case is not as supposed. eI naqtiv, scoqcov av lov Isovza. 6 Xi&og, el £v nvQi ly.siro, ovx kv sXa^nsv. El zrjV yeqivQav die§rj o innsvg, ovx av Eig rov noTctfiov knsaev. tig om av iysXaaev, ft 6 axiovQog rov natda sdaxev ; nig oi'A av sysXa, si rovrov tov tucov smga; si ioTZEQa ^v, Tjftsig av sv ty atoa ixa&rjfisQa. s'l nsxQi Trig sansQag e/isivag, sXafiipsv av i] aeX'qvt]. (c) idv, ijv, dv with Subj. implying doubt, &c. av avQiov TittQtjg, tov XsovTa oipy. idv nsarj tj ;(im'j', ov noXvv f()ovov xsKTsrai eni Tijg yrjg. iav TiaQa tijv vvy.ra adtxxTir at drjdoveg, dxovaofts&a rjfieig. ijv sXOrj J/ HOQt] Eig tov nijuov, QoSa xai la aii.Xs^si. ar XdfiTzaaiv oi doTSQsg did tUv vscpsXmr, ^"i'v^ xaXij eaTat, xav [even if xal dv) to. &rjQia tov &rjQ8V7)jv oipszai, oi^tag oil (fsp^srai. m vsavia, dv liv&QaTiov t^rrjg, dvxlQconov xai EVQrjCfsig. w Tiid, dv acoqjQcov rjg, xui sarj fiaxagiog. ov^ uv (not even if) ndvv nXuiiatog i]g, uvsv uQEii^g svdaifioiv ksri. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 251 II. Render into Greek. If these things are so, the man is wise.— If these things were so [ovTmg d/^ev) the woman would be alto- gether happy. — If these things be so {ovtag f^v) the king will send a messenger to the horseman. — The wo- man is not happy because she is beautiful, but because she is virtuous.— Why in the world has the shoemaker come into this place ? — That he may collect books and hear the orators. — If the orator shall speak, I shall hear him. — If the orator were speaking against my parents, I should not hear him. — If the teacher speak concerning virtue and wisdom, I shall be present. — After these things, what will the orator say ?— He will say that the rich alone are happy.— This bad king is rich indeed, but miserable. — If the horseman were rich he would not sell his horse. — If those things be so, the boy will laugh. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 269. rj noltg, the city. SING. DUAL. PLUH. N. nolig N. n6Xsig(fT.7i6XE£g) G. noXsag N.A.V. nolss G. noXsaiv D. nolu G. D. jioleoiv D. n6).sc!i(r) A. noliv A . noXiig (fr. nolBag) V. noli V. noliig So, 6 ocpig, the serpent, i] Kong, the dust. 252 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Accent. — In cwg and ^lav, a is short in reference to accent. ij !z6u, dg, the grass. 270. v!z6 {vn , vcp) under. A Preposition. vno rov, tig, top, (Governs Gen. Dat. and Ace.) 1. vTio rov, under, more commonly, /) ofn under, by. under the earth. I loose horses from under the yoke, they are admired by me. vno rijg yiig, VTtO ^vyOV l!Z7lOVg 5.1/0) davnat,ovtai (Pass.)^;i' siiov, 2. vno tai, under, close under, at the foot of. vno j'i) siaiv, vno 7^ ^ogjqj, they are under the earth, close under, at the foot of the hill. 3. vno tor, motion under, to the foot of. TQiim vno T?]v rgdns^av, vno ibv Xoqiov tjX&ov, I run under the table, they came under =to the foot of the hill. ano Toil, away from the, ix rov, out from the. avxl rov, instead of^ for the, ngo tov, before, for the. ey TM, in, among the, el? rov, into the. criiv j&, along with the, fiiToi tov, in connection with the. ava TOV, over, throughout the, ngog tov, to the. Sia TOV, through the, dia tov, on account of the. x«r« Toil, down from, against the. XKTK TOV, according to, (at, by) the. /xcTct TOV in connection with the, fisra to>', next to, after the. nsgl («|Uq5s) tov, concerning the. nsi/l TO), close about the, Jifpt tov, around, about the. sTTi TOV, on the, iiri tw, close on the, inl tov, on to the. GREEK OLLENDOIIFF. 253 naga tov, from beside the, naga to"), by the side of, beside the. jiaga xoV, to, toward ; along, during ; in comparison ofj beyond the. V710 Tov, under, fi-om under, by the, vnb toi, under, close under the, vno tov, motion under. 271. With Ind. With Subj. < ors, when. fTzmdij and inn, after that, when, since. ] £03?, as long as, until. [ fiiXQ'S and ftexQi, until. ozav {org, liv), when. ineiddv {fneid^, av), when, after that. indv [inei, av) " " fcoff «)', so long as, until. fi^XQ'^ aj/, until. ore sQ^itai, oiav i"g (not sQiriiai), ors, insi8)j i^X&sv, ozav, ETiBidav sl&ri, ozav i^rjTtig, svQ'^asig, xa&rtaofiai scag Is^stg, xaOrjOoixai ewg av i.syrjg, sjisrov soog {fsxe'?) V^&SS, fievm sag av siOyg, OTE ^^Et f.lg rrjv noliv, oipoixai, insidav sX&'i] sig vriv nohv, o\fjofiai, when he comes, when he may come, when, after that he came, when, after he may (shall) have come, when you shall seek, you shall find, when you (may) seek, you shall find. I shall sit so long as you shall speak. I shall sit so long as you may speak. I stayed until you came. I shall stay until you may (shall) have come, when he shall come into the city, I shall see him. when, after he shall have come into the city, I shall see him. 254 GUEEK OLLENDOEFF. 272. Rem. — iav, orav, inudiiv, eag liv, Sec. with the Aorist Subj. denote a completed act, and as the Subj. generally refers to future lirae, it then becomes = to a Perf. Fut. shall have (may have). orav svgrjTS, if he shall (may) have come. when you shall have found, after we shall have seen, until they shall have come. 273. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'Ors sig rrjv noXiv fjXS-ov, iiSov rbv /3a6c%sa. — "ETTSidav tig tt]v noXiv tlei-'kd'a^tv, rov ffaGiXi-a dtlj6fxi:-&cc, — "Ecog av rj aiXovQog vno rfi TQans^rj feSTjrac, ovdsva drj^srai. — ^Enaidav ol iTCTttTg tov noTUfj.ov 8ca/3coai, ttjv vno ra Xo(pa noXiv oipov- rai. — '-Eag av adcoOcv at ^tXcdovag, rj/uug avvov (here) fzivovf.itv. — "Ecog 6 ocpcg iv rfj noa txtcro, navvag tda^vtv. — 'O OxoXibg ucpcg vno ra )ui)cp fcklrai. — O ocpig xoi'iv io<i. — "-'Ecog oiirog 6 ocpig Ev TYj xovsc xtlasTai, itavTug xava rovg no^ug drj^srai. — Ecog av Xa[.ntri 6 r/Xiog, tooovtov ^qovov rifttlg ra ■O'tjQia ^Lco^ofit-d'a. — ^H aikovQog vno ti]v TQant^av dthQafiiqxsv. — '-Orav XsyaOiv ol qrjTOQtg, TOTS dxov60fj.k&a. — 'SI vaavla, tcog av oacpgcov j/g, o -dtog iXscog eOrat 6oi. GREEK OLLENDOEFF. 255 II. Render into Greek. The city. — The great city. — The great city lies undei* the hill. — It lies in the midst of the plain. — The city is ten stadia distant from the river. — The squirrel is running under the table. — The large rock lies at the foot of the tree. — The serpent lies in the grass, or in the dust, or under a stone. — The serpent has poison under his tongue. — The tongue of the serpent has not so much poison as that of the flatterer.^ — The poison of the serpent lies in his tongue, but that (6 Si) of the flatterer in his soul. — If the serpent lies in the grass, he bites. — When the boy shall have seen the serpent, he will flee. — As long as the scholar may have money he will collect books. — The shepherd will stay until he shall have seen the wolf. SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 274. Ind. Pres. faiQm, I rejoice. Imperf. s^aiqov, I was rejoicing, used to rejoice. Fut. y^aiQriam, shall rejoice. 2 Aor. ix&Qiiv, (Pass, form) I rejoiced, Subj. xo^Q^> fjg, &c. may rejoice. Perf. }t£)^dQ7]xu (ne][dQi]ixai),have rejoiced. vaioco TovTOig, ovotvt ovico )[aiQSig ag aya- &oig q^lloig, el zaiiza Xe'isig, imq-qaa. I rejoice in these things. You rejoice in nothing so (much) as in good friends. if you shall say this, I shall re- joice. 256 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 275. 'i8m, TQf/CO/tSV, let me see. let lis run. let us not come down. Rem. — The Subj. is used in the 1 Pers. Sing, and Plur. for exhortations, &c. fitjSsig, ftr]8sfJia, ^ijdir, no one, nobody, nothing: lxi]8Ev6g, &c., like ovdsd;. Rem. — /iTjStlg differs from ovdiic: as jirj from ov. 276. Rule. — In negative commands, precepts, (fee, the Aor. Subj. is used instead of the Aor. Imper. firjSslg yQci-ipri, firj tavra AtS?;?, jxtjdsnozE fii]d'tv xkxov Xs^rjg, do not write. let no one write. do not say these things. never say any thing evil. 277. 6 niXsxvg, the axe. SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. nAsKvg N. 7zs)Jxsi? (fr. Tzeltaseg) G. Tzeh'xsag N.A.V. neXe'xee G. neXf'xsair D. 7iilt'y.Ei G. D. nelay.iow D. 7isXt'xeai{v) A. niXey-tiv A. neltxEig V. nilsy.v V. Tisliy.sig GREEK OLLENDORFF. 357 rfftra (xo'/rra)), F cut. Ind. Sllbj. Pres. tffxva), am cutting, &c. tijiva, may be cutting. Imperf; hifivov, Fut. tefia, 2 Aor. hufiov, zafim. Perf jeT/xijutt, TS/fOjuro. Plupl! izsT[X^HSlV, 278. o(T7(ff (o? T?ff) whosoever., whoever. N. G. D. A. Sin o,ri. oarig, ring, oviivog, Jjsrifog, ovztvog, o)zin, rjziH, cpziti, Att. OTOV, 0T1]g, 070V. oTcp, otri, orcp. Oftivu, rjvnva, o,ti, &c. og and ug, declined throughout. oa7ig Tavra leysi, ovTiva aya&ov oqa, qtum, whosoever says these things, whomsoever I see good, I love. 279. Indirect Interrogatives. Direct. Tig ; who ? ndaog ; how much ? noXog ; of what sort ? nov ; where ? nots ; when ? Indirect. ostig, who. OTzoaog, how much, bnoiog, of what sort, onnv, where. Subj. onov av. onots, when. " onoiav. 258 GREEK OLLENDORFF tig satir ; f^rarrei,' oazig saziv ; noting ; oh h'^ca bnoaog, nov slniv ; iQmTco onov siatv, noaov Tzoyltig ; sQcoTa bnoaov ncolsTg, who is it 1 do you ask who it is? how much ? I shall not say how much. where are they ? I ask where they are. for how much do you sell 1 he asks- for how much you sell. 280. oang av, og at'. ivhosoever (with Subj.) Whoever may say this, Whomsoever I may see, Every one who, All who, All that may be good I love, Wherever T may be, Whatever you may say. oang av tovto 'ktyri. ov av dpoo. f/ r/ Tzaa 007 ig or oaog. ndvTtg onot (not olzireg). ndvrag, oaoi av ayaOoi coai, wila. OTZOt; av a>. oaa av liyrig. 281. Exercises. I. Render into English. XaiQa. — Ov fiovov iyco, dXXa feed TtcevvtQ ^aiQOVOLV. — 'O dyadog rolg dyad'olc, ^^a'lQkL. — f.itv ccya&d^ toTq uyaSoig j/aigkc, 6 8s xaxb; ro/g xaxoTg. — TLl ococpgcov ))v 6 vto;, ocpo^QU dv ty^^aiQtv 6 7tUTr]Q. ^".^2 ViUVlU, flt]7C0Tt fXlfikvl XUHCb ^UQYfi. — -Ootiq T(p xaxa ^aiqtL, dxhXcoQ eoriv. — Ti iv GREEK OLLENDORFF. 259 rfi x^iQl t^iiQ ; — nlXixvv i'xoo. — '0 SQ-ydrtj^ ts/uvhc §vXa ra ■Jih'ksxti. — Ta f^iv TvtXsxic ^uXu rt/Liti, T(p 8s Ocpt/vl o^to&i. — -Ooa ccv ^vXa bqa o rt^vi- rrjg, ravva refzal te xccl G/ioti. — "Ico/Liiv. — Tqt/^co- fttv. — MP/ ravTU la dsv^Qa (>X^(^fl ^'P ittX&xti. — Mrjdiig fir/TTOTS firj^sv s^axov Xs^rj. — T/'g ioviv 6 Sivog y — 'Eqcotco Ot oOTcg sariv 6 i&vog. — 'Eqcotu 6 Tcalg OTCov oixtt 6 nXovOLOg tjxnoqog. — JJovi- rik&tg ; — M^ Xs^r]g ottots rjX-d'ig. — Jta ravrcc ovx ivufiov TO dsv^QOv, OTi ovdkva tl^ov nhXixw. II. Render into Greek. Let me see the axe. — Let us always pursue just things (res Bt'xaia). — -Young man do not pursue what is evil (to xamv). — Never say any thing evil. — Whatever you may say, I shall hear. — All who shall be present, will say the same things. — Whomsoever the king may see just, he loves. — For how much has the young man sold his cloak ? — For much money. — He will not say for how much. — Let no one take this axe into his (rJ/v) hand. — Do not split wood with this axe. — Who asks how much milk I drink ? — Nobody asks how many (onSaa) apples and cherries the boy has eaten. — If I had an axe I should cut this stone. — I threw the axe under the table. — Not under the table, but on to the seat. — On to what seat ? — On to the one in the porch. — The cat lies under the seat. ■ — I rejoice in these things. — Who does not rejoice in good friends ? 260 GREEK OLLENDORFF. SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 282. T;3vg, pleasant, sweet. SING. N. ijSvg ^Sfta r,8t G. ijShg rjdHilg rj8Eog D. jjSsc rjSua rj8ei A. rj8vv rfinlav 'ij8v V. ^8vg DUAL. rfii N.A.V. ^dh Tidsid i]8e8 G. D. 7]8hip tjdeiaiv PLUR. ri8toiv N. fidiig riSuM Tj8i'a G. 7]St(X>V tjdsimv I'lSt'cov D. r,8fai{v) rfieiatg ii8i(!i(v) A. riSdg ridsiilg rfitoi V. ijdeig ijSsLUi rfiiS, So, ylvy.vg yXvHEia ylvxv, sweet. Tayvg §Qadvg ^aOvg o^vg TOLfflCt, ^QaSeia tayv, swift. §Qa8v, slow. §a9v, deep. oJi5, sharp. svQvg nlarvg SVQEia nlareia svQV, wide. TtXatv. broad. sv&vg svOsta evOv, straight 283. o^vv i'yo} TzAexvv, TOP oivv ttsXexvv exco, o^vv lyco 70V tieXe'avv, 70V tteXexw o'^vv e-j^o>, E)[(0 O^VV 70V TTeXeKW, I have a sharp axe. I have the (or my) sharp axe. I have my axe sharp. GHEEK OLLENDORFF. 261 307. Rule — The Adj. when not immediately preced- ed by the Art. distinguishes the substantive not from an- other object, but from the same object in another condi- tion ; thus, but, I^M T'qv fiikawuv ^Xatrav, I have my cloak black (not white). I have my black cloak (not my vrhite one). 284. So of clauses. OQm zijv iv tri olxia &vqav, oqa iv rg oixia 7r]P ■dvQav, Qixpca triv vno rg ZQaneX'Q (KfoXqav, qixpai ti]v acfoiqav vno zrjv iqaniQav, I see the door (which is) in the house. I see the door in the house (not any where else). I shall throw the ball (which is) under the table. I shall throw the ball under the table. 285. fiU, sweetly. Tidecos, with pleasure, gladly, taxi, quickly, swiftly, ^qadmg, slowly. ' straightway, immediately. sv&v, aoqiag. wisely. sv&iig slg rag xuqag sXa^sv, sv&sTa ri odog, 01 oQVi&sg tjSv aSovaiv, Tuvta Tjde'mg dxovm, he straightway took into his hands. the road is straight. the birds sing sweetly. I hear these things with plea- sure. 262 GREEK OLLENDOllFF. 286. 6 ^oJc, the ox. r\ ^ovi,; the cow. SING. DUAL. PLUS. N. ^ovg N. §6Eg G. §o6g N.A. V. §6s G. ^owv D. j3ot G. D. j3oot> D. fiovai'lv) A. j3oZj/ A. §nig {^6ag) V. ^05 V. (losg 287. nqiv, before, sooner. ng'iv ri, before, sooner than (chiefly with Inf.) oil TlQOadtV TIQIV, 1 ov nQozcQov — TZQLv, > not before, not until (with Ind.) ov — nqiv, 3 oh — nqiv av, not before, not until (with Subj.) He did not depart before (until) J "^ "f°^r. ^"~^^^'' "^'^ ^^- I came, > ' • = ~i o. ' ii o > ' ' ( OVH anljlxTS, 7TQIV 7jK0ov fJ'O), He will not escape before I ovu a770(f)sv^>:itti, nqiv iiv catch him, la^as. P3^ Observe, !mii7^up to the time when, I'm;, fii/Qiq. not until = not sooner than, ov Tigoa&ev — nglv, ov nqiv. He stayed until I came. He did not depart until, before I came. They will not depart until= be- fore, I come. ffistfsv ecag, fis^Qig rjX&ov. ov TIQOTSQOV a7ZI]l&e, 7TQIV rfk- &or. ovx aniaai tzqiv av 'il&m. greek ollendorff. 263 288. Exercises. I. Render into Eiiglish. rXvxvQ oivog. — 'Hdiicc (pavrj. — 'H ttjs drjSovQ (pcovrj ovx ovrcog rjBtia ionv cog rj Or]. — "^0 va^ug iTiTtog. — 'O ^QaSvg /3ovg. — 'O /uiv innog Ta/^vg, 6 ds /3ovg /3(jceSug soriv. — 'O dvrjQ t'^tc tov oti-Xtxvv o^vp. — O Gog %k'kt>!vg ov^ ovrag o^vg sotiv ijog 6 TOV aqyuTOv. — Uorufj-bg ^cc&ug. — "^0 norafibg ^a&vg TS ftczi tvqvg. — 'H naq i]f.uv "kifiviq ov^ oiivco TiXuTaiu aoriv ug rj ■muq vulv. — 'ff fxsv 686g tv&tia, 6 8s norctfzog 6xoXiog sotiv. — Uou rrjv ^ovv haqaxag j — ^^v rfj fityaXr] vof.iri. — "H Xifxvrj ^ sp ravrr] rfj /^aqa f^aka ^a&tla ioviv. — Al drjSovsg rjdv a8ovOc naGav rrjv vvxra. — 01 innoi Ta^scog rqs^oiJOiv. — Ou nqoo&tv rovg oqvi-O'ag rjxovGafitv.! %q\v eXaf.ixpsv fj tag. — Ov Gcpodqa ^acqrjGo) rcqlv uv oi (piXot tXi)aGiv. — Oc mTtttg tov jSai^vv noraf-iov 8ia,8fjG0VTat. — Olvog ov}( ovrco yXvxvg sotiv ag yaXa r} i/daq. II. Sender into Greek. Swift horses. — Horses are swift, but oxen slow. — The horse is not so swift as the lion. — The birds sing sweetly. — I hear this nightingale with pleasure. — I drink sweet milk with pleasure. — This lake is neither so broad, nor 264 GREEK OLLENDORFF. SO deep as the sea. — The man has his axe sharp. — A swift horse, a wide river, and a straight bridge. — The cows ■walk slowly. — The messenger from the king (o nuQa rov ^aa.) will cross the straight and broad bridge. — I did not see the large and beautiful city until (= before) I crossed the river. — You will not see the city until (= before) you shall have come on to the hill. — You speak these things wisely. — ^If the orator always spoke so wisely, I should hear him with pleasure. — Let no one ever say that the wicked (o« aa-Aoi) are happy. SEVENTIETH LESSON. 289. Comparison of Adjectives. The comparative commonly ends in reQog, a, ov, G. ov, ag, 6cc. The Superlative in larog, ij, ov, G. ov, ijg, &c. v\pi]l6g, high, lofty. vxpijloTSQog, higher. v\pr]X6tciiog, highest. So, fxSyt-Qog, QOTSQog, gozazog, long, longer, longest. fiiH-Qog, Qozegog, Qotatog, small, smaller, &c. "kafin-qog, QOziQog, Qozazog. levx-og, oziQog, ozazog. dlxai-og, ozsQog, ozatog. GREEK OLLENDOKFP. 265 Adj. in Off \vith short penult malce meQog and oirarog. croqcoi,', aoqimrfgog, aoqiwrarog. nloiioXog, nlovaiwjiQog, ni.ovamzu.tog. So, OKoltog, crooked, a&liog, wretched, fta-AaqXog, happy. a8i>cog, unjust. 290. Rule. — The Comparative is usually followed by the Gen. nlovaicoTCQog i/xov, jj oJ/ olnia ievAOit'Qa iaii rijg ij ifiij ftixQOtfQa sari ilqg lov latqov, richer than I. your house is whiter than mine, mine is smaller than the physi- 291. Where the Gen. is inadmissible, the comparison is made by ?/, than. I am wiser now than yesterday, You have a higher house than I, Richer in gold than silver, aocfiwriQog cifii rvv ^ e^&f'g. av eymg vxpi]lo7SQav oimav i] TilovaicoisQos j^Qvaov ijaQyvQov. Still the Gen. is often used for ^, as, av f/E(ff vxpijloTSQav oImuv tj 1 f)'co, 1 you have a loftier house ail s/^eig viprjXoTtqav olxiav j than I. ifiov, J And ^ than, is sometimes used for the Gen. as, ov8sv d8i:<(6tsQOv f; x6Xa§, ovdsv xoXaxog ciSMmrsQOv, ) nothing is more unjust than a ) flatterer. 12 266 GREEK OLLENDOKFP. contr. svgvg, o^vg,^ fgadvg, §a&vg, svgvtegog, oivTsgog, ^gadvtsgog, §a&viegog, Evgvrarog, wide, wider &c ~ o^vrazog, ^gaSvTwzog. ^udvzatog. fielag, svvoog, svvovg, iXscog, llB}.dvTFQOg, Evvniategog, sivovartg'og, iXeojTegog, lAeXccvzarog. twokazcLTog. sivovaraxog. iXscoTarog, svdaificov, EvSaifioviaTEgog, sidaifiovsararog. ac6(pgo3v, amcpgovexsTsgog, acocpgovsazatog. 292. 0, Tj no'gttg, the calf, the heifer. SING. PLUE. DUAL. N. nogrig G. nogzXog D. n6gtXi,n6gzT A. nogzXv V. nogrt N.A.V. nogzHi G. D. Tiogzioiv N. Txogrieg and nogzTg G. nOQZimv D. n6gziai{v) A. nognag, nogzTg V. nogzlsg, nogzTg 293. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'H j8ovg itcu fi noQTig. — 'ff noQriQ tirXrjalov eOtI TrJQ fiooQ. — Ai /?ofg ovv TaiQ noQTiGtv iv rfj ycovict xslvrat rfjs vo/ufjg. — "H noQTcg jucxQorsQa sort TTJg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 267 ^oog. — Tula yXvxuvtQOv lave tov oI'pov. — FdXa fj-sv ylvxv, ylvxvTtQov §s ixs%c. — To fitv f^sXi yXyxv, yXvxvviQOv M r)-60(pia. — OvSsv ykvxvrs- Qov iOTLv aQtrfi^. — KoQuxa tovtov f^tXavngov oiidiiiomOTS koQaxa. — '0 f-isv xoqa^ fisXag,d di noXat, ETL fj.£XdvT£Qoq. — 'O d-ioq tvvovOTtQog roeg dyadoig ioviv, r] roig xaxoiq. — EvSatfiovi-OTtQoq si vvv, Tj ore [.laXa-nXovGLogJiq.- — O £/^og %'sXt>cvg o^VTfQog eOTc tov gov. — JLi acocpQovsOTtQog r)y 6 vaaviag, fzaxaQiartgog dv iiv.- — Mq^dg XsS,r] ovc 6 ddcxog tvdacf.iovs6TSQog tov dcfealov. II. Render into Greek. A high tree. — A higher hill. — The highest houses. — A small calf. — The calf is smaller than the cow. — The horse is. swifter than the cow. — The ox is neither so beautiful nor so swift as the horse. — A man is slower than a horse. — The road into the city (^ slg ttjv noliv 6d6g) is longer and more crooked than that through {tij^ 8ta) the plain. — The river is more winding than the road. — The stars are brighter than the moon. — I have never seen the stars brighter than now. — The ether is higher than the atmosphere. — The good are happier than the bad. — If the old man were wiser, he would be happier.— The tongue of the serpent is black. — The tongue of the flat- terer is blacker than that of the serpent. 268 GREEK OLLENDORFF. SEVENTY-FIEST LESSON. 294. Comparison of Adjectives [continued). Some Adjectives are compared in Tav and kjtos, «?, ov, as, ri^vi;, rfiitav, rjdijX\}s nQOTiQOV ffiOtJ, riX&s TiQOTSQog rj iyco, tjXds TZQOTSQOV T] lyoi, rjX&B jiQOTSQOv i] eygaipa, Xt'yo) nqarog naviav, ltya> TiQmrov ndpTcov, he came before me. he came sooner than I, (before me.) he came before (sooner than) I wrote. I speak first (the first one) of all. I speak first (the first thing) of all. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 275 305. More beautiful than wise, More wise than just. Greater than can be described, Greater than human, xaXXimv rj aoqjcarcQog. aocpcotegog rj dixawtSQog. IxEi^tav Xoyov (greater than speech). fisi^mv Tj aatu av&gconov. {lit. greater than according to man). o x<^^-y-os, ov, brass, copper. 6 Xoyog, ov, the word, speech, to aaTOTZTQcv, uv, the mirror. TO sidaXov, ov, (figure) image. o oivog xaroTiTQOv sari vov, 6 Xoyog trig '4'^X^^ sidmXov iariv. wine is a mirror of the mind, speech is the image of the soul. 306. Exercises. I. Render into English. "EyyvQ Trjg noXaag. — T^q TvoXsag iyyvrsgov lOfJ-SV ^ Tov noTUf-LOV. — '^O Ttalg nolv syyvrkqa rfjg vXr]g eGtIv ^/xav (than "we).— "^0 ay y slog cog Tap^c6TU fjX'&tv. — 01 TOV ^a6iksag ircTtoi ndvTav tuxiGtu adQUf^ov. — Oi -d-riQevTal s^riXS-ov noXv TtQovsQOV rifiav. — 'O QrjrcoQ ovdsv nqOTsqov rov- Tov Xs^ec. — Tbv Xsovtu tido/uev oXiyov vangov rj 8la)]X^o/uev (a little after we entered) sig ttjv 276 GREEK OLLENDORFF. vXriv. — 01 XsovTsg tSQcc/nov ttoXv ^uttov rav InTicov. — ^O yiiQav XbytL noXv OocpavtQOv tov vta- VLOv. — ^v ^bv iv XbytcQ, 6 ds (piXog oov srl cCjUiivov, 6 8s QfjTCOQ ndvTCOv UQiOra. — 01 vtaviai ov^ rjVTOV GO(p(x)i Isyovot rcjv ^ijtoqcov. — IJdac TOig aXXoig rjrror j^aiQa, r] roig ccyadotg (fiXoig. — OvSiva ^d'k'kov GOV (pcka. — Oi dya&ol vovg ayad'oiig cpiXovai, fxaXkov i] vovg itaicovg. — ^O Qt]- TcoQ Xoya ^a'lQti /udXXov i] oocpla. — 01 OQi'i&tg fielov iv rfi noXkt. aSovoiv r] iv zoig ccyQoIg. — Oii- Tog 6 (SaGiXbiig /uti^cov iorlv rj /SiXvicov. — O /ntv ^aXxog xavo^TQOv tiqoocottov, 6 8s olvog, vov. II. Render into Greek. You nm swiftly. — The river rims (flows) swiftly. — The words of the young man flow faster than a river. — Who is less wise than I? — Who is less just than the wicked (man) ? — The father is far wiser than his son. — ■ The mother is less beautiful than her daughter. — She is more beautiful than wise. — The cloak lies nearer (to) the trunk than (to) the table. — The horseman came before (sooner than) the king. — Nobody will go away sooner than I. — Before we came [nQozsQoii i] &c.) into the plain we saw the wild beasts. — We did not cross the river until {ov TZQoaOt.v — n^iv) the king sent us. — My brother errs less than I. — Who errs more [nltlov, fi'dlov) than the thief? — The bad are always loss happy than the good. — This (man) errs most {fxaliaza) of all. — Copper is less beautiful than gold or silver. GllEEK OLLENDOllFF. 277 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 307. rj jQi^Q^i', the trireme (galley witli three banks of oars.) SING. DUAL. PLDH. N. igirigr)g G. (jgiriQiog) Tgirigovg D. (TQirign) igirigsi A. {7girig£u) rgu'igt] V. rgirjgsg TgirigsE Tgirjgrj TgiTigioiv igiTigoiv ]N. {igiiiQUg) Tgirigiig Cf. igujgsuiv&rgLrigav D. Tgirigi(ri{v) A. (^Tgii]gc^/g)TQi^gEig V. (^xgir'gEfg) igirjQug So, 2!a)yQa77]e, Socrates. Sco^Qazovg. 2a)KQdzri and 2aiitQdrriv (1 Decl.) 2ay.Qa7eg. 6 nXuTcov, tovog, Plato. 6 q)il6(jo{pog, ov, the philosopher. f) EXla.'i, lit^og, Greece, Hellas. 'EXXrjnxoi;, rj, 6v, Hellenic, Grecian, Greek. 308. nli^Qrig,full, (contr. like rQir,Qrig). SING. DUAL. PLUR. N. ■Jilrjgrig'Ne-ai.iiXfiQcg N. jrA?;p-t£c, £K, 7rArJ^-£K,j) G. nh',g-iog, ovg nh'ig-u, 7j G. nlrig-imv, Civ D. nlriQ-u, (I Jihjg-soiv, dlv D. ■nXrigini{y) A. TiXrig-Bu, 7) A. TilriQ-iue,ug ■nh]g-ea,r] V. iiXt]gig V. nXrig-tsg,£ig 7iXi:g-!!/.,ri 278 GKEEK OLLENDORFF. So, alti&tig, true. \psv8ije, false. •Comparison nlriQ-latBqog, miutos. al'qQ-ia'isQog, iarazog. ■ijjevd-sarsnog, satarog. 6 xlJTiog nl^Qijg iari ^oScov, 10 arofia tov lov TzlrJQsg, lavTo, aX)]&tj Xeysig, alrj&lj, ra Klr/drj Xeysig, ovdsv av liysig xpevdsg saziv, the garden is full of roses, the mouth is full of poison, you say these things truly (true), you speak the truth (true things). Nothing of what you say is false. 309. oh roaovTov — oaov, not so much — as. ov toaovTov di ifis oaov dia, as, fiai.Xov ifiov rj anv e'vena, ?j7zor 8ia Tuvza i] 8i exeiva, ov zoaovzov /uiQco oaov akym, not so much on ray account as yours, rather for my sake than yours, less on this account than that. I do not so much rejoice as grieve. tavza aXti&ii Xsym / ovdttfiimg, tiaiara, aliji^mg, cog ahjOwg, cog alij&sazara Isysig, do I say this truly 1 in no way, by no means. not in the least, not at all. truly. in. very truth. you speak most truly. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 279 '0 ^ooxQciztj'i EXXrjv r^v, nXdrcav qnloaofpos r^v 'ElXijn- xoe. Socrates was a Greek. Plato was a Greek philosopher. Rule. — ^Proper names may take the Art. if referring to persons previously mentioned, or well known. Other- wise they reject it. 310. Exercises. I. Mender into English. 'Exiivr] Tj vXt] ■d'YiQicov riv nXrjQrjg. — Al ntQl rrjv 'EXXaSa ■d'uXaOGac TtXrjQutg 7]0av TvaXac rav vQirj- Qsav. — Toiv '^EXXrivcov noXXob neqi rrjv ■Q'aXaGOav axovv xai TtoXXaxig sig rag TQcrjQtig ^vs^atvov. — • '0 ScoxQavrjg xQUTiOrog fjv cpiXoGocpog xal av- ■d'Qajiog /3sXviOTog. — ^coxqarrig xcd UXavcov dX- XrjXovg ag ^dXiOra icpiXovv. — 'O fisv SaxQarrig didaaxaXog rjv, 6 §s UXarav, /ua&rjrtjg. — Udv- Tov Tcjv sv 'EXXa§£ 6o(pav GcoqjQOvtGTarog i]v SaxQUTTjg. — 01 TCJv cpiXoGocpcov Xoyot TcoXXuxtg slal xfJivdilg. — 'O JlXarav dXrjS^rjg r]v cpcXoGoqiog. — JIXuTCov tXsyav ore rj ipv^h d&avarog ioriv. — "^O ^coxqarrig tXsytv on tig fj.syiOrog -d-tog sGri, 3eal ori, extivog navru oga, xal ttuvt dxovtt. Ovdsv ifJSvdsOTSQOv eGviv otvov, — Ovdsv ifjav- GUEEK OLLE.\DDUFF. diOTiQOV sGri rrjg tov xoXapeog yXojOuiii. — 'II tov fioXaxog yXaoOoc fikXavo; lou TiX^Qiii idriv. — Tov f^iv ocptaq i] yXavTa nXliqm eOrtp iov, tov ui HoXa^oq,, f] xuqdiu. — Oi ocptL^ tov iov ev ro'ig oduvOiv i'^ovOiv. — Al vtcpiiXui TiXt'iQtLQ ;/eovoi kloiv. — Aia Tovro 8vo ara t^o/utv^ oiof-iu di tv, Ivcc TiXtico jLisv axova^tv, rjTTOvce 8s Xiycof-itv. — Mtrce TOV -dtov, navvav f^uXiOra rovg yovtaq (ptXov- f.ttv. II. Render into Greek. Socrates was a Greek. — Socrates and Plato were both Greeks. — Socrates was (the) teacher of Plato. — Plato loved Socrates most of all. — Socrates was the wisest and best of the Greeks. — The mouth of Socrates was full of wisdom. — On the tongue of Plato was honey. — They say [Ityovaiv) that bees sat on the tongue of Plato. — The Gre- cian seas were full of triremes. — There were many tri- remes about the city. — There were in Greece many beau- tiful cities. — Hellas was a country small indeed, but beautiful. — The plains of Hellas were many and beauti- ful. — All these things you say most truly. — These words are not false. — Your tongue (indeed) is true, but your heart false. — The chest is full of black hats and still blacker cloaks. — The garden is full of roses. — The pas- ture has fewer apple-trees than cherry-trees. — I love the good rather than the bad. — Does God love the bad? — In no way. — Not at all. GREEK OLLENDOEFP. 281 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 311. The Optative Mode. The Optative Mode has four tenses, the Pres. Perf. Flit, and Aor. ; thus, Ind. Opt. Pres. yqaif-ca, yQacp-oifii, /might hewriting, might write. Fut. yquxp B>, ygdyj-oifxi, might {hereafter) write. 1 Aor. k-ygaxp-a, ygdip-aifAi, might write. Perl! ytygufp-a ysygd,(f-otfii, might have written. Rem. — The 1 Aor. Aot. ends in aifit, the other tenses in- cluding the 2 Aor. in oifxi. 312. Inflection in oift;. Sing. ygciq)oifti, - ygdqioig, ygdcfoi. Dual ygdcfoiior, ygncfoizijv. Plur. ygdq)Oifisv, ygdcpotie, ygdcfonr. Inflection of the 1 Aor. in aifii. Sing. ygd\paifii, ygdipaig & ygdipsiug, ygdxpai & ygd\psis(i>) Dual ygdipaiTOv, ygaxpuhtjv. Plur. ygd\paifisv, ygdipaizs, ygdxpanv Scygdxpuav. Rem. — The jEolic forms y^(/ipfiag, ygr/ipsis and '/QUipiiav are more common than the regular forms, ygdyjuig, ygonjJixi, yQinjiciitv. Observe. — The inflection-endings ol and ai in the Opt. are long. 282 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Ind. Pres. ivQiaxm, Fut. svQijao}, 2 Aor. ivQov, Perf. EVQrjxa, evQiaxm, I find. Opt. svqlaxoiiii, should, might he finding f.vqriaoi[ii, should (hereafter) find, svqoifu, slwiddfind. svQijxoiiii., should have found. iia ygacpotfii, lia yQiixpaifu, that I might write, be writing, that I might write. 313. Rule. — The Optative naturally follows the past tenses ; the Subjunctive the present and future ; as, ^jjzm iva evQM, ^TjTijaa} Ifa tVQoa, i^iJTOvv iva evQoiixi, s^i'jzijaa iva ivqoifii. I seek that I may find. I shall seek that I may find. I was seeking that I might find. I sought that I might find. Pres. Fut. 1 Aor. Pert: 314. axoia, I hear. Ind. axoiiw, tt>tovaofiiii, ijxovacc, axijxoa. Opt. tVAOVOlfll. dy.ovaoifitjv. ttxovaaifti. axTjy.6oifU. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 283- Inflection of the Middle form aMvaoijjiriv. Sing, dxovcoifitjv, Dual ttnovaoifisOov, Plur. axovaoifie&a, uycouaoio, ttxovaoia&ov, aKOvaoiaOs, axovaono. .aHnv6oia&7]v. ay.ovaoivTO. So, all forms in olfirjv except Opt. from Fut. in ovfiat which differs in accent. niTiT(a,fall: Ind. Pres. ninrm, Fut. Tisaovfiui, 2 Aor. snsaov, Perf. ntntcoxa,. Opt. nsaoifiijv. ntaoifxi. 7iinTwy.oiiu. Sing. ngaoifiJ]v, Dual nsaoi'iis&ov, Plur. nsaoifts&Ui nesoio, nssoTa&ov, neoola&s, fieaoiro. neaoia&rjv. TZSSOtVTO. So 8Qafioi'ni]v from dQa^iovfiai. 315. sQ'^ojA.cu, come, go. Pres. sQ'^ofj.ai, (/'(a loifu {toti]v) lots, lot &c.) (Imperf ^siv or ya, was going, coming,') (Fut. ^|w, tlfii, shall come, shall go, i]^oifii.) 2 Aor. ^l&ov (^Mv) sXdo), {rjnoa) il&oifii. [riKOijJii). Perf: iXijlvOa, iXi]}.v&(o, iXrjlv&oifa. Pluperf. iXjjlvOeiv. Rem. — Observe that the Ind. of dfit is future in significa- tion, but not the Subj. or Opt. The Imperf of 'ixo) am come, is Aor. =^^5^0^ ; and the Subj. and Opt. Pres. are Aor. r,y.a, rixoi/ii =ti.&(a, 'il&oifii. ioli)v is common instead of i'oifii. 284 greek ollendorpp. 316. Exercises. I. Render into English. IlaQttjLit I'va yqacpco. — TIaQtjv 'iva yQccffoifxc. — AtVQO ifkd-ov tvunqoz rrjv fir'jTtQa yQaif/acjuc. — li^co iva Tov cpcXoaocpov dxovco. — Ol'EXhjvtg 7ca- Xai Ovvrjtdav iva TlXavavo^ axovoctv. — ^^ojxqa- rrii dil ntQl dgtrr/g eXtyov 'iva Tvavng dxovuitv. — Enl TOV Xocpov dvcl3r]v iva tcov OQviScov dxovoat- fu. — /dia Ti 8iVQ0 fjX-d'iv 6 y'sqav ; — -Iva tijv ^axTTfiQiav tvQOL. — nuTg ovtoc, rikdtv iva to y(QV60VV nOTTjQlOV tVQOC. dvTjQ tlC T/jV vXr/v iiOiXf/Xu&iv iva TOV TtsXixvv tvQrj. — 01 vtuviui, dti ahovGiv iva r]/.iiTQ dxovco/Lctr. — ILl TcaQfjaav ol cpiXoi, ti0rj7.x}-0f.itv dv tic, Trjv vXriv iva Tag tojv OQviLhcov (pcovag dxov6aifj.tv. II. Render into Greek. What are you looking for? — I am looking for a mir- ror. — The mirror lies on this table. — I was looking for cherries. — I came into this garden that I might find cher- ries. — I shall come to-morrow that I may find a rose. — We always come that we may find (tvQi<3y.(x>ftF.v) apples and figs. — We come that we may write letters. — We came that we might write letters. — We used to sit in the gardens that we might hear the voices of the birds. — Why in the world did the thieves come into this house 1 — That they might find gold and silver. — They found GREEK OLLENDORFF. 285 more silver than gold. — They found less silver than cop- per. — The maiden was sitting among (sV) the trees that she might hear the nightingale. — The stranger took nei- ther my cloak, nor yours, but his own. — Whom do the unjust most injure? — Themselves. — Their own souls. SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 317. The Optative Mode {continued). The examples already given show the formation of the Opt. tenses from their corresponding tenses in the Ind. We add a few others. Ind. Opt. Pres. Isy-a, }Jy-oini. Fut. li^-m. Is^-oifJi. 1 Aor. i-ls^-a, It^-atjxi. Perf. £i'Qi]y,-a, ei^TiK-oifii. Pres. XafJ^av-co, Xajx^dv-oini. Fut. Xrj^p-ofiai, X}]Xp-Ol'fll]V. 2 Aor. i-la^-ov. Xd^-oifii. Perf. siltjcp-a, sl).li(p-OI[M. Pres. fih-m, fit'v-oiiu. Fut. [ttP-OO, USV-olfll. 1 Aor. E-jxsiv-a, fisiv-aifii. Perf: HSfiSVTjH-a, fisftsvri>t-oifM. 286 •GREEK OLLENDORFF. 318. ulenia, I steal. Ind. Subj. vXinia, Pres. aXf'nTCo, Imperf. exXeniov. Fut. nT.expco & xXexpofiai, 1 Aor. 'f^leipa, xXiipcq, Perf. Ksx^.oqoa, xe>t}.6(p(o, Pluperf. i>iexX6ijieiv. Opt. x2,tWot|U(. aXixpoifii & xi.e^otiiijv. 319. f(»? ril&ov, emg av sX&m, ecag eX&oifti, ixd&TjVTO etog ^l&sr, asi SKtt&tjvTO k'cog sldoi, until I came. until I come = shall have come, until I should or might come, they sat until he came, they always sat until he came (might; should come). Rem. — The Adv. of time I'ws, /J-bxqis, ots, onori, inil, incidri and JT^tV are used with the Opt. (more commonly the Aor. Opt.) to express the repetition of an action. TZSQisfiEvoixev sxadTozs sag av sX&oig, ot iTtnoi, inei zig Sicoxoi, scpsv- •jov [av), ovBetzote anriEoav tiqiv (pa- yoisv. we waited each time until you came (might come.) the horses when any one pur- sued (might pursue) them, fled, used to flee. they never went away before they ate. GK.EEK OLLENDORFF; 287 320. Conditional Sentences. El with the Opt. expresses pure uncertainty, with no reference to the possible or probable realization of the supposition. In the apodosis (or answering clause) the Opt. with the Modal Adverb av is used. £{ Ihfoiq, (xfiaQidvotg av, SI Xs^aig, afiuQTOig av, d ■&TJQ10V "dot, qriyoi av. if you should speak (habitually) you would err. if you should speak (in a given case), you would err. if he sliould see a wild beast, he would flee. 321. Recapitulation. — We have thus four kinds of conditional or hypothetical constructions ; as, 1. si Isysig, a/iaQTcivsig, 2. SI B.sysg, tj/xaQTavsg av, 3. iav Xsyifig, auaQtijari, 4. st Isyoig, afA.aQTa.voig av, if you speak you err (and you do), if you spoke, were speaking, you would err. if you speak, you will err. if you should speak, you would err. No. 1. assumes that the case is as supposed (i. e. implies no uncertainty). 2. assumes that the case is not as supposed.* 3. contemplates a case as possible, and expresses doubt and interest. 4. expresses pure uncertainty^mplies no thought of a de- cision. * It by no means follows that the assumptions (1, 2) correspond ne- cessarily with the facts of the case. They may be merely made for the moment by the speaker. 288 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Thus expressed with the EngUsh verb to he ; C If I am, t(" iifti. 1. < If I was, el Jiv. I If I shall be, &c. SI eaonai. 2. ( If I were. d IjV. I Ifl had been, el rjV. 3. If I be. iav w. 4. If I should be, el e'lqv, el taoifirjv The full construction is thus : 1. Protasis. — Any tense of the Ind. with si. Apodosis. — Any ap- propriate tense of the Ind. (also Imperative). 2. Protasis. — Any past tense of the Ind. Apodosis. — Any past Ind. tense with Modal Adv. av. 3. Protasis. — idv (jiv, up) with Subj. Apodosis. — Usually a Fut. (sometimes a Pres.) Ind. or an Imper. 4. Protasis. — Opt. with u. — Apodosis. Opt. with av. E.vamples. SI aoqsog tan, fiaxaQtog eariv. 1. ■ el aoqiog ijv, fin.y.oiQi.oe rjv, el aocpog eazai, fiaxctQiog eatai, el aocpoi; Ifl', fia-MQiog av 2. • el (Toqibg ^v, ovx av eaXe- 3. \pev, av aocpog y fiaxaqtog ea- 4. tai, El aocpog eiq, fiaxaqiog av eitj. if he is wise, he is happy. if he was wise, he was happy, if he shall be wise, he will be happy, if he were wise, he would be happy, if he had been wise, he would not have stolen, if he be wise, he will be happy. if he should be wise, he would be happy. GREEIC OLLENDORFF. 289 322. Exercises. I. Render into Ensrlish. JMsva Ttaqa 6oL — TJsQCfxhva (I shall wait) ^aq ccv eX-d-rj 6 ayytXoQ. — 'Ev rfj noXhi xa-d-rjOo^ccc tag av ov naQfjQ. — Exa-drj/j.rjv sv rji ctocc scog ttjv Gi^Tjvrjv sidov. — 'Efta^rj^rjv dil iv ra roitco ixslva Ecog Tovg darsQag i^OLfXL. — 01 xXbtctul, stth dico- xouv ol Innslg, i'cpavyov. — 'E^isvo/xtv xaS^ hxd- OTTjv vvxra iv rfj vXr] tag rfig drjSovog dpeovOaifitv. — '^OjIOts dicoxoiav oi Ttoijusvag, tcptvyov ol Xvxoc. 'OtIOTI: iX&OLkV 01 x'kS'JlTai., dil TloXkcC i'xXiTtTOV. —El rbv ocpiv tig rag ^tiQag Xa/3oig, 8axoc dp. — El ol xXknrai ravrri rfj vvxtL tXdottv, noXXa dv xXtipac&v. — El x7.sifjac rig rov TtsXexvv, ovdslg dv TUfj-Ot iq ()y(^i6i:ie ^vXa. !Q vtavia, il jJ-Ti Slxuiog tar], ovSiTtOTS i'arj (xaxdqLog. — El /nr] ddixog rjv 6 ^aOiXtug, noXv fiuxaQiartQog dv rjv. — '-Av d&dvavog i) rj ipvxri, Tidvrtg nXrjv rcov xaxoJv %acQr}60VTai. — "Avtv novov ov8tlg dv fjv /uaxccgcog. — £1 naT, tl oo(pog ti'rjg, Tidvv dv tir^g tvSaiuav. — '£1 dv&Qwnt, tl f.(r] 6cj(pQ0}v il'rjg, ovSsTtOTS ooc iXtag ovds tvvovg dv si'rj 6 ^tog. 13 290 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. Render hito Greek. The cattle flee when they see the wild beasts. — Whenever the shepherd saw (might see) the wolf, he pursued him. — We always used to sit by the river until we saw {iSol/xsv) the moon and the stars. — Nothing is more beautiful than the moon. — Nothing is brighter than the stars. — If tlie orator shall come to-day, I shall hear him. — If the philosopher should speak, I should hear him. — If these things were so, we should all rejoice {ndvreg av iiaiQoniv). — If my daughter were absent, I should write letters to her. — If I should write letters, I should send them. — If nobody should speak, who would hear? — If the body were (Jp) only a mouth, where were the ears 'I — If the soul is immortal, who does not rejoice ? — If any one should say that the soul is not immortal, he would exceedingly err. SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 323. The Optative Mode {continued). Pres. Fut. iifil, am, Eoofiai, Opt. erijv, should be. iaolft7]v, should be. Inflexion of ft Eiriv. Sing. Dual Plur. ttl]flEV, {tljisv) E'ltJTOV, ilTjtS, {tizs) ^ It E,n. El.l'jTIJV. tiijaav and eJsv. iaoi/xrjv like c.HOvaoi/iijr. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 291 Ind. ^aivM, I go, Subj. Opt. 2Aor. e^tiv, — ^c5, ^airiv. Sing, ^airiv, (iaii]s, (iait]. Dual ^airizov&^airov, ^aujxriv & ^airtjv. Plur. ^ai7jfi£v&^aTiisi>, BaiijTS & (laizs §aitf(T-dve\y^curj(jar). 324. Optative of Contract Verbs. oQ&o) oQw, F see. Ind. Pres. ogdco oqa, Fut. oxpofiai, 2 Aor. elSov, Perf. imQ(Zy.a, Opt. OQaoiut 0(>q>iii. o\poi/xt]v. idoifii. SmQa-AOIlA,!. ogdoifii oQo^iu is thus inflected : SING. 1 2 3 OQaoifii OQ&oig oqaoi OQWlll OQi^g OQV or DUAL. OQaoiqv bgaoiqg ogaoirj ogqri^v ogv>] 2 3 ogaoiTOv OQUohrjv OQWTOV 6Q(pT1jV PLUR. ogaoitjTOv 6gaoii]7)]v ogq)7}iov bg(^ijzriv 1 2 3 ogaoi/iev bgdoiTS OQikoisv ogqif^sv og^TS bgigsv ogaoirjuEv bgaoiriTs bgdoisv ogmrmiv bgcpijts bg^ev 292 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Rem. — The form in olijv is more common in the Sing., that in otfii in the Plur. Nole. — exa>, have, 2 A or. I'o/oy, had. axSi Opt. axolrpi, r]<;, &c. (not axoifii). 325. 2 Aor. sinov, eg, s, &c. / said (more common in familiar discourse than els^a). ilnsv oil ij^oi, einsv on zavia. ovzcag iioi, ilntv on {cai) oviag elj^er, lie said that he should come, he said that this was so. he said that it was so. Rem. — sinsp on 'i-^oi, implies only that he said that it was so, but does hot imply the truth of the statement; umv on sixsv (Ind.) implies not only that he said thatit was so, but that it was so. 326. (o) The Opt. with av (omitting the protasis) is often used in an independent construction to make an assertion, more or less positive. T>iV xpv^rjv ovdsig av oQi^irj, b y.axog ovSinoze finxdyiog av ft h'ysig cog 6 y-axbg ovy. up svSal- ovx a,]' cinsX&oi/xi, nobody can see the soul, the bad can never be happy. you say that the bad cannot be prosperous. I might not, may not == will not go away. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 293 Rem. — This usage springs from Attic politeness and moderation, which prefers a softened mode of making especially an unpleasant statement; as, tovto otx Ixy yivono, this might not, may not happen, for, this can- not, shall not happen. 327. (6) The Opt. with av is used as a mild form of the Imper. Xt'yoig av, you might speak = speak on. axovoig av, you might hear ^hear (if you please.) 328. (c) The Opt. without av, in an independent con- struction, expresses desire (often with d, tide) — hence the name Optative. fiaxaQiog etrjg, oXotn, liijdtii; v/^mv xaxog sir], itaQaxa a. firidtia alios i8oi, may you be happy, may you perish, may none of you be wicked. I have seen what may no other one see. |I3= The piipil will distinguish carefully the constructions (a) and (c). (a) jxuy.iiQiOi av tiqg, (c) [laxdoiog tii]g, (a) oix av ytvouo. you may (might) be happy, may you be happy, it may not be {become, take place). 294 GREEK OLLENDORFF. (c) ixri yivoizo, (a) ovStig ur rovro Ityoi, (c) fiifitii Tovto Xiyoi, let it not be. no one can say this. may no one say tliis. 329. Exercises. I. Render into English. OvStlg fj.a>iaQtoQ av tlr/ avtv dQ&TTJg. — Ovdtlg Oocpog av ti'rj avtv noTJkov iiovov. — TLi firj Gotpqav Tig ti'rj, ovH av ur] tvvovg avrco o dtog. — Ovdtlg uv 8ig teg TOV avrov nozafiov ijx^air]. — 'O TtaXai Oocpog eXtytv on ovdtlg §lg av if.i/3ai.r] tig rov avTOv Ttova^ov. — Toig xa^olg outvot av tuj 'iXtcog 6 dtog. — 01 xaxol ovx av dXXtjXoig tvvoe. tltv. — £1 ^al, TioXv tvdai/iiovsOvtQog tl'r/g rov nargog. — Td rfjg r]f.itvEQag noXtag (the affairs of our <&c.) ovx ovTco xaXag t/^ti cog ra rrjg vjutr&Qag. — paOiktvg ttTttv dg TOV dyysXov nsfzifjoi. — ayytXog tiTvtv on ndvva ra sv rfj TioXtt tv av t/^OL. — Mrj(%lg vavTU Xt^)] — Ei fjfilv TiaQthj tig Gocpog, navra uv tv t/Oi. — ' Q. yvvai, X'syoig dr. — £2 ytgov, dtl tuj 001, iXtcog 6 &tog. — MrjStlg /ii?/dt7cort Xi'Srj on nXtiovg tial -O^tol hvog {jq tig). — Ovdtlg nonozt x)tbv dv Idoi. GKEEK OLLENDOEPF. 295 II. Render into Greek. If I wore good, I should be happy. — If the rich (man) should be good, he -vvould also be happy. — If we should always say the same things concerning the same things, it would be well. — None can see («»> ogq)')/) the sun with- out eyes. — Nobody can say these things. — Who would see (rtV swQtt. av) all these things, unless he had eyes ? — ■ How would they hear all these words, if they should not have (ft lit) sxoisv) ears ? — We hear voices with our {roTt;) ears. — Let nobody say {i^rjdeig h'^ij) these things. — May the maiden be happy. — May the daughter be happier than her (r^t,-) mother. — The orator said that these words were false. — Plato used to say that the soul is immortal. — The philosophers say that the good can never be wretched. — The river was more deep than wide. — The men fled (sqisvyov) until they came to (upon im) a deep river. SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 330. Optative of Contract Verbs [continued). cpiXeio, qidw, Hove. Ind. Opt. Pres. qidt'ai (fdca cpdi'otfii. qidoTfii Fut. cfArjam (jitlffiotiu 1 Aor. ecpilr,aa cpilijnaiiu Perf; mcpiliixa m^ih'inoi(Ai 296 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Inflection of q>iXioi[ii. SING. 1 2 3 cpiXfoifu q)iXsois (fiXioi (filoTfii . cpiXoTg q)iXol 01 DUAL. q)iXson]v cpiXsoirjg (ftXsoit] ]fiev qiiXuirjte cpiXotsv 331. 8i]X6co, 8iiX«i, I show. Opt. 8)]X6oifii, thus inflected and contracted : SING. 1 2 3 8)]X6oific 8tiX6oig SrjXooi SijXoIfii 8r]Xotg 8i]Xoi DUAL. or 8>]Xoolr;v St]Xooi7]g 8i]Xoo{ii 8i]Xoii]v 8i]Xoii]g SrjXoiT] 2 3 8i]X6oirov SqXooiTiqv S'qXoXtov Sl]X0LT7]V PLUR. 8riXool.rjTov 8rjXooirifrjv SrjXolqrov StjXot^TljV 1 2 3 8r]l6oifi£v Sr/Xoout 8i]X6oiev 8ijXnifiev 8i]XoiTS SijXoTnv 8ij7.ociiijfisv SrjXnoi'rjTS 8i]16oitv S/jXoiljTE SijXoitr GREEK OLLENDORFF. 297 Ind. 332. noita nom, I do, make. Siibj. Opt. Pres. noeco noim, Imperf; inokov inoiovv. nonco noica, Tzodoini notoini Fut. 7Toii]aco, I Aor. inoiriaa, Perf! nsTioirjxa, Pluperf. inenoiiqxuv. noirii, tTKUEv {av). if he might see any one, he would strike him. 334. Exercises. I. Render ijito English. '£2 Tvai, Tvavra GojcpQov i'l'rjg. — -OoriS rowvrog il'r/ Oiog av, fxaxuQLog av ih]. — Ovblv rihiov aort Trig ccqixfig. — Til 6 Tiaig rov itavEQa cpiXohj, xal £>:th'OV cptXolt] av 6 TtarrjQ. — El Xa/UTtoi 6 rj?uog, navTU av ^/x.iv dtjXoh]. — -Ovriva xaxov tvQoi 6 J3a- OcXtvg, tTvauv civ. — ■Ovriva dyadov vtaviuv Idoi JEaxQarrjg, tovtov ttuvv sgjlXiL. — Tovvovg roiig Xoyovg dXrji^tTg Xkytig. — '£2 ^sva, tl ravva noiaig, dfiaQTuvacg. — Ti Ttocai 6 iQyarrjq ; — lEcpvQag xul GcpaiQag :^oial. — El iyoj ravra aTioirjaa, ojg jud?u- Ora av t]/ua()TOv. — T/g tooovtov Sojqov d'^iog ia- Tcv ; — ]0 dya&og ^tjraQ tovtojv, xai erl fiai'Qovav dojQcov d^iog iorcv. — 'ff i/nT] olitla ov tooovtov aQyvQiov d^ia ioriv cog f] tov i^TcoQov. — 'H tov- tov olaicc arl aXuTTOvog d^ia ior} Tfjg if^fjg. — ^H xoQti rioXXdg ^iXtioTOV d^iag SojQadg f.v ralg /^tQ6i.v axai. GEEEK OLLENDORFF. 299 II. Render into Greek. Who is worthy? — Nobody is worthy of these gifts. — This gift is not so great as that. — The gifts which the orator has are greater than mine. — The boy loves his father. — If this young man should love virtue, he would be happy. — If the moon should shine, she would show all things. — Wine shows the mind of man. — How much money is the cloak worth? — It is worth much' gold. — If I should sell this cup, I should sell it for a great price. — None but a good man can be happy. — If I should do this, I should not err. — Whatever cloak or hat the thief might see, he would steal it. — He has come that he may steal. — He came by night that he might steal. — Thieves fre- quently steal by night. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 335. yiyvojxui, T become, take place, happen. Ind. Subj. Opt. Pres. yiyvoiAai, yiyvanai. yiyvoifiTjv. Iraperf. iyi.yi'Ofitjv, Fut. ysrtjao^iai. ysvrjaoinriv. 2 Aor. iyevo/Jijv, ysno/iai, ysrolfirir. Perf. yfynvu.. ysyova. yeyovoifii Pluperf. iyeryoviiv. 300 GREEK OLLENDORFF. (xs^a ravru ii eyevEZO j fiij tavzaysroiTO, ravta ovx av ysvoiro, after this what happened 1 may not this happen. this could not, cannot happen. 336. ys, at least, certainly (enclitic). lyoays, lovzo ys, xazd ye tovzo, I at least. this at least. at least according to this. 337. ■Qvnizog, 7], 6v, mortal. ofioiog, a, ov, similar, like. 6 vnvog, ov, the sleep, sleep. 6 Xv~/yoi, ov, the lam,p. o-&dvcizog,ov, the death, death. vnvog no7.7.a d^avdzcp ofioiog,- zip nazQi ofioiog, ovdsv aXXo ofiOiog, ovSev za)v liXlmv bfioiog, sleep is in many things like death, similar, like to the father. > similar in nothing else. Rem. — oij.oiog, like, is constructed with the Dat. artrio, I light, kindle (prim.a.nly, fasten, touch). rjuzor, axpm, ffipa, zjcpa, ijfpsiv. Ind. anra, Subj. anzm. Opt. UTlZOlfU, fjipa, 'fl<'pa, axpm, rjtfw. axpoifM, aipaifii, jjcpoifii. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 301 o oq'&alfAos J.w/fo? iaii tov 6 ifiloaorpog Xvpov ijfieQag Iru av&qwnov ^r^roiij, ovds Ira slqev, the eye is the lamp of the body. the philosopher lighted a lamp by day. that he might seek a man. he did not find even one. 338. 70 teT]^oq, the wall. SING. DHAL. PLUR. N. TsT^os (x. rsl^sogtsixovg D. tsr^t'i retj[u A. leixog V. TEi'j^og N.A.V. TSixes Tsi'xi] G. D. TSijfoivTsrj^otv N. Tsiyisa tsi'x)] G. 78l.)^f'a>VTEI]^WJ' D. tetie.ai{v) A. Tsixsa rst'xi V. rEi'xsci Tsliri So, TO OQog, the mountain. 10 ardog, the flower. to x^^^og, the lip. 339. Exercises. I. Render into English. Tavra ovx av ykvotTO. — 'O Savarog ovnors av ^co^ ysvoiTO o/uocog.—'O imdrcov Isybc on o ■d-dvccTog sx ^cofig yiyvtrac (becomes, springs) xal in S-avcctov fj .^arj. — 'O VTcvog dStXcpog son rov S^avuTOV. — OvSsvo xaxog ra dyud-a ysvocr dv Ofj.owg.— Q: Tval, /utjBsjvots /uridsv roig xaxotg 7£V»j (become) ofiotog.-^OvS' d TiXovacog ysvocro 302 GREEK OLLENDORFF. d naxoQ, d/a tovto fj.c4xdQtoQ av titj. — "^H rov dya- -doij ipv/r] oiihbv rfj rov xaxov o/uoea. — 'S2 vtcevta, iuv oacfiQcov fcal aocpoQ ytvrj, 6 z^tog Col tvvovQ kOvuL. — Ot dyadoi dvdgis no'k'kd o^ocol tioi ra ■&t(p. — 'H }(oqr] Xv^vov ijiptv. — ^iloootpoi tic, Xv- X,vov rjfziQuQ Tiips, xai dntv on dv&Qcoriov ^r/roirj. — Ti Tvojra ijipiv 6 cpLXoaocpog tov Xv/^vov ; — "li'cc avdqconov tvqoc. — TloTtqov dvihQconov tvQtv, rj ov ; — Ov8s tva tvgtv. — 'fi, dvydnq /uri rovrov TOV Xv/^vov dififiQ. — El hOTi'sQu ysvoLTO, tv&vg (im- mediately) TOV Xv^vov dv dipacfxtv. — '-On i]^if- rj vu^, Tovg Xvxvovg dipofxtv. — To /liev acof^ia ■d'vr]- Tov, Tj 8s ipv^rj ddavaTog. — Td T^g noXicog Tti/^r] viprjXa iorcv. — To godov xaXXtGrov sGtiv dvSog. — 'Ev TOig ogiGc TcoXXa sGti xaXd dv-d'T]. — AsyovGiv on f^sXiGGat €Ju Tav TLXariovog ^aiXav ixa- ■0-rjVTO. II. Render into Greek. The walls of the city. — The walls of this city are higher thon those of the one on [rar ttjg in)) the moun- tain. — The city on the mountains is smaller than the one in the plain. — The horseman went up on to the walls. — The king will descend into the plain. — The rose is a most beautiful flower. — No flower is so beautiful as the rose. — A serpent lies among these flowers. — I lighted a lamp. — The moon is the lamp of night. — The sun is the eye of day. — The soul at least is immortal.— Nothing GREEK OLLENDORFF. 303 is mortal except the body. — -The scholar is similar to the teachfer. — The good are similar to the gods. — The sleep of the laborer is sweet. — Sleep is similar to death. — If the philosopher should light a lamp, he would find a man. — If he had lighted a lamp, he would have found many- men. — If he shall search until evening, he will find many things [nolXd). SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. 340. The Imperative Mode. I The Imper. has chiefly two tenses, the Pres. and Aor. (rarely a Perf. except when the Perf has a present mean- ing-) The Act. Pres. 2 Aor. and Perf. (when used) end in «; the 1 Aor. ends in ov. yqafpat, I write. Pres. ygciqis, write, be writing, go to writing. 1 Aor. yqa^pov, write. Thus inflected : Pres. Sing. yqacfS, yqatfirm. Dual. ygdifSTOv, ygacpSTcov. Plur. yqa^fSTS, yqaffirmGar. 1 Aor. Sing, ygdxpov, yguxparco. Dual, yqaxpoizov, ygaxparmv. Plur. yqdipars, yqaipmcoaKV. 304 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Ind. Imper. Pres. Xaijpdya), 7Mn{iavs. 2 Aor. ilu^uv. lu^L Pres. ninico, nlnTS. 2 Aor. enF.aor, Trkrjs. Pres. 2 Aor. 2 Aor. EVQi'axm, tVQOV, tin or, said. U'Qiaxn. svqL eine. Pres. 2 Aor. IQXOfiai, rikOov, [i'&i from ilixi, shall go.) eIOL 341. Inflection of ("5 1^0 (irregular). Sing. i'Oi, Dual, i'rov, Plur. ITS, irai. irwv. izmaav or loviar. Inflection of i'a&i be from eifil am. Sing, i'a&t, Dual, satov, Plur. SETTS, sarco. kazmv. suTaaav and sarcov. §^&i go, 2 Aor. from ^airco (Ind. 2 Aor. e^ijv). Sing. §^&,, Dual. pr/TOv, Plur. §>irs. ^ijTair. ^qTKiaav and ^avzar. Rem. — The pupil will now be able to form any regular Imper. from its corresponding Ind. tense, thus from CaiEEK OLLENDOIIFP. 305 Pres. sa&t-ca, h&i-s. 2 Aor. 'i-qiiiy-ov, mays. Pres. niv-a, niv-i. 2 Aor. E-nX-ov, m-&i (irreg. for nis). 342. Middle or Pass. Imper. Pres. pYVOfxai, Imper. yiyvov. 2 Aor. iysvofiijr, " ysvov. Thus inflected ; Sing. ysvov, ysvia&a. Dual. ysvta&ov, ysrsa&tnv, Plur. ysvsa&e, yEvea&aiaav. o43. Rem. 1. Accent. — ik-&s, come, svQe,Jind, la^s, lake, fins, say, Ids, see, are accented contrary to the rule, on the ulti- mate. But the compounds are regular, as li'afK&s, en- ter, anola^s, receive. Also the 2 Aor. Mid. Imper. is circumflexed on the ultimate. See ysvoii, ysvsa&ov. Rem. 2. — Distinguish through all the Modes, hetween the continued or relative meaning of the Pres. and the mo- menlary or absolute meaning of the Aor. ; thus, h'ys, speak on, keep speaking, go to speaking. Xe^or, speak. firj Itys, do not keep speaking, do not speak (habitually). fji}] Is'^xtg, (not li'^nv) do not speak (in a given case). juJ; •/)JnTS, do not steal (i. e. do not be in the habit of stealing). jM] xltxprjs, do riot steal (in a given case). fitjdenoTS fiTjdiv aXsipus, never steal any thing. 306 GEEEK OLLENUOUPF. Hence, general precepts for the conduct of life take the Pres. ; as, Cfllsi Tovg yoveig, Ev noiH navzag, seek the things which are bet- ter. love your parents, do good to all men. sS reo/do, / do good to, benefit. Ttarrag iisv su tzoisi, /xaXiaza ds roht; uya&ovg, Otog ndvrag sv noisT, render kindness to all indeed, but especially to the good. God does good to all. 344. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'S2 ayyiXs, Xa/3^ ravvrjv rrjv sncOroXrjv. — Aa- /3s TTjv incGToXrjv r]v tirt/u-ipis dtvQO 6 /SuacXtvg. — £1 vis, yquipov STicGroXr^v iiaQa top dya-d-ov ^svov. — Tovg dvd'QojTcouQ ■mavvac, jxev cpiXn, f^aXtOva §i Tovg dyu&ovg. — 'S2 §svs, sl'otXi^s tig ttjv fj/ntrsQccv oixlccv. — £1 cpiXoaorps, dsl rd avrd Xsys ttsqI tcov avrav. — MrjdsTiOTi Xsirjg cog r] ipU/^i] oun dduvu- Tog earn'. — 'S2 ddtXcpt], dtVQO TtQOOtX&t, i'ra rrjv atXrjvtjv Idr/g. — "^Aiparco Tig rov Xv^vov. — ^JLntihdv ysvijvaL Tj vv^, rovg Xvy^voug cog tu^iOtu uipart. GEEEK OLLENDOllFF. 307 xcti ^vl(t S'^il TO 71VQ Qiipars. — 'Ail to jxIv dya-&ov (pilbi, TO. db jSiXria ^tjni. — Mt/dsTton /ui^dii' xa- xov ^r'lTS TvoirjOrig, f.uivt Xs^r^Q. — '0 -d-tog navras dil iv Ttolti. — Mtjdtlg Xs^rj cog ol ddixoi iv8ai/.w- vsg tlotv. — Tl iv8atfxoviu ovx ix tiXovtov yiyvt- Tcei, dXX s^ aQiTrjg. — J^ocpog ytvou. — ^-Og dv oco- i6v neQl firiSevog). — To the good life in- deed is sweet, but death is still sweeter. — Boy, become in all things like your father. — Let the scholar become as much as possible like [wg o/AoioTurog yeviaOai) his teach- er. — Nothing is sweeter than a good friend. 308 GREEK OLLENDORFF. EIGHTIETH LESSON, 345. The Imperative Mode {continued). It has been mentioned (Lesson LXXI.) that in nega- tive commands when the Aor. is required the Subj. is used instead of the Imper. fjiijSsv alaiQOv jioirjOrig, dxovaov iiov, fit] zovzov a-AOvmjg, do not steal. let nobody enter. do nothing base. hear me. do not hear this man. 346. Imper. of Contract Verbs. OQuf.(x), OQO}, I see. in iper. oQus, jQa, Sing. 2 cQue, oQa, 3 OQCCStO), OQatw. Dual. 2 OQaeior, OQaror, 3 bfjakzasv. bgdiajv. Plur. 2 OQcisre, oquts, 3 oQiiSTcoaav, bqaovTOiV, oQazmaav, or 2 Aor. eJdov, saw, Ids, see. 347. qjiUai, q^ilw, Hove. Imper. cpilss, cpi'lsi. Sing. 2 q^ilse, q)i).si, Dual. 2 (filiszor, cpiltizov, Plur. 2 qnlstze, q,ilsiz£, 1 Aor. t(piXt]na, Imper. 3 cfiXsszm, 3 qiilihav, 3 qiilssToiaav, (fdsoVTOJV, cpilrjaov. So, ffjrt',, noi'ei, ^tjrijaov, not'ijaov. (piXstro). qiliiTcav. qitl^iimaav, oi (fjilovviaiv. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 309 348. d)]}.6a, djjlw, show. Impe. S^Xos, dijlov. Sing. 2 di'/Xos, SijXov, 3 dijloszoo, Si^lovrai. Dual. 2 drjXoszov, Sijlovzov, 3 dijlosrcov, Sijlovraiv. Plur. 2 SijXosrs, dr]}.ovzs, 3 drfkotraaar, dijXovzcoaav, or SrjloovTWv, 8i]7.ovvTav. 1 Aor. id^Xwaa, Imper. 5;;Arocroj'. xaxroff Tiva ttoioi, ftri noUi, aia^Qo. sQya, ixtjdsnozs fxijSsv ala^QOv noiri ov8ha Kaxov noia. xaxmg noim, I do evil to. TO tQyov, ov, the luork, deed. aia^Qog, d, 6v, ugly, base, shameful. §i^aiog, a, ov, permanent, stable. I do evil to some one. do not do base deeds, never do any thing shameful. I do evil to nobody. 349. Rule. — Verbs of doing well or ill govern the Ace. both of the person and the thing ; as, £f, xaxwg noixo riva, vLya&a, noim tov cfilov. I do good or evil to some one. I do good to my friend. Ind, rifi&rxi, Tiiiw, I honor. Subj. Pres. tiji-dco, w, ttji-aai, w, ImperE Erifj-aov, av. Put. rifjirjaai, 1 Aor. iTi'/Jijacc, rifiijaco, Perf. lETifiriHa, nrifirixai, PluDerf. irsziurixEiv. Opt. Imper. tifi-aoifii, a/it, Tift-as, a. Tiurjaoifii. Tijirjoaifii, rETlfliqtlQlHl, Tiutjaov. (tEtl/ZTjXs). 310 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 350. 6, ^ y.vv s^co noXsay. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 313 In the cities which I see, In such cities as I have, sV tcu? nolsatv ag ogm. . ev T«rs' nolsaiv alg oqu. tv aig ogd noXnaiv. tv loiavtaig nolsaiv olaig f^oa. iv o'laig s^co noXaaiv. Rem. — The Rel. is thus often assimilated in case to its antecedent (Gen. or Dat.) ; ano zSiv noXimv wv e^to, &c. 354. Conversely the antecedent is often assimilated in case to the Rel. and placed after the Rel. This is the man whom you ^ oviog ianv or eldsg afSga. saw. ( ov lilSsg avdqa, ovxog ianv. 355. For the sake of emphasis the Rel. and Demonst. clauses frequently change place, the Rel. preceding ; as, a ovx av 7TOioii]V, tovzo Ofx av Ityaiiii, ov av oqm dyador, rovzov (film, what I should not do, this I should not speak of. whomsoever I see good, this man I love. Tlaqvaacog, ov, Par7iassus. ri jiovaa, rjg, the muse. Tj tjSovi], Tjg, pleasure (from iiSvg). rj xaaia, ag, evil, vice. 14 314 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 356. Exercises. I. Render into English. '0 IIuQvaC>6og f]v vxpt]7.ov oqoq sv 'EX?m8i. — To OQOQ 6 IlaQvaGGOQ tiv tdqa rav Movacov. — At ivvsa MovGai TcuXai UaQvaaaov axovv. — Oi "EXXrjvtQ dtl eri/LUOv tcc; MovOag. — 'O nXovvOQ aviv ccQtTrjg ovdsv tji^n Trjg fj8ovf]g. — Ovx iyi ^«- ftiag yiyvtrai f] rj8ovr], dXX s^ aQtriig. — H aqbrt] fx.6vrj /3t/3cciav i/ki r]dovr]v. — Tovto navrtg lO/^tv. — Ti/iia Tov jSaGiXtia. — "ExaOrog otteSTtjg tov 8t- Gjvorrjv TCf.iaTCo. — Havng ol avd^QcoiiOL ut\ tov fiovov ■d'tov TCfxajwcov.- — -Tig ova oldtv on 6 oi- xacog fi-tyiGrav haqtav ce^tog ioriv ; — 'O jusyag diddopfaXog tigr^xtv cog 6 fiad-rjTrjg ov jlui^cov earl Toi) SidaGxdXov, ov8s o oixsTrjg tov diOTrorov. — EO I'a&i (know well, be assured) oti. Tuvra ndvTa dXrj&fj sOtlv. — O Qr/rcoQ Xkyki tiiqI tcov TioXtcov cov 6v i'x^'S- — 'O ^uoiktvg ^aiQtc alg t'x^i' noXtOiv. — '^ dv y.aXd y, tcwtcc dtl nolti. — Tig navrav huvTOV yiyvojoxtc ; — 'SI vtavia, yvci&t Osavvov. 11. Render into Greek. I knew these things. — Who does not know that So- crates was a great philosopher ? — Who of all (men) does not know that the pleasure of vice is short (^QaxtTa)! — (We) all know that virtue is immortal. — The Muses used GREEK OLLENDORFF. . 315 to sing on Parnassus. — The Muses were nine beautiful virgins. — The pleasure of virtue alone is permanent.— Be assured (tS la&i) that the Moon is much larger than the Earth. — The Sun is much larger than the moon. — No- thing is so sweet to the laborer as sleep. — Even (nal) death is sweet to the good (man). — Sleep is the brother of death. — liOVe your brother. — Honor your parents. — Always seek what is good (zo aya&ov) and sliun evil. — Never say any thing base. — Nothing is blacker than the tongue of the flatterer. — Who stole these apples ? — The thief came that he might steal the figs and the cherries. EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 357. The Infinitive Mode. The Infinitive has four tenses, the Pi'es. Fut. Aor. and Perf. The usual ending of the Pres. and Fut. Infin. Act. is ElV. The 2 Aor. Act. and the Fut. of Liquid verbs, fv. The Perf. Act. ends in hai. The I Aor. Act. ends in at. The regular Pass, and Mid. ending is sa&ai, 2 Aor. Mid. ea&ai. S16 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 358. Ind. ygdcpco, write. Inf. Pres. ygdqi-co, j'gceqi-sw, to be -wriling, to write (ha Put. 1'Qiou. dxri-AOivai. So the pupil will be able to form any tenses of the Inf from their corresponding Ind. 359. Accents. — The accent of verbs generally stands as far as possible from the ultimate ; but except in the Inf. the following: 1. The Perf Infin. Act. in ivm as ysygaqit'vai, and all Infin. in nai, as itpa.i. 2. The 1 Aor. Act. always accented on the penult, dxovaai, ytloiaai. 3. The 2 Aor. Act. circumflexed on the ultimate, as jze- aeiv, il&Hv. 4. The 2 Aor. Mid. is accented on the penult, as ysviaO'ai. 5. The Fut. of Liquid verbs is only an apparent exception, (isrm, fiSVHv, Sijafisiad'ai being contracted from (lavica, jjUivhiv, dQttfihaOai. Infin. Pres. (psXfeiv cpdeTp, 8i]X6eiv Srfi.ovr, 360. cpilsai (jiil.o), love. Fut. 1 Aor. qnlrjOBir, (filTjaai, 8>i}.6o} 8)]7.a, show, driloiastv, Sqlaxyai, Perf. TzscpiXTjaivat. dt8i]Xcoy.evai. eipil, am, Infin. Pres. tivai, to be, Fut. saea&ui, to be going tol olSa, Jcnow. Infin. slSsvai, to know. ilnov, said, Infin. dnHv, to say, speak. 318 GREEK OLLENDORFF. Svrolfiai, I am able. ^ovXofiai, I wish. aaXsva), I direct, command. ^ovlnij.ai Isytiv, %i Ht).evtig us Tzoieif ; a^ioi; si Tiuna Xa^tiv, vd(0Q riSv sari nislv, I wish to speak. what do you direct me to do. you are worthy to receive these things, water is sweet to drink. 361. Exercises. I. Render into English. TiQ ^ovXarai %syscv ; — 01 QrjvoQiQ dtl Xsyscv (pcXovOiv. — 01 TtalBiQ nai^ttv (pcXovticv etcI ra nOTajuco. — 01 -dTiQivral ^ovkovvac jcqojtov /usv STvl ■&rjoav s^dvctc, vOvtQov 8s tccq twv OQvi-d'av (ficovai di(OViLV. — 'O TiarriQ ti}V ■O'vyarnqa xtXtvti Tov Xv^vov dipui. — Mr] /3ouXov jurjd&v aio^^QOP noifjaai.- — O dya&og, ov diivarac ovbLva xaxcog TcocfjGai. — Ei 6 SiOTtorrji sxsXtvGs tov oIxsttjv ^vXa Gx'i6ai, iitolrjosv uv. — ^Hdv icri (it is pleas- ant) oQav TOV f'jXiov. — '0 8if(aiog d§iog sOti /ni-- ylozui dcoQsag Xa^tiv. — '0 ^sv ciQTog fjSu sari (faytlv, TO 8e fj.kXt irl rj^tov. — 'O tov ihtov vof^og xiXkVbi navrag tv nottiv. — OuStlg Svvarai tov TOV dkoii ocp&aXfiov ipnytlv. — OuStlg sSvvaro (was able) aduv rjdiov tcjv Movocjv. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 319 II. Render into Greek. Who wishes to write? — My daughter wishes to write letters. — The orators wish to speak. — The father directs his son to say these words. — God directs all (men) to do good and to honor their parents. — The thief wishes to steal. — What does he wish to steal ? — This golden wedge. — Who is able to steal this purple cloak ? — Who can {pvvaxo.C) throw this ball on to the roof? — What does the father direct the servant to do? — To light a lamp. — Water is sweet to drink. — Nothing is sweeter to drink than wa.ter. — The good man is worthy to receive much gold. — Who is more worthy than you to receive these gifts ? — The bad (man) cannot become good. — Who is willing to be miserable ? EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 362. The Infinitive Mode {continued). vnkq, over., above. A Preposition. hniq Tov, td.v, (Governs the Gen. and Ace.) I. vneQ 10V. (a) over, above (with rest). (6) over for protection = on behalf of, for. (f) over, in relation to, nearly = Tteqi lov, but imply- ing interest. the sun goes above the earth. (a) o ijlwg vnsQ yijg noqsvs- rai, (6) Xtyiiv vneQ 7(vog, (c) vnsQ roll nqdyjJ,aTog Xs^m, to speak on behalf of any one. I shall speak in relation to the affair. 320 GREEK OLLENDORFF. II. v77fQ ror, (a) over, beyond (with motion). (6) beyond, — cliiefly of place, measure and nnmber. (a) Qinrca vtzfq ttjV ojzta*, . (6) vncQ trjv duvufuv ndvia, erzoirjffa, (b) vnsQ TK TQidxovra sxri. T throw over the house. I did all beyond my ability. above thirty years. 363. ri SvvUfug, sag, power, ability, to hog, sag ovg, the pear. nslevco, Fut. :irAeXsvHa. ^ovXofiai, " ^ovlrjaoficLi, " ^s^ovlrifiai. Sivaficu, " SvvTiaofiai, " Budvvijfiai. 364. Inflection of dwa/xai. Sing. Sivafiiu, dvvaaai, dvrarai. Dual. dvvdfisOov, dvpauOov, Svvan&ov. Plur. dwdfis&a, dvvaaOs, Svvavzai. Imperf. idvfdfiriv, idvvai, iSvvazo (and ^dvvuto) &c. ^aXETiog, ri, bv, hard, difficult. gddiog, a, ov, easy. Ssivog, ri, or, dreadful, fearful, mighty. 365. 1. Many verbs are regularly followed by the Infinitive. Svi'upiai, ^ovloftai tqe'/^siv, xsIevo) as xaTa^ljrai, 8eoiJ,ai, aov iX&eir, I am able, I wisli to run. I bid you come down. I entreat you to come. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 321 2. Many Adjectives are followed by the Infin. Ssifog tl Xi'j'eir, evgetr. it is hard to speak. you are mighty to speak, to find. a squirrel easy to catch. 3. Nouns are sometimes followed by an Infin. sQyov iattv svqciv ■&s6v, fofiog sail Tovg yovsis 'tifiav, it is a task =is difficult to find God. it is a law to lionor our parents. 366. Rule. — Adj. or Subst. joined with the Infin. take the case of their antecedent noun or Pronoun. sxsXsvad as ysvsa&ai aya&or, ■ SEOfiai cov aoqiov slvai. I bade you become good. I entreat of you to be wise. 367. Verbs of thinking, saying, &c., can take the Ace. and Infin. or on, ag with a finite mode. Isyovaiv on, {(og) aoqiog el, Xeyovai as aoqov slvm, vofii^w dig tavza u).i]Oij sariv, rojjti^m tavza aXrj&lj slvai. they say that you are wise. I think that these things are true. I tliink these things to be true. vofil^m, I think. Fut. vofitaca, 1 Aor. Ivofuaoi, Perf. vsvofuxa,. #14 322 greek ollendorff. 368. Exercises. I. Re?ider into English. TaiiTU xara 8vvaf.uv xai vjvsq 8vvafj.cv jts- noiqxa. — O Qr'jTCoo Xsya vtteq tovtov tov dyudov avd-Qanov. — '0 /jXcoq VTikQ rjuav noQkvtTUi. — Ov/^ OQac, OTL at vHp'cXui vtiIq tcov ogdv xklvraL ; — 01 ijy.-c6g, having spoken. svQia'/.a , find. Pres. svQia-xm, siiQiay.-wv. Fut. 2 Aor. evQ7i-aa), siiQ-OV, svQij-aoiv. Pert: evQij-aH, sv()7]->img. a-AOvm, hear. Pres. a-AOvco, ay.ovwv. Fut. 1 Aor. dxovaofiai, Ti-AOvaa, ay.uvaonevog. ttxovaag. Perf. dxijxoa. dxi]xo(6g. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 333 386. Declension of the Participle in mp. slfii, am. Part, av, being: SING. N. J/ COP ovaa ov G. D. A. V. ovtog OVTl ovia o'varig ovari ovcrav ovaa DUAL. ovzog )i or 1 1 V ov » OV N.A.V. ovrs ovaa OVTS G. D. OVTOIV ovaaiv PLUR. ovroiv N. G. ovzsg oviav ovaai ovaav ovra ovrcav D. ovai{v) ovaatg ovai{v) A. V. ovtag ovTsg ovaag ' ovaai ovra ovra So yQ(i(fa>v, yQaqiovaa, yqacfov. YQcixpaiv, yQciipovaa, ygaxpov. svQoiv, svQovaa, svqov. 387. The 1 Aor. Part, in cig is declined like aag, naaa, nav. yQoixpdig, aaa, av, G. yqaxpavtog, darjg, &c. The Pass, and Mid. Participles in pisvog are declined like Adj. in og, rj, ov, as StxovadfiEv-og, t], ov, v mr, sovact ovaa, eov ovv. G. (ptX-eovrog ovv7og, sovarjg ovarig, iovrog ovvrog. D. CflX-tOVTl OVVTt, &c. So Fut. in a>v of Liquid verbs as, fisvmv, (isvovaa, fiEvovv. from jAsvtcoi', fisveovaoc, fisvsov. Srfkoai brika, show. Part. dijlSmv ^rfiSiv. Sing. N. Sql.-omv av, oovaa ov<7a, oov ovv. G. Sql-oovzog ovvTog, oovaijg ovarjg, oovzog ovvrog, D. 8qX-6ovTi ovvii, &c. 392. Participles of bqa, see. Ind. Part. Pres. OQaat oQco, OQiimv ogmv. Fut. oipn/xai, oipoftsrog. 2 Aor. sJSov, iSoiv. Perf. scoQUHU, smqaKag. SQlotiai, come (go). Pres. eoxofiai (i'mV from fjjuj, used instead of fp;fo'/H£»'Off). Put. {J.lai, ilni) »;Smc instead of £l£Wo'/<£»'04-, &c.) 2 Aor. ril&ovijiwv) D.&cov. Perf. ilrilvQa, llijlv&fog. 15 338 GHEEK OLLENDORFF. 393. Rule. — The Participle like the Adj. agrees in gender, number and case with its subst. TtairiQ oQcov, at yvvaXntg oQwaai, the father (while) seeing, the woman seeing. 394. The Participle is used in Greek much more ex- tensively than in English ; often where we use the verb with and, ivhen, since, although, because, &c. Xa^cov Tov Tiikov, rfk&sv, 0V1 oQas, ovx 6(p&alfiovg 'iiav, ov 77QOS as )J^a), aza ova s^ov- r«, ndvTCOv naqovtcav, ovdslg ele^- EV. he took his hat and came (tak- ing his hat, he came). you do not see, not having eyes (since you have not eyes). I shall not speak to you, not having ears (because you have not ears). all being present (though all were present) none spoke. 395. cptQco, I bring, bear- (irregular). Ind. Part. Pres. (ffga. (ftQCOV. Put. oiam, oiaav. 2 Aor. rirsyxov, iviyxav. Perf. svtivo^a, tvrivoy^as 6 vsTog, ov, the rain, rain. Tj yiciXii^S., rig, the hail, hail. 6 Xsi/^cop, orvog, the meadow. ij yaairiQ, iQog, the stomach (like nariJQ, Exc. Voc. regular yaartio). GREEK OLLENDORFF. 339 396. Exercises. I. Render into English. Ti (psQUCQ ; — TiaxTriqiav (psQco. — '^O ^aig tQ;(s- rac cpSQWv tt)v tov ysQovvog /Sa^tr tjQiuv. — H yvvrj oliyov TTQOVbQOV fjl-d-s, Tvovr'jQiov iv rij ^tiql cps- QOvOa. — Ot avBgs^ naqriOuv f.isv rj/x7v us^Qi' ttj^ ioTTSQag, Idovzsg ds roi/g dovsgag, ccTvrjXd'ov. — ^O viTog £>e rav vtcptXcov tQ^brac. — "0 vtrbg xal i) ^ccXa^a tig rovg 'ksc^avag ninvovotv. — XaXtTiov iovi TTQog TTjv yaGrkqa Xnyttv, uva ov?i t;(ovaav. — '0 ocpLg, £V rfj Tiocc xtif-ibvog, tov vtaviav dfj^a- Tcci. — -O ysQcov ocpo8Qa ^aigac. tov r/Xtov oqojv. — ElQrjxaGi Tcvsg tov tiKlov Xii)'Ov tivai. — Tov fxtv r'jXiOV nvQ tivao XsyovOt, ttjv 8s osXr/vrjv, yijv. — 'H ^aXa^a tntme ndoav ttjv tj/xsquv f^s^QC rr/g vvxTog. II. Render into Greek. What do you come bringing ? — I come bringing the stranger's cloak. — You have not brought his cloali:, but your own. — I shall not bring my cloak, but the mer- chant's. — Who will come, having a beautiful cloak? — Nobody. — The messenger, taking the letter, departed. — Having come into the forest, 1 went to splitting [iaitl^ov) wood with an axe and a wedge. — The horseman took 340 GREEK OLLENDORFF. his horse {la^av) and went up on to the hill. — Mounting {uva§dg) his horse, he went down through the plain into the large meadow.— When (ozs) the rain was falling, the sun was in the clouds. — If the hail had not fallen, the garden would have been beautiful. — Wine is a mirror of the mind. — Speech is the image of the soul. EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON. 397. The Participle (continued). The Fut. Part, in Greek is often used, especially with verbs of coming, sending, &c., to denote a purpose. ns'uno} as ttirmovTa, ijxai ■Z0V70 kt^mv, I send you to seek. I am come to say this. If the purpose is represented as in the mind of an- other, ag, as, may accompany the Part. Tov Iv^vov eXtt^sv coff aipcav, Tjldsv mg -^Xexpcov, he took the lamp, as about to = in order to light it. he came in order to steal. 398. Many verbs, which in Latin are followed by the InfirL, take in Greek a Participle, particularly verbs of seeing, liearing, knowing, making known, remeinher- ing, beginning, «fcc. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 341 OQoi as aoqov orza, 0Q(O OZI- CToqpOj," K, olSa I'-vrov ftaxdijiov ovia, oidu oil ixanuQin^ fdriv. iidnr 70V TzaiSa TQh'^ovra, iixovad GOV ilnnfiog, dijloig Tuvza ovrtag fiorta, SiiloTg (Off tavza. ovzaic; s^^si, I see that yon are wise. I know that he is happy. I saw the boy running. I heard you say. [ you show that this is so. 399. When the Participle thus stands for the Infin. the same rule applies as in the Infin. (see 370) viz. that if its subject is a Personal Pronoun coinciding with that of the principal verb, the Pronoun is omitted, and the Participle placed in the Nom. oldci aocpog up, Tjdsiv nlovaiog wv. I know that I am wise. I knew that I was rich. 400. olSa, 1 know, dSsiv, I knew. iaOi, know, slSag, knowing. fitixvrifiai, aai, rai, &o. / remember (Perf Pass, from fnvdofiai). Imper. /^.t'livijao, remember. Infin. ftsiivTja&ai, Part. fiiixvTjfit'pog. fiuvOura, Ilearti, understand. Fut. fia&rioofiai, Perf. /jsftccOijy.u, 2 Aor. ffiudov. TKLoa iriv SiSaaxa't.ov fiap- ■OuKx), /Atj-iiTiao ai&qanog wv, I learn from the teacher, remember that you are a man. 342 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 401. Exercises. I. Render into English. £1 avdqans, lO&c ■d'vy]voz cov. — £1 /3a6t}.tv, (j,'cfj.vr]00 av&QaTvoQ cov. — "lojutv ttjv ipv^rjv d&avu- Tov ovGav. — OvTOQ 6 nXovGLog, ov fitjLivijrac -Ovri- TOQ cov. — Olda TOv cpcXoaocfov Oocfjou 6vra. — /SaOiXtvg ayyt'kov tTitjuipt Xt'^ovra on cevrog ijiti. — Jti/QO iXrjXv&afiiv rov ^//roQog cexovaojUivot. — OvStlg ncoTTOTt ScoxQarovg oudtv ^taxov r'jxovot XsyovTog. — 'O TiuTJiQ 8r]Xog eore, Tt]p -dvyurboa cpcXav. — '0 i'fiTioQog Xkytc avrog fxbv ov TtXovawg, s/Lis 8& nXovauovarov tlvai. — 01 vtavlac tig to. OQTj di'sfifjOav cog xqvgov ^rjTr'jOovvczg. — 01 vtavlac ■jioXXd tiSsvat vo^i^oitatv. — 'O ysQoiv oldtv avrog ov noX'kd tldcog. — "OQcojuev rovrovg vovg f.iccd iirdg noXkd y.ul xuXa fitjiia-dr]?c d&avaroQ av. — 'Q, ■Jicct, f^kf^vrioo GcocpQoov tlvai.-^—TiQ rrjv ■&vQav avbca'Stv ; — "O xXsTirrig, ■d'vqav dvoit,ag, tiarjXdtv ag xXi-ipav. — 'Axova rav OQvi-d'av dSovrav. — '-Apcovo/uiv rag xoQug aSiiv. — 'S2 nal, dvoi^ov tijv i)vQav. — '0 &tog ■jiavTCCy^ov sGtcv. — TIdg 6 xoOf-iog nXrjQtjg Igt\ tov ■diov. — ' O TjXcog ocpS'aXfiog save rov xoGf-iov. GREEK OLLENDOEPr. 345 II. Render into Greek. I have learned these thmgs. — The king has learned .to be just. — I have heard the orator say many things. — ■ The o-rator knows that he has not spoken well. — The great king does not know that he is mortal. — I knew that I had not spoken well. — Nothing is immortal except vir- tue. — The good (man) knows how to honor the good. — As a mirror shows the face, so wine shows the mind. — I remember opening the door. NINETY-FIRST LESSON. 406. The Particijjle [continued). Genitive Absolute. — A Substantive and Participle are placed absolutely in the Gen. to express cause, time, and such other relations as we express by the Nom. ab- solute. Tov ijXtov lovTog, vv^ Cfsvyu, aoTi Xi-'yovTO';, sj'cj aiya, (fjLOv •Aslivan.vTog, rjX&sg, oiSs xelsvaavTog Ifiov, rjX&sg, the sun coming, night flees, you speaking (while you speak) I am silent. I directing, you came, not even I bidding ^though I bade, did you come. 407. The particle wg is used with the Gen. or Ace. absolute to indicate a reason existing in the mind of the person spoken of, or assigned by him. 15* 346 GREEK OLLENDORFF. aiya cog navrav eidorcov, aiyri tof Tzdvzag dSoicg, he is silent, as all knowing = on the ground that all know. Rem.— Diistinguish carefully the Gen. absolute with and without ci); ; thus, Xiysi, navTCov ncnQOvtrnv, ksyei ag ndinrnv TzaQovzaiv, he speaks, all being present (since all are present). he speaks, on the ground that, as supposing that all are present. xleico, I shut. Fut. '/.leicco, 1 Aor. 'sKlsiaa. kXhoov tijv -OvQar, V. ixOvtg GREEK OLLENDORFF. 347 ^t 'AOTivai, av, Athens. H A'lyvntoi, ov, ^gypt, Atyumioi, ^Egyptians. 'O A^tn.og, ov, the Nile. xXeirog, ?;, ov, famous, celebrated. 410. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'H Ai'yvTiTOQ ScoQor sgtc tov NttXov. — "^O NtlXos xXiivbi r)v Tzorafiog. — 'Ev 'Ad-r'jvacg nlkivol jjOav (fLloootpoL. — "O NtlXog Jth'jQrjg iorlv Ixdvav. — Toil TjXiou Xdf^novvog, navTa dijlcc eOtiv. — Tav QrjTOQWv Xtyovrav, nuvr&s -d-av fxaC,ov- ng feadij^iS-a. — Tav SidaO^aXav Xtyovrav, Gc- ycoOiv 01 fj.a&riTaL — Ovds (not even) Ityovrog TOV didaOxaXov., otya 6 vaavlag. — 'O narrjQ iisfx.- nti, TOV Ttalda tijv x^vquv xXtiaovTce. — Msfivrjfzat TTjv TTvXrjv Tavrriv tji TrgoaS^tv vvxtI avol^ag. — Tuiivcc Xsyscg ag navTCov tv s/^ovtcov. — JIdvTav Tccp/LUTOV EOri vovg ■ did TcavTCov ydq (for) rQsp^ei. II. Render into Greek. I know that I am mortal.- — I saw the boy both open- ing and shutting the door. — I remember shutting the door — Boy, remember to shut the door. — We being si- 348 GREEK OLLENDORFF. lent, the orators speak. — The few {twv oliyav) being si- lent, the many speak. — The ^Egyptians say that the sun and moon are gods. — In Athens were many beanliful porticoes. — The Nile is full of large fishes. — Near Athens was a celebrated river.^On coming hither, I saw the fishes in a golden cup. — Much hail has fallen. NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 411. The Participle xoith the Article. The Participle is used with the Art. in all cases and numbers substantively, to express the doer (or receiver) of the act, and may be rendered sometimes by a noun, or more commonly by the relative and verb ; thus, ygaqjcav, •ztjs ■j'Qaqiovaijg, TO yQCiCpOV, 01 yQaqsovtsg, he who writes =the writer, of her who writes, that which writes, they who write, the men who write. So, in the other tenses ; Aor. ri yQttxpaaa, Fut. 01 ygd-ypovjeg, Perf. tav ysyqacfoiav, she who wrote. they who will write. of those who have written. GREEK OLLENBORPF. 349 412. The Article and Participle thus used are con- structed like a noun ; as, 6 diwxmr c^tp^srai, 70V qitvyoira Sito'xro, i] ToD )Jyov7og qpojj'j;, Sia tov i}.rjXv&6ict, he who pursues will flee. I pursue the man who flees, the voice of him who speaks, on account of the man who has come. 413. While thus constructed as a noun, the Parti- ciple may govern its proper case as a verb. tavia unmv naqsaiiv, (fsvyay 70VS cfis xaxmg noiovv- Tj y.ogtj rj tqv iniaToXrjf yqaxpa- aa, the man who said this is pres- ent. I flee those who injure me. the maiden who wrote the let- ter. XQ^atf^og, ■)], OP, vsefiiL to TTQo^arov, ov, the sheep. &6Qv^og, ov, tumult. ij svaefisiu, ag, piety. ttfiaGrig, eg, unlearned, untauhgt (like nXyQrjg). iqvaoiiallog, ov, golden-fleeced (like ulnyog), from ygvaog, gold, and fiaXkog, a lock or fleece of wool. 350 gk.eek ollendorpp. 414. Exercises. I. Render into English. "0 ravra nocav. — 01 ravva jitTtoirjxorts. — L%a TOVQ ejus cpi^.ovvrag.—'O ■O'log ipiktl Ttuvrag TOi/g huvTOV TCf-iavrag. — Ova av /qvoov Xafiocg nXrjv naQu tov ty^ovrog. — 01 vvv ytXoJvreg ovx dtl ytXaoovzai. — 01 Grj/utQOv cftvyovrtg, avQLOV dtco^ovrai. — Tovg tov -d-tov rif-Lavvag aviog tl- fj.r]Ott. — 01 TOvg xateovg (pikovvrtg, ccvrol tioc xaxoi. — '0 S.V rfi yXaGGrj iov tyav, i'yst xai sv rfj aaQdia. — Ovy 6 noXXa tidag, d'kX 6 /^Qr]6ifj.a tibcog, ootpog. — Avxog, iScov TTOijuavug nQO^urov £0&LovTag, ^HXixog dv rjv, tl:w£, {^oQv^og, tl syco Tovro izolovv! — '0 ufta&rjg nXovGiog nQo/Sarov son ^TQvoofiuXXov. — JJaoav rav uQtTCov xuXXia- TT] S0TIV 77 a-uGs/jSia. II. Render into Greek. I love him who loves virtue.— We do good to those who do good to us. — Those who opened the door will shut it. — It is easy to love those who love us. — He who knows useful things is wise. — None is wise except him who knows useful things. — None is happy except him who honors God. — Those who speak are frequently less wise than those who are silent. — He who is silent is often wiser than he who speaks. — They who pursue are swift- er than those who flee. — This ignorant rich (man) is a golden fleeced sheep. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 351 NINETY-THIRD LESSON. 415. The Participle with the Article [continued). The rendering of the Participle varies according to the tense of the principal verb ; thus, riV IV 6 Xt'yrav ; 7(»Ei,' eiaiv 01 EiQTjHOTsg ; Tivss Tjaav 01 siQijuotsg ; who is it that speaks 1 who was it that was spealdng? who are they that have spoken ? who were they that had spoken? 416. ov with the Part, makes a positive, ftij a condi- tional negation ; as, ov Xtynav, jxij Itycov, 70VZ0V ov yQcHxpavTog, riXOov, cov ixri yquxpavTog, ovx av Tjk&OV he who does not speak. he who may not speak (if there be such), this man not writing, I came, you not writing, (in case of your not writing) I should not have come. 417. Distinguish carefully between the Infin. with the Art. and the Part, with the Art. The former is used only in the Neut. Sing, as an abstract noim ; the latter is used in all numbers and genders, and always as a con- crete. TO noiuv, 6 noicav, 01 noiovvisg, 10V nSTZoirjxtvui, TtaV TZeHODjKOTCOV, the doing (the act). he who does, they who do. of the having done. of those who have done. 352 GREEK OLLENUOE.PF, Rem. — The resemblance between these two classes of constructions is closest in the Neut. Sing, and there they should be distinguished with special care ; as, TO elvai, to ov, 70 liysiv, 70 Xtyor, TO iyiiv aV7l, 70V {Itj £/£(»', TO 'i~iov av7i 70V fiTj 'i'^ovrog, the being (the to be). that which is. the speaking. that which speaks. (the) having instead of not having, that which has instead of that which has not. |E5= Notice carefully constructions like the following : 70 70V yqa.\pav7a. nagsivai, IX 70V 70V yQaipav7a naqsLvai, to 70V 7av7a tlnovta, na- Qhlvai, OQOi tOV niQl TOt) y.li7l7EtV ).s- yovta, avn 70V V71SQ tov iteaXoqjotog liyiiv. his being present who wrote (the him who Wrote to be present), from his being present who wrote, the man's being present who said this. I see him who speaks about stealing, instead of speaking for him who has stolen. ri naiBsi'a, ag, discipline, instruction, education. 6 KaQnog, ov, fruit. ni'AQog,. a, ov, bitter. ri ariiaig, smg, acquisition, possession. 6 8ov}.og, ov, bondman, slave. greek ollendorff., 353 418. Exercises. I. Render into English. Uqo tov Uyaiv. — Oavftd^co rbv eiyuvva f^dl- lov r] TOV Uyovra. — Tivtq r)aav ol ndgovTii ora oci&davbv 6 :EcoxQdTr]C ; — 'Oliyoi. cpiloi naqfioav. — To ixlv ufxaQTccvtcv, qadiov, to di vTitQ tojv dixaQxavovTCov Xsytiv, xaltnov. — 'O Ttoi/Liijv tov Iv^iov dia^ii dvTi tov cptvytLf. — TtdvTtq cpilovai tov; savTOus cpcXovvrag. — 01 OtycJvTtg noXldmc, Twv ItyovTCov GO(pUTbQoi tlacv. — To Ocyav nol- Xdfeig XQKLTTOV ion tov Xsytcv. — t^iXti TvaiBtiav, ootptav, dqbTi)v, tvak^kiav. — Tqi naidilag cd ^dv qi'QuL Ttixgai tiaiv, oi- ds staQTioi, yXvxtig. — Al dQtTTJg XTTjatcg fj.6vai /jb,8aiai datv. — HoXldxig 6 TtXovOLog dovXog ian XQiiudrav. — ^O ■JtUL^tiav xal 60(piav (pcXcov uovog ylyvtrac oocpog. — '£^ tov TTjv Tiacdtiav cpiluv yiyvtrui fj oocpia. — 'ff dqtrt) juovrj dSavaTog /usvte,. — '0 dtOTiOTrjg ovvog noX- Xovg sp^ii dovXovg. II. Rendei' into Greek. Instead of speaking, yon are silent. — Instead of pur- suing, we flee. — He who pursues to-day, will flee to-mor- row. — He who loves virtue is happy. — He who threw the ball into the fountain, will flee into the house. — The serpent has his poison in his tongue,i but the flatterer in 354 GREEK OLLENDORFF. hig soul. — Nothing is better than being silent except speaking well. — Who was it that saw the king? — The same man who wrote (6 alzby 6 yQci^png) this letter. — The same girl who opened [fj avot'^aaa) the door is now shut- NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. 419. The Passive Voice. The Passive Voice has a Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Plnperf. 1 & 2 Fut. and 1 & 2 Aor. tenses ; and in a few verbs a third or Perf. Fut. ; thus, Ind. Pres. ygdcpofiat, am being wrilten. Imperf. iyQaq'Ofiijv, was bdng written. 1 Fut. yQaqj&j^aofiM, shall be. wrilten. 1 Aor. lyQciqi&ijv, was written. 2 Put. ygacp^aofiM, shall be written. 2 Aor. iyQdq}i]v, was written. Perf. yiyqajifiai, have been ■written. Pluperf iy£yQdiJfi>]i', had been written. Perf Fut. ytyQaiponai, shall have been wrilten. Rem. — Both forms of the Aor. are more frequent in the same verb in the Pass, than in the Act. Voice. 420. Inflection of the Ind. Pass. Most of the Pass, inflections have already been given : thus, Pres. YQuqioi-iai, 1 1 FuL yoacpdijao/xai, I ouai, ■)], ejai. 2 Fut. yijucft'ianiKa, \ OfisOoi', tsOov, saOov. Perf Fut. ysyQaipdfiai, J ofieOu, ssOs, ovtai. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 355 Imperf. ijQa]V, Pen". ysyQafijAtti, Pluperf. iysYQaiAfirjv, OfH]r, ov, STo. Ofxa&ov, eadov, taOijp. o'|UsO«, saOs, ovTo. Tjv, r]g, tj. riror, rjrriv. riixsv, i]TS, 7]aav. -yQafifiai, yQuxpai, yQanrai. yQdfins&oVjyQaqi&ov, yQacpOov. yQaft/xeOa, yuacpOs, yQKfift^roisiai\v) ■yQapfiriv, yQa\po, yQanro. yQUfilxaOov, ygatp&ov, yQdq)Oi;v. yqdfAfJisd a, ygaqide, ysyQajA-jjiiivoi ijaav. 421. Ind. Pres. nijinonai, am (being) sent. Imperf. iusfinojitir, was {being) sen!. 1 Fut. nsjjiifOrjao^ai, shall be sent. 1 Aor. inf/xrfi&ijv, was sent. Pert". nen-sfxfiai., (fixpai, have been sent. Pluperf; Msnififxrir, xpo, had been sent. Pres. (fiX-lojxai, ovfiai, 1 Fut. (pilriQriaofiai, Perf. nscpil-tjfiat, tjaai, tjtai, Pluperf. iTiiqiO.-finriv, ijao, j]to, Imperf. sq}iX-enfirjv ovfxrjv. 1 Aor. iqji).ij&ijv. 3 Plur. ns(j>tlrivtai. 3 Plur. i,7iS(pilrivro. Pres. Ind. iM^i^dvojiai, am taken, Fut. hjqtdyaofiai. 1 Aor. iXijcpOijv. Perf ftlq-^iiiM-xpui, -nnrai, Pluperi; eilri-fifiiiv-\po -nto, Imperf^ iXaft^avoi^tjv. 3 PI. sllrifii-iHOi si()l{r). 3 PI. elXiiufisvot ijaav. 356 GREEK OLLEiNDOaFF. Xf'yn/iat, iXsy^M^t "™ said, was said. XijOi'jSO/Aai, DJyOrjv. lils-yiiM, -|a(, -y.zai, 3 PI. Xslty^ivoi eial{v). ilsl-iyixriv -i^o, -exto, 3 PI. Xsltyfitvoi ijaav. daxvofiai, iday.fofiijv. 8iid-7]yfiai; »/5«'> '?x7«f, idtS-i'iy/xijv, »;|o, ijkzo. D. riyjxE&ov, r/'j^Oov, &c. D. r^yfisOov, ij/^&ov, riyi&riv, &c. 422. vno (under) with Pass. by. nnQOi rov, from, by. / less common than vno to nQOi' 70V, on the part of, by, ) denote the agent. in aq'Scog ISfiy^&rjv, intficpOi} TzaQU {vno) rov (iu atlt'ac, adsiy.Ha&ai. nQoa Tivog, I was bitten by a serpent, he was sent by the l], snifiifia uvTijv dia rov ayysXov, the letter was sent by the king. I sent it by (through) the mes- senger. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 357 424. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'H STtcOToXrj yqagjarai. — Ai eizlGtoIuI avvat V7T E^ov HyqacpdriOav. — IJaga rivoq eTi^icpdr] 6 ayyi)^og. — UaQcc tov ■jiutqoq fj.ov. — Haaat ai STiiGro'kal avTUt uvqlov nt^uff-^ijOovTai. — 01 dya- dol vno &iov (piXovvvac. — 01 iiaxol ouSs v(p eavTCov (pilovvrai. — Uavza ravrd aot TcoXXdxcQ XsXsxrai. — TiaiQ vno tov ocptaQ xarct tov 7c68u s8t']xi)-rj. — El f.ir] h'cpvys tci nQO^Sara, tXt'jrp&rj dv VTIO TOV XVHOV. '0 VVV (pkVyOV TVoXvv /QOVOV 8i- coxtTO. — El Tavra sXs;>^d'ri, ti; ovx dv s&avf^aGtv ; — 01 TOV -O-tov TCficovrsQ dil V7T avrov Tij-iuvvai. II. Render into Greek. The letter was written. — The letters have been writ- ten. — Nothing was written in the letter except these words. — A hammer was found [svQsdij) in the chest. — Nothing was foimd by the stranger except this cloak.— This wedge was found on the table. — Good men are loved by each other. — The good are loved by the good. — These words have been said by us. — ^^If the letter had been written (fygncfO'i) it would have been sent. — If I had been present (n'aQTJr) the letter would not have been written. 358 GREEK OLLENDORFF. NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 425. The Passive Voice [contiiiued). Pres. yqaqi- 1 Aor. yQa(j)&- 2 Aor. yqarf- Perf. yeyguft- Subj. Mode. mfiai, 7/, tjiai. Wfxs&ov, Tja&ov, ijador. cofii&a, riaOs, covrai. ' •qzov, iqrov. anEv, ^te, (acTi[i'). fii-'voi (0, xig, ri. fitfco, rjTOv, 1J10V. [livoi afisv, Tjts, mai(v) 426. Optative Mode. Pres. yQKCf- 1 Fut yQaqj&ria- 2 Fut. yQaq,ria~ Pf. Fut. ysygaxp- 1 Aor. ygaqi&F.i- 2 Aor. yqaqiu- Perf. ysygaii- ^ Ol/A,7]V, 010, Otto. ' oi'fis&ov, oiaDov, oic!&?]v. oiixsOa, oia&e, oivro. rjr, ijg, rj. 1]T0V, 1]r7}V. rifisv, rjTS, tjoav and iv. fiivos strjv, si)]g, e'lij. farm, eitjrov, eii^rrjv. fisroi sitjfisv, eir/TS, si'qaav and shv. Pres. j'gaqp- 427. Imperative Mode. t ov, sa&co. < ia&ov, ta&mv. ( sa&e, ea&tacav and sa&mv. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 359 I 1 Aor. ygdff&tjri 2 Aor. YQuqi/j&i Peri: ysYQ- t]rt{7]&i), »/T(B. ■>}JOV, T^TCOV. 7JTS, riTmaav. axpo, dcp&co. aif&ov, dq)dcov. aifOs, dq)&waav and d(f&(av. 428. Infinitive Mode. Pres. ygdcpea&at. 1 Fut. ygacp&T^asa&ac. 1 Aor. yQaqjdljvai. 2 Put. ygaqn'jaea&ai. 2 Aor. ■yQttcprji'ai. PerC ysyQucp&ai. PflFut. ysyqdx^sa&ai. 429. Participles. Pres. ygaqio/iEvog, ij, ov. 1 Fut. yqatfOrjaonivos, rj, ov. 1 Aor. yqacpdeig, elaa, iv. G. svzog, &c. 2 Fut. yQaqiijaoixsvog. 2 Aor. yQaq]v. 435. Synopsis of 1 Aor. Mid. {B)q)vXa^-dfiriV, ajxai, aif^rjv, ai, aa&ai, afterog. Inflection of Imper. ai, dadco, aaOov, da&oov, &c. (fvldtra) rov liovra, (fvXdtrofiat xov Xsovta, 7Jmv f|Hf q)o^£i, (fo^ov(iDi.i top leovta. I guard the lion. I guard against, beware of the h'on. the lion terrifies me. I fear the lion. 436. Exercises. I. Render into English. 'O dvrjQ cpvXavTai. tov Xsovra. — "^O Xscov cpvldr- Tsrai (Pass.) vjto tov dvSQog. — 0/ dv&Qanoi rovQ Xkovrag (pvXaTTOVTai,. — Tig r]fjdg (pvldrrtTai; — OvStlg Vfius (pijlccTTkrat. — Oi d^riQkvvai rd dygta ■d-riQia gjvXdTTOvrai. — 01 ddixoi dti dXXtjXovg cpvXaTTOvrai- — 01 siuxol dti touq xaxovg cpo/3ovv- rai. — 'H/uilg xavva rd ^rjQia cog /udXiOra ipo- GREEK OLLENDORFF. 363 fioufitS-oi'.—Oi ciyaS'olovdiv (pofiovvrat 7i}.>jv tov xaxoii. — ^O uyc({)oi ovdi top ■d'avarov (po^t'ivui. — "^O dav((TOi dtl rovg xaxoiji cpo/3ii. — 01 aSixoc dtl dllipAWi cpo^ovvTcu. — ' O staxoi xa\ rijv hav- Toii oy.idv cfo/jtlrai. — Tov xanov xat (even) i] avvoii 6Hid cpofiiT. — 0/ xaxo\ dtl dXX>j?.ovg cpo^l]- Govvai xal (pvXu^ovrac. II. Render into Greek. Always fear and shun evil. — The good (man) fears no evil.— ^Nothing will terrify the good man. — The hun- ter fears the fierce lion. — The fierce wild beasts terrify the hunter. — We shut our houses that we may guard against thieves. — We shut our doors because we fear the thief — The thief fears us. — This young man will terrify the thief — Pear God and honor the king. — He who hon- ors God will never fear. — The blind (man) fears all things. — -The good do not even fear death. — Virtue is a source of permanent happiness. NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 437. The Prepositions. The Prepositions are constructed as follows : Wifh the Cen.four ; ano, avii, £x(f^), nqo. With the Dat. /wo; iv,avv.^ With the Ace. /wo; ek, avd, {m^ to). With the Gen. and kccfour ; did, xard, vhsq, iaetcc. With the Gen. Dat. & Ace. six; Uficfl, ini, naqd, nf.qi, nqo?, iino. 364 GREEK OLLENDORFF. 438. I. Prep, loith the Gen. 'Avti over against = hence, instead of., in return for, for. Baaiksvg avzi Sovlov, ocpdaXfioi; avii ocfQaXfiov, a king instead of a slave. an eye (in return) for an eye. IIqo, before (of time, place, preference) ; before foi protection = on behalf of, for. 7TQ0 TTji; noXsoog, TJQO rov j^QOVOV, 7U ^Qayi'TfQot, nqo iwv ^tkiia- TZQO Saanoiav ■&aiatr, before the city, before the time, (to choose) t?ie meaner in pre- ference to the best, to die for our masters. 'y^nd, from (removal, distance) ; from, as source or occasion. he came from the city. from (by means of) the money. from tlie war. tjX&sp ano ifji nolsmi, ano 7WC y^Qrjfiarmv, ano Tov noXtaov, 'E>i{i^), out from (of place) ; out from (of time) = after ; of cause = in consequence of. in Tijf; olxiag, out of Ihe house. t| £i(>irjf)]i noXs/j-og, (out of) after peace, war. ix TOVTCov, (out of) in consequence of these things. 439. II. Prep, tvith the Dat. 'Ev, in, in the midst of = among. ysyfov ff vtoig, iv aoi Tzdt'ja tariv. in the region, an old man among youths, all things are in (dependent on) thee. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 365 Zvv, with, along with ; with = viith the help of. along with the horsemen. to vote (in conformity) with the law. with the help of the gods we shall want for nothing. (svv loi'i iTiTievatr, avv T(j5 i'6fii() xprjqiov &saOni, avv T)eoii ovdsvog anogijaoftev, 440. III. Prep, loith the Ace. ^Avd, up, back ; up = over, throughout. ava. Qoov, oixiiv ava to. ogr], ava naoav rjfUQav, ara nevzi (distributively), up stream. to dwell over, throughout the mountains, every day. by fives, five by five. Eig, into ; one thing itito another, as object ; hence, for, with reference to, against; — as result, — into, among. £ig rijv noXiv, nlovTog tov y.a>iiatov nqcoTOvg uysi, igrjOifiov sig nolsfiov, afxaQTareir sig tiva. sig into the city. wealth brings the worst among the first, useful ibr war. to commit error against any one. 'Sig, to (with persons). niixno) ag vfiag, \ I send to you. 441. IV. Prep, with the Gen. and Ace. /jia TOV. dta tov, through ; hence, by means of (through one thing to another). through the river. through the night. I send through, by a messen- Sia 10V noTafiov, 8ia, 7qg vvxTog, 8i ayj'i7.ov nifinco, ger. 366 GREEK OLLENDORFF. dta tov, on account of. dia ravta, on account of these things. Kara, down. xata TOV, down from ; — down in respect to = against; in a more general sense, relating to, upon, &c. QiTzro) y.nra rcof rzezgrnv, Xeyu -/.ax (fxriv, 6 aaTO, T^i' nolswg inatvog. I hurl down from the rocks, ho speaUs against me. the praise (bestowed) on the state. Kara rov, denotes general contact or relation without intimate connection — at, by, according to ; {lua rov, ex- tension over ; y.ara rov, contact at a point.) xa&' 'EXXada, Kara {tdhtacrav, ava rijv OdXaaaav, aar ixiivovt; rovg ^oovovg, Kara rnvrnv rov Xoyov, Kara ro di'y.awv, KaO' sviavrov, Kara noXsig, in Greece. by sea. over (throughout) the sea. at tliose times. according to tliis statement. according to justice. year by year, annually. by cities, city by city. Msrd {/Jeans, mid), among, with. fjLSza rov, atnong, with {in connection with). thai. /AST dpO(j(a/iaiv, ovBfv Kzda&ai /ttz dSuiag, fisra KaXXiaTi]g do^iji; tlrai. to be among men. to acquire nothing with injus- tice. to be (in connection) with the noblest reputaiion. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 367 {fiSTu t^, with the Poets, anions'.) fisza. Tov {into the midst of, poetic) ; next to, after. flSTU TaVTCl, fiezu dioiii,' yjvx>j ^eiorazov. after this. next to the gods, the soul is most divine. 'Ttzsq, over, above. vnsQ tov, over, beyond (with rest) ; over for protection = 071 behalf of, for ; in relation to (with idea of interest in). o &ioi Tov ii).iov tOrjxev vtzsq ovAHv vniQ Alyvnxov, }.£y£ip vnio rnOi, J.iystv vniQ rl'ii 'j'Qcicpijs, God placed the sun above the earth. to dwell beyond .^Egypt. to speak on behalf of any one. to speak in relation to the in- dictment. vmQ Tov, motion over or beyond ; chiefly, beyond as to conception, measure, number. Qin7ttr VTIfQ zov Soixov, vnsQ dvra/ziv ii noutv, vnsQ avOQO^nov, VTzeg nevtE hi] yeyoroig, to throvsr over the house. to do any thing beyond one's ability, beyond man (vyhat is human), having been born above five years (more than five years old). 442. T. Prep, with Gen. Dat. and Ace. 'Jfjifi, aboiit (lit. on both sides), (ijjrf) Toi; zov, about, on account of (not very common in prose). ocfiqil z^, about (not found in Attic prose). 368 GREEK OLLENDORFF. UsQi, around about. neqi rov, about, concerning. Liym neql rovTtav, \ I speak concerning these things. nsQt 7% close about ; (with verbs of fearing) foi . Xircorsg negi roTg atsQvoig, tunics about the breasts. they feared about, for the place. nsql rov, around, about (in a more general sense) ; in reference to. 01 nsQi [a/^cpt) Tiva, 01 nsQi {aficpt) nXttzcova, neg] iy.Hvovg rovg '^qovovg, aaxfQorsiv 71£qI tovg &sovg, ai negt to acofia rjdovat, those about any one. those about Plato ^ Plato and his school. about those times. to be right minded about, in re- ference to the gods. the pleasures pertaining to the body. 'En I, upon. km rov, rest on ; motion terminating in rest 07i or at. im ir^g ylqg nBta&ai, to lie on the earth, on us = in our time. Im T^, close on ; various relations with the idea of 6e- longing and dependence. oiy.ovaiv snt tj -daXaaarj, tjv TjXiog mi dvdfiaig, ^aiQEiv sn ala^Qaig rjdovalg, TlOlltV SIQIJfljV STll tovzoig, ini. T(j) adsXqiai slvai, they dwell on, by, at the sea. the sun was at, near its setting. to rejoice over, at (upon) base pleasures. to mal?e peace upon these con- ditions. 'to be (dependent) on one's bro- ther. GREEK OLLENDORFF. 369 im tor, motion upon (on to) ; to, against ; for. avn^ag Im rov "nnov, ini tag tcov nXovaimp &vQag ini tovg nolsfiiovg atQarsvei, to oftjitt, tni TzoUa azdSta iiixvHzai.^ isvai iip vdcoQ, mounting his horse. to go to the doors of the rich. he serves against the enemy, the eye reaches to, over many stadia, to go for, afler water. naqd, beside, near, naqa tou, from beside, from, by (with persons). STZsiiCfOr] naiia tov ^naiXiag, he came from you. he was sent by the king. rtaga i^ (by the side of)=6y, with, among- (chiefly with persons). sazT] naga t^ ^ctniXn, to nag vfilv ravzinov, naga totg evqigovovaiv svBom- fAHV, nag siJ.01, he stood by the king. the navy with you, which you have, to be in honor with the right minded, with me,=in my judgment. naga tov, to, toward ; along side of, during ; in com- parisoti with ; besides, beyond, in violation of. i] nag' ffis (laoSog, naga. tov nozafiov, naga tov noXefiov, naga to. u).la C^a, ovK ESn naga tavz alia, naga. to Bixaiov, the entrance to me, along the river (also near or by). during the war. in comparison with the other animals. there are no other things be- sides these. beyond, in violation of justice. 370 GREEK OLLENDORFF. riQog {tiqo, before), before, ifi front of TiQog roll (from before), before, on the part of, on the side of, for the advantage of. ) to nqog sanEQag rei'/^og. vSgog fiijSev nqog TtUTQog, ^Qrjarov nqog avc tvvoeiv xay.ov, nqog lav i'/^ovimv riOevai vo- Hov, the wall (before, fronting toward the west. on the father's side. it belongs to (is the part of) a good man to think no evil. to enact a law for the advan- tage of those who possess. nqog rqi, lest before, in front of ; by, at ; besides, in addition to. nqog t^ nolst, nqog zoTg nqdyiiaaw ehai, nqog tovTOig, before, by the city. to be upon, about one's busi- ness. besides, in addition to these things. nqog tov, to, toward; against ; in regard to, in com- parison with. sqivyov nqog ttjv yrjv, nqog ^aailsa nolifxeXv, leysiv nqog Tiva, ovBsv rj svysvsia nqog ra xqrj- yq-q nqog to ndqov asi ^ovXev- M&OLl, they fled to the land, to wage war against the king, to speak to, before any one. high birth is nothing to — in comparison with money, (viewed in relation to), we ought always to deliberate with reference to that which is present. 'Tno, under, vnb TOV, under, more commonly /rowi under, by. VTzn Tijg yrjg, In^ujv vno d/yia^rig, naixnofiai vno tov nuTqog, under the earth. taking from under a carriage. I am sent by my father. GREEK OLLENDOKFF. 371 vTio t^, under, at the foot of, subject to. Ta vTio t^ ovQav^ ovra, V7Z0 TCp OQSl, ^"yvTiTOg vno §aaiksi iysvsro, the things which are under heaven. under, at the foot of the moun- tain. ^gypt fell under, became sub- ject to the king. vno Tov, motion under ; towards under, to the foot of; extension under. isvcci V710 yijv, vno TO TEij^og i^X&ev, vno vvxra, vno TTiv vvxra, to go under the earth. he came under, to the foot of, the wall, toward night, under, during the night. €mk iin!i Entm. C. JULIUS CJESAR'S COTklMENTAHIES GALLIC WAE. With. English Notes, Critical and Explanatory; ALfexicori, 9eograpriical and Historical Indexes, &c. BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M., Editor of" ArnoWs Series of Greek and Laan Books," eic. One handsome vol, 12moj with Map. Price $1. Ti e press of Messrs. Appletnn is becoming prolific of superior editions of the classics used In schools, and the volume now before us we are disposed lo regard as one of the nost beautifu\ and highly finished among them all, both in its editing and its execution. The classic Latin in vrhich the greatest general and the greatest writer of his a^e recorded his achievements, has leen sadij corriipied in the lapse of centuries, and its restoration to a pure and perfect text is a work re- quiring nice discrimination and sound learning. The text which Mr. Spencer has adopted is that of Oudendorp, with such variations as were suggested by a careful collation of the leading criiica of Gennany. The notes are as they should be, designed to aid the labors of the student, not to supeisede them. In addition to these, the volume contains a sketch of the life of Cresar, a brief Lexicon of Latin words, a Historical and a Geographical Index, together with a map of the country in which the great Roman conqueror conducted the campaigns he so graphically de- scribes. The volume, as a whole, htwever, appears to be admirably suited to the purpose for which it was designed. Its style of editing and its typographical execuiinn reminds us of Prof. Lincoln's excellent edition of Livy— a work which some months since had already passed to a second im|)ression, and has now been adopted in most of the leading schools and colleges of the country. — Providence Journal. " The type is clear and beautiful, and the Latin text, as far as we have examined it, extremtly accnraie, and worthy of the work of the great Roman commander and historian. No one ediiiun hai5 been entirely foUowed.by Mr. Spencer. He has drawn from Oudendorp, Achainire. Laman-e, Oberlin, Schneider, and Giani. His notes are drawn somewha. from the above, and al.'so from Vu.ssius, Davies, Clarke, and Stutgart. These, together with his own corrections and notes, and an excellent lexicon attached, render this volume the most complete and valuable edition oi O'Tsar's Commentaries yet published. — Albany Spectator. EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITTOW. ADAPTED TO THE FIRST BOOK OF XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. BY JAMES R. BOISE, Professor in Brown University. One volume, 12mo. Price seventy-five cents. •,' For the cor.-'enience of the learner, an English-Greek Vocabulary, a Catalogue of the Irr» gular Verbs, and an Index to the principal Grammatical Notes have been appended. *• A school-book of the highest order, containing a carefully arranged series of exercisea de rived from the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis, (which is appended entire,) an EngMsh and ^Gretk vocabulary and a list of the principal modifications of irregular verbs. We regard it as one peculiar excellence of this book, that it presupposes both the diligent scholar and the painj taking teacher, in ether hahds it would be not only useless, but unusable. We like it also, be cause, instead of aiming to give the pupil practice in a variety of styles, it places before him but a single model cf Greek composition, and that the very author who combines in the greates: ds- gree, purity of lansuage and idiom, with a simplicity that both invites and rewards imitatiou." —Christian Register. "Mr. Boise is Professor of Greek in Brown University, and has prepared these exercises as an accompaniment to the First Book of the Anabasis of Xenophon We have examined tha plai- with some attention, and are struck wlih its utility. The exercises consist of short sen tcnces composed of the words used in the text of the Anabasis, and invoivins the same construe :ions;'and the system, if faithfully pursued, must not only lead to familiarity with the author and a natural adoption of his style, but also to great ea^e and fa^iltless excellence in Greek com •..ju'iiMM '' — T3-,-ntfifci.tnt Chiirr.hrfian. 04 frtrlt mi jCnttii. THE HISTORIES OF CAIUS CORNELIUS TACITUS. WITH NOTES FOR COLLEGKa BY W. S. TYLER, Professor of Languages in Amherst College. One volume, 12mo. ^1=00. The test of this edition follows, for the most part, Orelli's, Zurich, l'^48, which, beirp liaaed ov new and most faithful recension of the Meilicean MS., by his friend Bailer, may justly be on lidered as marking a new era in 'he history of the text of Tacitus, Inseveral passajres, howe'er, wliere he has needlessly departed from the MS., I have not Iiesitated to adhere to it in com,3ny with other editors, believing, that not unfrequentiy " the most corrected copies are the less correct." Tho various refa-Jings have been carefully compared throughout, and, if important, are referred tcia the notes. Tlie editions which have been most consulted, whether in the criticism cf the t*xt or in he preparation of the notes, are, besides Urelli's, those of Walther, Halle, 1831 ; Ruperti, Hanover. 1S39; ami Uod«rIein, Halle, 18-17. * * * * It wili be seen, that there are not nnfrequent references to my edition of the Germania ar.d Agricola. These are not of such a nature, as to render this incomplete without that, or essentially dependent upon it Still, if both editions are used, it will be found advantageous to read the Germania and Agricola first. The Treatises were written in that order, and in that order they best illustrate the history of the author's mind. The editor has found in his experience as a teacher that students generally read them in that way with more facilitv and pleasure, and he has con- Btruciecl tiis notes accordingly. It is hoped, that the notes will be found to contain not only the gramn^attcal, but likewise all the geographical, archiological and historical illnstrations, that are necessary to render the author intelligible. The editor has at least endeavored *o avoid the fault, which Lord Bacon says " is over usual in annotations and commentaries, viz., to blanch the obscure places, and discourse upon the plain." But it has been his constant, not to say hts chief aim, to carry students beyond the dry details of grammar and lexicography, and introduce thera into a familiar acquaintance and lively sympathy with the author and his times, and with thai great empire, of whose degeneracy and decline in itsbeginniiigs he has bequeathed to us so profounf and instructive a history. The Indexes have been prepared with much labor and care^ and, ii. U behoved, will add materially to the value of the work. — Extract from Preface. THE GERMANIA AND AGRICOI A OF CAIUS COENELIUS TACITUS. WITH NOTES FOR COLLEGES. BY W. S. TYLER, Professor of the Greek and Latin Languages in Amhersf College. One very neat volume, 12mo. 62J cents. "Wi welcomft the book as a lisefnl addition to the classical literature of our coontr}'. It is very rifjlly and etegantly prepared and printed. Thirteen pages are occupied by a well-wrilten Lift f Tacitus, in wi 'ch not merely outward events are narrated, but the character of the histor.un, Ijoih aa a man ano a writer, is minutely and faithfully drawn. The notes to each of the tieatises Hrs iiiiroduced by a general critique upon the merits and m-'itter of the work. The body of, the Doits IB drawn up with care, learning, and judgment. Points of style and grammatical construu- ticjis, find historical references, are ably illustrated. Wt have been struck wiih the elegani precision wliich marks these notes: they hit the happy medium between the too much oi some Nranientators, and the lod little of others." — J^ortk American Review. Am ng the numerous cKssical Professors who nave highly commended an! introduced this -.oinme are Fklton of Howard, Lincoln of Brown University, Crosby of Dartmouth, Coluu&it of Pri, iion, NoitTU of Hamilton IVckarp of Bowdoin. C>wi:n of New- York, CuaMPLi" '^ Wat*"! ie. &c., &.C 32 A MANUAL GRECIAN AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. BY DR. E. F. BOJESEN, Profl'ssor of the Greek Language and Literature in the University of Sotol Translated frnm the Germ.'rn. EDITED, WITH NOTES AND A COMPLETE SERIES OP aUESTIONS, BY TB« REV. THOMAS K. ARNOLD, M. A. RE'S'ISED WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. One neat volume, 12mo. Price $1. The present Manual of Greek and Roman Antiquities is far superior to any taring on njfl same topics as yet offered to tlie American nubliL- A principal Review of Germany says : — Small atj he compass of it is, we may confidently aifirm that it is a great improvement on all preceding word's of the kind. We no longer meet with the wretched old method, in which au'i- jects essentially distinct are herded toarether. and connected subjects disconnerted. but hav« g simple, systemati". arrangement, by whicti the reaoer easily receives a clear representation ■>< Roman life. We ^ longer stumble against countless errors in detail, which though long ago assailed and extirpated by Niebuhr and others, have found their last place "of refuge in our Ma- nuals. The recent investigations of philologists and jurists have been extensively, but carefull} a'ld circumspectly used. The conciseness and precision which the author has every when prescribed to himself, prevents the superficial observer from perceiving the essential superiority of the book to its predecessors, but whoever subjects it to a cai'elul examination will discover this on every page." The Editor says : — " I fully believe that the pupil will receive from these little works a coiTect and tolerably complete picture of Grecian and Roman life; what I may call the poli- tical portions — the account of the national constitutions and their effects — appear to me to be of great value ; and the very moderate extent of each volume admits of its being thoroughly mastered — of it? being got up and retained." " A work long need;d in our schools and colleges. The manuals of Rennet, Adam, Potter, and Robmson, with -ib more recent and valuable translation of Eschenburg, were entirely too Polummous. Here la nc '.her too much, nor too little. The arrangement is admirable— every subject is treated of in its proper place. We have the general Geography, a succinct historical Tiew of the general subject ; the chirography, history, laws, manners, customs, and religion ol eocA Suite, as well I'^the points of union lor all, beautifully arranged. V/e regard the work aa tll.e very best adjun*! to classical study for youth that we have seen, and sincerely hope that leuhers may be bri .^ht to regard it in the same light. The whole is copiously digested inta oppt^pnate questions." — jS*. Lit. Gazette. From Professor Lincoln^ of Broion University, " I found 03 my table after a short absence from home, your edition of Bojeoen's Greek an Botnan Antiquities. Pray accept my acknowledgments for it. I am am-eeably surprised to ild C-: exara'Bing it, that within so very narrow a compass for so comprehensive a sucject, the book contai is so much valuable matter ; and, indeed, so far as I see, omits noticing no topics es- sential It will be a very useful book in Schools and Colleges, and it is fair superior to any thing --ilat I know of the same kind. Besides being cheap and accessible to all students, it has the great merit of discussing its topics in a consecutive and connected manner." Extract of a letter from Proftssor Tyler, of Amherst College. " I have never foMUd time till lately to look over Bojcsen's Antiquities, of which you were SimI enou»h to sendme a copy. I think it an excellent book; learned, accurate, conri.«e, and ■ ci>-picunns : well adapted lor u.se in the Acarlemy nr the College, ami .ompiehi'ii'ling na • naT compass, moix "■■■u i.= valu?ble on the subioct iluiii man.v ex!eii,le,l trc.i';.=na " 3 ■ HAND BOOK OF MEDIAEVAL GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY, BY WILHEUM PUTZ, PRINCIPAL TUTOR IN THE GYMNASIUM OF DUREN. Translated from the German by REV. R. B. PAUL, M. A., Vicar of St. Augustine^ 8, Bristol^ and late Felloxc of Exeter Collegt, OxftnL 1 volume, 12mo. 75 cts. nSADS OF CONTENTS. I. Germany before the Migrations. II. The Migrations. THF MIDDLE AGES. FfnsT rEuioD.— From the Dissolution of the Western Empire to the Accessiori of the <7arlorJh giunii iirid Abbasides. SjicoND I'eriod. — From the Accession of the Carlovingians and Abbasides to the firet Crusadfc. Third Period.— Age of the Crusades. Fourth Period. — From the Termination of the Crusades to the Discovery of America. " The characteristics of this volume are : precision, condensation, and luminous arrangement It is precisely what it pretends to be— a manual, a sure and conscientious guide for the student through the crooks and tangles of Medieval history. ' ' ' * All the ^veii principles of tfai* ex'enai a Peiiod are carefully laid down, and ihe most important facts skilfully gi-0U|jed around tb.^in. There is no period of History for which it is more difficult to prepare a work like this. ami none for which it is so much needed. The leading facts are well established, but they are scattered over an immense space ; the principles are ascertained, but their development was alow, unequal, and interrupted. There is a general breaking up of a great body, and a parcelling of it out among small tribes, concerning whom we have only a few general data, and are left to analogy and conjecture for the details. Then come successive attempts at organization, each more or less independ-'>t, anrd all very imperfect. At last, modem Europe begins slowly w emerge from the chaos, bat still under forms which the most diligent historian cannot always comprehend. To reduoi such materials to a clear and definite form is a task of no small diffi- culty, and in which partial success deserves great praise. It is not too much to say that "t has never been so well done within a compass so easily mastered, as in the little volume wh.>.h ia new offered to the puh\ic."-~£!xtr act from American Preface. "This translation of a foreign school-book embraces a succinct and well arranged body ol facts concerning European and Asiatic history and geography during the middle'ages. It ia furnishci with printed questions, and it seems to b*i well adapted to its purpose, in all respects The medlasval period is one of the most interesting in the annals of the world, and a knowledge of its groat men, and of its progress in arts, arms, government and religion, is particularly ini- portan', since this period is the basis of our own social polity." — Commercial Advertiser. I' This is an immense amount of research condensed into a modera^elv sized volume, iu a way which no one has patience to do but a German scholar. The beauty of the work is its luminous arraiigeunent. It is a guide to the student amidst the intricacy of Mediaaval History, the most difficult period of the world to understand, when the Roman Empire was breakin? up and par^ celling out into smaller kingdoms, and every thing was in a transition state. It was a period o) chaos from which modem Europe was at length to arise. The author has briefly taken up the principal political and social influences whjcl' were acting on society, and shown their bearing I'rom the time previous to the migrations of the Northsrn nations, down through the middle ages to the sixteenth century. The n nes on the crusudej are particularly valuable, and the range of observation embraces not only Euicpe but Ae East, To the student it will be a most valuable Hand-book, savin^him a world of tn)«bl« in huaiiag up autliorities and facts,"- -Rev. Dr. Kip, in Albany State RegisttT. 4 d^nglislj. MANUAL or ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY AND HISTOEY. BY WILHELM PUTZ, PRINCIPAL TUTOR IN THE GYMNASIUM OP PUREN TraiLslated from the Gei-man. EDITED BY TliE REV. THOMAS K. ARNOLD, .1 V, AUTHOn. OF A SERIES OP "GREEK AND LATIN TEXT-BOOKS." One volume, 12mo. $1. " At no perioc naa Histoiy presented such strong claims upon the attention of the leamcu, aa XX tbe present day ; and to no people were its lessons of such value as to those of the Uniied 5-ates. With no past of our own to revert to, the great masses of our better educated are templed *,o overlook a science, which comprehends all others in its grasp. To prepare a lext-bojk, which shall present a full, clear, and accurate view of the ancient world, its geography, its polnical, civil, social, religious state, must be the result only of vast industry and learnm;;. Oui- exnmi- nation of the present volume leads us to believe, that as a text-book on Ancient History, for Col- leges and Academies, it is the best compend yet published. It bears marks in its methodical arrangement, and condensation of materials, of the untiring patience of German scholarship ; and in its progress through the English and American press, has been adapted for acceptable use in our best institutions. A noticeable ' feature of the book, is its pretty complete list of ' sources ol information' upon the nations which it describes. This will be an invaluable aid to the student in his future course of reading." " Wilhelm PiitZj the author of this ' Manual of Ancient Geography and History,' is Principa' Tutor {Oberleher) m the Gymnasium of Duren, Germany. Hfs book exhibits the advantages o the German method of treating History, in its arrangement, its classification, and lt3 rigid analy- sis. The Manual is what it purports to be, 'a clear and definite outline of the history of the principal nations of antiquity,' into which is incorporated a concise geography of each country. The work is a text-£>-:iok ; to be studied, and not merely read It is to form the groundwork ol subsequent historical investigation,— the materials of which are pointed out, at the proper places, in tlie Manual, in careful references to the works which treat of the subject directly under con- sideration. The list of references (especially as regards earlier works) is quite complete, — thus supplying that desideratum in Ancient History and Geography, which has been supplied so fully by 1) ". J. C. I. Gieseler in Ecclesiastical History. — " The nations whose histoiy is considered in the Manual, are : in Asia^ the Israelites, th» In- dians, the Babylonians, the Assyrians, the Medes, the Persians, the Phosnicians, the States of Asia Minor • in Africa^ the Ethiopians, the Egyptians, ihe Carthaginians ; in Europe^ the Greeks, the Macedonians, the Kingdoms which arose out of the Macedonian Monarchy, the Romans. The order in which the history of each is treated, is admirable. To the whole are appended a ' Chm uoIo» the best mo lei of pure geometrical reasoning, which ever iiu Deen, and perh;ip^ e^er wili be exhibit id ; and bei';n.se the Author has coiv^pjuiP.d som3 of the iiDtionant principles of the great i.iaster of Geommricians, and more especia.. / has t^iwn 'hai 'lis thenreins are not mere theory, )y many praclicai appticatio-ns : a quality lu a text bonk a' tus "Kience nr less uncommon than n Is imoortant." 6 (Iiigligij. A MANUAL OP ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY, COTWPKISING-:- I. Ancient Histori-, cohtaining the Political History, Geographical Position, and Socia Slate of itie Principal Nations of Antiquity, careTulIy tiisrested Irom the Ancient Wi'iters. aneculiarly adapted for the purposes of Elocutionary exercise, when the system of instruction Sursued by the Teacher is based upon the true principle of the art, viz. — a careful analysis of le structure and meaning of language, rather than a servile adherence to the arbitrary and me- chanical rules of Elocution. To impress upon the mind of the pupil that words are the exposition of thought, and that in reading, or speaking, every shade of thought and feeling has its appropriate shade of moduiutsd tone, ought to be the especial aim of every Teacher; and an author like Shakspeare, whose every line embodies a volume of meaning, should surely form one of our Elocutionary Text Books. • • ' Still, in preparing a selection of his works for the express purpose contem- plawd in my design, 1 have not hesitated to exercise a severe revision of his language, beyond that adopted in any similar undertaking — " Bowdler's Family Shakspeare " not even excepted; — and simply, because I practically know the impossibility of introducing Shakspeare as a Class Book, or as a satisfactory Reading Book for Families without this precautionary revisi in.— EiXtr jct from the Pi-^ace. fflSTORY AND GEOGRAPHY OF THE MIDDLE A G E S (chiefly FROM THE FRE»; IH.) BY G.W.GREENE, Mnsiructor m Brown University. Part I : History. One volume, 12mo. SI. Extract from Prpface, "This volume, as the title indicates, is chiefly lalten from a popular French wort, whje jU rapidly passed through several editions, and received the sanction of the University. Ii irill be found to contain a clear and satisfactory exposition of the Revolution o< the Middle Agos, with such eeneral views of literature, society, and manners, as are required to explain the pas- Base from ancient to modem history. At the head of each chapter there is an analytical sum- marv which will be found of great assistance in examination or in review Instead of a single list of sovereigns, I have preferred giving full genealogical tables, which \te much clearer and infinitely more satisfactory." ENGLISH STNONYMES, CLASSIFIED AND EXPLAINED, WITH PRACTICAL EXERCISES. DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE TUITION BY G. F. GRAHAM, Author of ' English, or the Art of Composition,' &c. WITH AN INTRODUCTION AND ILLUSTRATIVE AUTnORITjEa, BY HENRY REED, LL-D., Prof, of English Literature in the University of Penn, One neat Vol. l2mo. $1. CONTENTS. — Section T. Generic and Specific S.ynon5Txies. Tl. ActiTe and Passive Synonymes. 111. Sj'nonymes of Intensity. IV. Positive and Negative Synonymes. V. Miscellaneous Synonymes. Index to Synonymes. General Index. Extract /rom American Introduction. "This treatise is republished and edited with the hope that it will be found useful as a text booK in the study of our own language. As a subject of insiruciionj the study of the English tongue does not rereive thai amounr of systematic attention which is due to it, whether it b& combiaed or nu wiUi the study of the Greek and Laiin. In the usual courses of education, it has no larger scope ihan the study of some rhetorical principles and practice, and of grammatical rules, which, for the most part, are not adequate to the composite character and varied idiom of English speech. This is far from being enough to give the needful knowledge of what is the living language, boih of our English literature and oTihe multiform intercourse — oval and writ- ten— of our daily lives. Tiie language deserves belter care and more sedulous culture; it needs much more to preserve its purity, and to guide the progress of its life. The young, in.'=:iead of having^ only such familiarity wiih iheir native speech as practice without method or theory eives, phould be so taught and tramed as to acfjuire a habit of using words— whether with the voice or the pen—fitly and truly, intelligently ami ronscientiou.=!ly." '■For euch training, this book, it is believed, will prove serviceable. The ^ Prncr /col Exer- cises,' a tached to the explanations of the words, are conveniently prepared for the routine of instruction. The value of a course uf this kind, regularly and carefully completed, will be rnoro than the amount of information gained respecting'the words that are explained. It will tend to produce a thoughtful and accurate use of language, and thus may be acquired, almo.-^t uncon- sciously, thai which is not only a critical but a" moral habit of mind — the habit of giving utter- ance to truth in simple, clear and precise terms — of telling one's thoughts and leelings in word* that express nothing more and nothing less. It is thus that we may learn how to escape the evils of vagueness, obscurity and perplexity — the iinanifold mischiefs of words used thunghC- lessly and at random, or words used in ignorance and confusion. " In preparing this edition, it seemed to me that the value and literary interest of the book iright be increased by the introduction of a series of illustrative authorities. It is in 'he addi- ti'^ii of these authorities, container! within brackets under each urle, and also of a general index to fa.iilitate reference, that this edition differs from the original edition, which in other rewpecta is exactly reprinted. T have confined my choice of authorities to poetical quotation", c'lieJly be- cause it IS in [loeiry that language is found in its hitrliPst purity antl [perfection. The selec'iionfl have b'-^n made fibm three of the Engii^^h poets — each a great authority, antl each beloncfing to ad'ff?ient pei'ind. so that in this wiy some historical illustration of the lansuaga is given at tlio same lime. The quotatjor^ from Shakspeare (born a. d. 1564, died 1616) may be considered R8 illustrating the jse of the words at the close of the 16th and beginning of the 17th century ; ihtisp. fi-oni Milton (born 1608, died 1674) the succeeding half century, or middle osf the 17t|p <= i i THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY 4 Practical and Comprehensive System of French Pronunciation. By Gabriel Surenne, F. A. S. E., French Teacher in Edinburgh ; Corresponding Member oftlie French Grammatical Society q/Paris^ 4*c., ^c. Kci^rmled from a duplicate cast ol the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh edition. One stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 960 pages. Price $1,50 a few criticisms on its merits. Kinderhook Academy. Surnnne's French Dictionary is in many respects superior to those of " Meadow" and " Bnyer.** rr.e Pi'ftrT Names at the bottom of each page, and the method of explaining the pronunciatio':, (by the French soimds of the vowels, with which the pupil has become familiar.) are in my opm- loti distinguishing excellencies. SILAS METCALF. Priiirefon, N. J. We uso habitually the admirable Dictionary of Surenne. LYMAN COLEMAN. National Magazine. " This work must have been one of very great labor, as it is evidently of deep research. We nave given it a careful examination, and are perfectly safe in saying, we have never belore seun any thing of the kind at all to compare with it. Our space will not permit us to give more th.in this general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, our exarnina- •jrir of the work proves that all the promises are fulfilled, and we think that no siudent of the French language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess himself of it. Nor. indeid, will it he found less useful to the accomplishel French scholar, who will find in it a fund oi information which can no where be met with in ar.y one book. Such a work has for a long lin^o been greatlv neej'd, and Mr. Surenne has supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeal, tnerefore our well digested opinion, that no one in search of a knowledge of the niceties of the French lan- guage should be without it." Neio- York Observer. "E^ary student of the French language, and every person of taste who is fond of reading French, ind wishes to become proficient in that tongue, should possess this comprehensive biil rnnipleie dictionaiy. It embraces all the words in common use, and those in science and the fir-e arts, historical and geographical names, etc., with the pronunciation of every word according to the French Academy, together with such critical remarks as will be useful to eveiy learner- Ii is published in a form of exi-^?Tie condensation, and yet contains so full a compilation of words, definitions, etc., as scarcely to lea 'e any thing to be desired." Boston Courier. " Tins is, we believe, the first French pronouncing dictionary that has appeared m the Engli?h fieM of French education, and the compiler, Mr. Surenne, may well felicitate himself on the ds- sidsd SUCC3SS wli'"--.!! has attended his efforts to furnish us wiih this long expected de.^ideratum. Mr. S. ha3 rendered precise what was before uncertain, clear what had hitherto been obscure, it- fihort, put into the hands of both teachers and scholai-s, an authority in philology and pronimcia- tion. as good, as correct, as authoritative as .lohnson. Walker, or Webster, in the English tongue. The memo'l adopted for representing the sounds of words, is for the English or American eye Btid ear, so that faultless pronunciation maybe depended upon. The phraseology is ofienthat'of Uie French Academy, consequently of the highest auihori'v- and 1=; both copiou<^ and pnictical. The English pronunciation is precisely after the plan of Webster, imitated or fullowuif with the most scrupulous accuracy, thus givmg two extraordinary advantages in one work. viz.. a dic- tionary of French pronunciatirn, with words and meanings, and a standard of English pronunci- aiian. We exhort, we entreat teachei-s, parents, guardians, all interested in the education ol vcuth, to look at this splendid work of industry and ingenuity, and they will sceant^recoffnizeitB Bupcriority at a glance -j . up^nuBii. A DIG T 10 WARY OF TSR GERMAN AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, INDTCAItNO THK ACCENTUATiON OF EVIiRY OERMiN WORD, CONTAINING SEVKI14L IIljNDaB.D GERMAN SYNONYMS, TOOK fllER WITH A CLASiJiFlCATION AND ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VKRDfl, AND A DICTION- ARY OK GERMAN ABBREV^AT^)^^S. OOMPiLED FROM THE WORKS OF HILPERT, FLUGEL, GREIB, HEYSE, AND OTHERS. i N TWO P A RTS : r fiERMAN AND KNGlilSH — II. ENGLISH AND GERMAN BY G. J. ADLER, A. M., Professor of the Ocrman Language and Literature in the Univetsity of ihs City of J^cw-York. Oiq large volcme, (ivo , of 1100 pages. Price $5. SlroDgly and neatly boaiiL Extract from the Preface. In prepariii^ this volume, our principal aim was to offer to the American student of K^ German a work whicn would embody all the valuable results of the most rect^nt LLrBfitigaiions in German Lexicography, aud whi.;h might thus became not only a reliar ble guide for the practical acquisition of that laiiy;uage, but one wlji„h would not lorsaka him in the tiigher walks of his pursuit, tu whi'ch ~its literary and scieDliflc treasures would naturally invite him. The conviction that such a work was a desideratum, and one which claimed immediate attention, was first uccasioned by the steadily increasing inter- est manifested in the study of the German by such among us as covet a higher intellect- ual culiui-e. as well as those who ai*e ambitious to be abreast with the times in all that concerns the interests of Learning, Science, Ai't, and Philosophy. In comparing the difTerent German-English Diction ai'ies, it wae found that all of tbem were dclicieut in their vocabulai'y of foreign v/ords, wliich now act so important, a par* not only in scientific works, but also in Uie best classics in the reviews, journals, news- papers, and even in conversational language of ordinary life. Uence we have endeav- otu"ed to supply the desired words required in Chemisti-y, Minerakigy, Practical Art, Commerce, Navigation, Rhetoric, Grammar, Mythology, both ancient and modern. The ft\>centuation of the German words, first introduced by iJenisiua, and not a little improved by Hili)ert and his coadjutors, has also been adopted, and will be regarded as a most de- sirable and invaluable aid to the student. Another, and it is hoped not the least, valu- able addition to the volume, ai'e the synonyms, which we have generally given in an abridgod and not ,unl'reqiiently in a new form, from Hilpert, whu was the first that offered lo the English student a selection from the rich store of Eberhard, Maas, and Gruber. Neaj-iy all the Dictionaries published in Gei-many having been prepared with spe'."i(J reference to the German student of the Engliah, and being on that account incomplete in the Germ an- English pai't, it was evidently our vocation to reverse the order for this side of the Atlanlic, and to give the utmost possible completeness and perfection to the Ger "^aii pai't. This was the proper sphere of our labor. Morning Courier and JVeio-York Enquirer. The Applatons have justpubtished a Dictionary of the German Language, containing English names of German words, and German translations of English words, by Mr. AuLaR, Piofesbor of Gert^an in the University of the City of New-York. In view of the present at.d rapidly increasing disposition of American students to make themselves familiar with the Language and Literatm-c of Germany, the publication oj this work seems x. ipecially timely and important. It is in form a large, substantial oclavo volume of 141)0 pages, beautifully printed in cleai* and distinct type, and adapted in everj way to the constant services for which a lexicon is made. The purpose aimed at by thf edit